456
SINUMERIK 840D sl ShopTurn 11/2006 Edition Operation/Programming Introduction 1 Setting up the machine 2 Machine the workpiece 3 Creating a ShopTurn program 4 ShopTurn functions 5 Working with manual machine 6 G-code program 7 Working with a B axis 8 Working with two tool holders 9 Tool management 10 Program management 11 Messages, alarms, user data 12 Examples 13 Appendix A Index B Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl Software Version NCU System Software for SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl 1.4 with ShopTurn 7.2

1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

SINUMERIK 840D sl

ShopTurn

11/2006 Edition

Operation/Programming

Introduction 1

Setting up the machine 2

Machine the workpiece 3

Creating a ShopTurn

program 4

ShopTurn functions 5

Working with manual

machine 6

G-code program 7

Working with a B axis 8

Working with two tool

holders 9

Tool management 10

Program management 11

Messages, alarms,

user data 12

Examples 13

Appendix A

Index

B

Valid for Control SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl Software Version NCU System Software for SINUMERIK 840D sl/840DE sl 1.4 with ShopTurn 7.2

Page 2: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

SINUMERIK® Documentation Printing history Brief details of this edition and previous editions are listed below. The status of each version is indicated by the code in the "Remarks" columns. Status code in the "Remarks" column: A .... New documentation. B .... Unrevised reprint with new order number. C .... Revised edition with new status.

Edition Order No. Comments 03/2001 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP0 A 01/2002 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP1 C 06/2003 6FC5 298-6AD50-0BP2 C 08/2005 6FC5 398-5AP10-0BA0 C 11/2006 6FC5 398-5AP10-1BA0 C Trademarks

SIMATIC®, SIMATIC HMI®, SIMATIC NET®, SIROTEC®, SINUMERIK® and SIMODRIVE® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining designations found in this publication could be trademarks whose use by a third party for its own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.

Additional information is available on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol © Siemens AG 2006

Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. This does not, however, represent an obligation to supply such functions with a new control or when servicing. We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Nevertheless, differences might exist and therefore we cannot guarantee that they are completely identical. The information contained in this document is, however, reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the next edition. We welcome all recommendations and suggestions. Subject to change without prior notice

6FC5398-5AP10 - 1BA0 Siemens AG

Page 3: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 11/2006 Foreword

0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition iii

Foreword SINUMERIK

documentation The SINUMERIK documentation is organized in 3 parts: • General documentation • User documentation • Manufacturer/service documentation

An overview of publications, which is updated monthly and also provides information about the language versions available, can be found on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol Select the menu items "Support" "Technical Documentation" "Publications Overview."

The Internet version of DOConCD (DOConWEB) is available at: http://www.automation.siemens.com/doconweb

Information about training courses and FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions) can be found in internet under:: http://www.siemens.com/motioncontrol under menu item "Support"

Target group This documentation is geared toward the operator of single-slide lathes with SINUMERIK 840D sl.

Benefits This document familiarizes you with the operating elements and commands. Based on the manual, you are capable of responding to problems and to take corrective action.

Standard version This documentation only describes the functionality of the standard version of ShopTurn. Extensions or changes made by the machine tool manufacturer are documented by the machine tool manufacturer.

Other functions not described in this documentation might be executable in the control. However, no claim can be made regarding the availability of these functions when the equipment is first supplied or in the event of servicing.

Further, for the sake of simplicity, this documentation does not contain all detailed information about all types of the product and cannot cover every conceivable case of installation, operation or maintenance.

Page 4: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 Foreword 11/2006

0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. iv SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Technical support If you have any queries, please contact the following hotlines: European and African time zone

A&D Technical Support Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050-222 Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050-223 Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request E-mail: mailto:[email protected]

Asia and Australia time zone A&D Technical Support Phone: +86 1064 719 990 Fax: +86 1064 747 474 Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request E-mail: mailto:[email protected]

America time zone

A&D Technical Support Phone: +1 423 262 2522 Fax: +1 423 262 2589 Internet: http://www.siemens.com/automation/support-request E-mail: mailto:[email protected]

Technology hotline Phone: +49 (0) 2166 5506-115 The hotline is available on weekdays from 8:00-17:00

Questions on the manual If you have any queries (suggestions, corrections) in relation to this documentation, please fax or e-mail us: Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98-63315 E-mail: mailto:[email protected] For the fax form, see the response sheet at the end of the document

SINUMERIK Internet address

http://www.siemens.com/sinumerik

Page 5: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 11/2006 Foreword

0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition v

Safety information This Manual contains information which you should carefully observe to ensure your own personal safety and the prevention of material damage. Notes relating to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by means of a warning triangle, no warning triangle appears in conjunction with notes that relate to property damage. Depending on the hazard level, warnings are indicated in a descending order as follows:

Danger Indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

Warning indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

Caution means that there can be slight physical injury if the corresponding safety measures are not followed.

Caution means that there can be damage to property if the corresponding safety measures are not followed.

Notice Indicates that an undesirable result or condition can occur if the corresponding information is not observed.

If multiple levels of hazards can occur, the warning is always displayed with the highest possible level. If a warning with a warning triangle is to indicate physical injury, the same warning may also contain information about damage to property.

Qualified personnel Start-up and operation of the device/equipment/system in question must only be performed using this documentation. Commissioning and operation of a device/system may only be performed by qualified personnel. Qualified personnel as referred to in the safety guidelines in this documentation are those who are authorized to start up, earth and label units, systems and circuits in accordance with the relevant safety standards.

Page 6: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 Foreword 11/2006

0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. vi SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Correct usage Please observe the following::

Warning The equipment may only be used for single purpose applications explicitly described in the catalog and in the technical description and it may only be used along with third-party devices and components approved by Siemens. Correct, reliable operation of the product required proper transport, storage, positioning and assembly, as well as careful operation and maintenance.

Structure of the documentation

The following information blocks, marked by pictograms, are used in this documentation:

Orientation

Background information

Operating sequence

Explanation of the parameters

Additional notes

Software option The function described is a software option, i.e. the function can be executed on the control only if you have purchased and enabled the appropriate option.

Machine manufacturer The following reference appears wherever particular features or functions might have been changed or supplemented by the machine manufacturer:

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

References Whenever specific information can be found in other literature, this is indicated as follows:

References:

Terminology The meanings of some basic terms are given below in this documentation.

Program A program is a sequence of instructions to the CNC which combine to produce a specific workpiece on the machine.

Page 7: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 11/2006 Foreword

0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition vii

Contour The term contour refers generally to the outline of a workpiece. More specifically, it refers to the section of the program that defines the outline of a workpiece comprising individual elements.

Cycle A cycle, such as the tapping cycle, is a subroutine specified by ShopTurn for carrying out a recurring machining process. (A cycle is sometimes also referred to as a function.)

Spindles/axes The various spindles/axes are designated in this documentation as follows: S1: Main spindle S2: Tool spindle S3: Counter spindle C1: C-axis main spindle C3: C-axis counter spindle Z3: Supplementary axis (e.g. axis to move the counter spindle)

Other designations may have been assigned by the machine manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. Unit of measurement Metric units are used for all parameters in this document. The

equivalent imperial units are shown in the table below.

Metric Inch mm in mm/tooth in/tooth mm/min in/min mm/rev in/rev m/min ft/min

Page 8: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 Foreword 11/2006

0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. viii SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Notes

Page 9: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 11/2006 Contents 0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition ix

Contents Introduction 1-17

1.1 ShopTurn .................................................................................................................. 1-18 1.1.1 Sequence of operations............................................................................................ 1-19

1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20 1.2.1 Coordinate system.................................................................................................... 1-21 1.2.2 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-22 1.2.3 Operator panel keys.................................................................................................. 1-25 1.2.4 Machine control panels ............................................................................................. 1-27 1.2.5 Elements of the machine control panels................................................................... 1-27

1.3 User interface............................................................................................................ 1-31 1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-31 1.3.2 Operation via softkeys and hardkeys........................................................................ 1-34 1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-38 1.3.4 Entering parameters ................................................................................................. 1-42 1.3.5 CNC-ISO operator interface ..................................................................................... 1-44 1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.3) ..................................................................................... 1-46

Setting up the machine 2-47

2.1 Switching on and off.................................................................................................. 2-48

2.2 Approaching a reference point.................................................................................. 2-48 2.2.1 User agreement in Safety Integrated........................................................................ 2-50

2.3 Operating modes ...................................................................................................... 2-51

2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-52 2.4.1 Switching over the unit of measurement (millimeter/inch) ........................................ 2-52 2.4.2 Switching the coordinate system (MCS/WCS) ......................................................... 2-53 2.4.3 Spindles .................................................................................................................... 2-54

2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-56 2.5.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................... 2-58 2.5.2 Tool list...................................................................................................................... 2-59 2.5.3 Measuring the tool manually..................................................................................... 2-65 2.5.4 Measuring the tool with the measuring calipers ....................................................... 2-67 2.5.5 Calibrating the caliper ............................................................................................... 2-69 2.5.6 Measuring the tool with a magnifying glass.............................................................. 2-71

2.6 Measuring workpiece zero........................................................................................ 2-72

2.7 Work offsets .............................................................................................................. 2-73 2.7.1 Activating the zero-point offset ................................................................................. 2-74 2.7.2 Defining the zero-point offsets .................................................................................. 2-76 2.7.3 Work offset list .......................................................................................................... 2-77

2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-79 2.8.1 Selecting a tool and spindle...................................................................................... 2-79

Page 10: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 Contents 11/2006

0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. x SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

2.8.2 Traversing the axes...................................................................................................2-81

2.8.3 Positioning the axes ..................................................................................................2-83 2.8.4 Simple stock removal from the workpiece ................................................................2-83 2.8.5 Settings for manual mode .........................................................................................2-86

2.9 MDA ..........................................................................................................................2-86

2.10 Run times ..................................................................................................................2-88

Machining the workpiece 3-91

3.1 Starting/stopping machining......................................................................................3-92

3.2 Running-in a program ...............................................................................................3-94

3.3 Displaying the current program block .......................................................................3-96

3.4 Repositioning the axes..............................................................................................3-97

3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point ..........................................................3-98

3.6 Controlling the program run ....................................................................................3-103

3.7 Overstore.................................................................................................................3-105

3.8 Testing the program ................................................................................................3-106

3.9 Correcting the program ...........................................................................................3-107

3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions .......................................................................3-108

3.11 Simulating machining ..............................................................................................3-109 3.11.1 Simulation before the machining of the workpiece .................................................3-111 3.11.2 Simultaneous recording before machining a workpiece .........................................3-112 3.11.3 Simultaneous recording while a workpiece is being machined ..............................3-113 3.11.4 Modifying the shape of a blank for a G-code program............................................3-114 3.11.5 Different views of a workpiece ................................................................................3-114 3.11.6 Changing the cut-away ...........................................................................................3-118

3.12 Settings for automatic mode ...................................................................................3-120 3.12.1 Defining a dry run feedrate......................................................................................3-120 3.12.2 Parameterizing the workpiece counter....................................................................3-121

Creating a ShopTurn program 4-123

4.1 Program structure ...................................................................................................4-124

4.2 Fundamentals..........................................................................................................4-126 4.2.1 Operating planes.....................................................................................................4-126 4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and retract ....................................................................4-128 4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions ....................................................................4-130 4.2.4 Polar coordinates ....................................................................................................4-132 4.2.5 Pocket calculator .....................................................................................................4-133 4.2.6 Fit.............................................................................................................................4-135

4.3 Sequence program..................................................................................................4-136 4.3.1 Overview .................................................................................................................4-136 4.3.2 Creating a new program..........................................................................................4-138

Page 11: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 11/2006 Contents 0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition xi

4.3.3 Creating program blocks......................................................................................... 4-142 4.3.4 Changing program blocks....................................................................................... 4-146 4.3.5 Program editor ........................................................................................................ 4-147 4.3.6 Defining a quantity .................................................................................................. 4-150

ShopTurn functions 5-151

5.1 Linear or circular path movements ......................................................................... 5-153 5.1.1 Selecting a tool and machining plane..................................................................... 5-154 5.1.2 Straight line ............................................................................................................. 5-156 5.1.3 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 5-158 5.1.4 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 5-159 5.1.5 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 5-161 5.1.6 Polar straight line .................................................................................................... 5-162 5.1.7 Polar circle .............................................................................................................. 5-164

5.2 Bore......................................................................................................................... 5-165 5.2.1 Centered drilling...................................................................................................... 5-166 5.2.2 Thread centered...................................................................................................... 5-168 5.2.3 Drilling and reaming ................................................................................................ 5-169 5.2.4 Deep hole drilling .................................................................................................... 5-171 5.2.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 5-173 5.2.6 Thread milling ......................................................................................................... 5-175 5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns............................................................................ 5-177 5.2.8 Freely programmable positions .............................................................................. 5-178 5.2.9 Line position pattern................................................................................................ 5-180 5.2.10 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 5-181 5.2.11 Box position pattern ................................................................................................ 5-184 5.2.12 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 5-186 5.2.13 Pitch circle position pattern..................................................................................... 5-188 5.2.14 Including and skipping positions ............................................................................. 5-190 5.2.15 Repeating positions ................................................................................................ 5-191

5.3 Turning .................................................................................................................... 5-192 5.3.1 Roughing cycles...................................................................................................... 5-192 5.3.2 Recessing cycles ....................................................................................................5-195 5.3.3 Undercut form E and F............................................................................................ 5-198 5.3.4 Thread undercuts.................................................................................................... 5-199 5.3.5 Thread cutting ......................................................................................................... 5-201 5.3.6 Thread re-machining............................................................................................... 5-205 5.3.7 Parting.....................................................................................................................5-206

5.4 Contour turning ....................................................................................................... 5-208 5.4.1 Representation of the contour ................................................................................ 5-209 5.4.2 Creating a new contour........................................................................................... 5-212 5.4.3 Creating contour elements...................................................................................... 5-213 5.4.4 Changing a contour................................................................................................. 5-218 5.4.5 Stock removal ......................................................................................................... 5-220 5.4.6 Removal of residual material .................................................................................. 5-224 5.4.7 Grooving.................................................................................................................. 5-226

Page 12: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 Contents 11/2006

0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. xii SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.4.8 Grooving residual material ......................................................................................5-228 5.4.9 Plunge-turning.........................................................................................................5-229 5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material .............................................................................5-231

5.5 Milling ......................................................................................................................5-233 5.5.1 Rectangular pocket .................................................................................................5-234 5.5.2 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................5-238 5.5.3 Rectangular spigot ..................................................................................................5-242 5.5.4 Circular spigot .........................................................................................................5-246 5.5.5 Longitudinal slot ......................................................................................................5-249 5.5.6 Circumferential slot .................................................................................................5-252 5.5.7 Positions..................................................................................................................5-256 5.5.8 Multiple edge ...........................................................................................................5-257 5.5.9 Engraving ................................................................................................................5-259

5.6 Contour milling ........................................................................................................5-266 5.6.1 Representation of the contour.................................................................................5-269 5.6.2 Creating a new contour ...........................................................................................5-271 5.6.3 Creating contour elements ......................................................................................5-273 5.6.4 Changing a contour.................................................................................................5-280 5.6.5 Path milling..............................................................................................................5-282 5.6.6 Predrilling a contour pocket.....................................................................................5-287 5.6.7 Milling a contour pocket (roughing).........................................................................5-291 5.6.8 Removing residual material from a contour pocket ................................................5-294 5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket ...................................................................................5-296 5.6.10 Chamfering a contour pocket ..................................................................................5-300 5.6.11 Milling a contour spigot (roughing)..........................................................................5-301 5.6.12 Removing residual material from a contour spigot .................................................5-304 5.6.13 Finishing the contour spigot ....................................................................................5-306 5.6.14 Chamfering a contour spigot ...................................................................................5-309

5.7 Calling a subroutine ................................................................................................5-311

5.8 Repeating program blocks ......................................................................................5-313

5.9 Machining with the counterspindle..........................................................................5-314

5.10 Changing program settings .....................................................................................5-320

5.11 Calling work offsets .................................................................................................5-321

5.12 Defining coordinate transformations .......................................................................5-322

5.13 Programming the approach/return cycle.................................................................5-324

5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program..........................................................5-326

5.15 Teaching..................................................................................................................5-328 5.15.1 Teaching a cycle .....................................................................................................5-328 5.15.2 Teaching a position sample ....................................................................................5-329 5.15.3 Teaching a contour object.......................................................................................5-330

Page 13: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 11/2006 Contents 0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition xiii

Working with Manual Machine 6-331

6.1 Manual machine...................................................................................................... 6-332

6.2 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................. 6-333

6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode ....................................................... 6-333 6.3.1 Traversing the axes ................................................................................................ 6-334 6.3.2 Taper turning........................................................................................................... 6-335 6.3.3 Turning a straight line ............................................................................................. 6-336

6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode............................................ 6-337 6.4.1 Drilling with manual machine .................................................................................. 6-338 6.4.2 Turning with manual machine................................................................................. 6-338 6.4.3 Milling with manual machine................................................................................... 6-339

6.5 Simulation ............................................................................................................... 6-339

G Code program 7-341

7.1 Creating a G code program .................................................................................... 7-342

7.2 Executing a G code program .................................................................................. 7-345

7.3 G code editor .......................................................................................................... 7-347

7.4 Arithmetic variables................................................................................................. 7-350

Working with a B axis 8-351

8.1 Turning machines with a B axis .............................................................................. 8-352

8.2 Tool alignment in turning......................................................................................... 8-354

8.3 Milling with a B axis................................................................................................. 8-354 8.3.1 Swiveling ................................................................................................................. 8-355 8.3.2 Approach/Return..................................................................................................... 8-356

8.4 Position pattern ....................................................................................................... 8-358

8.5 Measuring a tool ..................................................................................................... 8-359

8.6 Tool selection for manual mode.............................................................................. 8-360

Working with two tool holders 9-361

9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders ......................................................................... 9-362

9.2 Programming with two tool holders......................................................................... 9-362

9.3 Measuring a tool ..................................................................................................... 9-363

Tool management 10-365

10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine............................................................. 10-366

10.2 Entering new tools in the tool list .......................................................................... 10-372 10.2.1 Creating a new tool ............................................................................................... 10-372 10.2.2 Setting up more than one edge per tool ............................................................... 10-374 10.2.3 Creating a replacement tool.................................................................................. 10-375

Page 14: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 Contents 11/2006

0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. xiv SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

10.3 Sorting tools ..........................................................................................................10-376

10.4 Deleting tools from the tool list ..............................................................................10-376

10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine ...............................................10-377

10.6 Relocating a tool....................................................................................................10-379

10.7 Positioning the magazine ......................................................................................10-381

10.8 Entering tool wear data .........................................................................................10-381

10.9 Activating tool monitoring ......................................................................................10-382

10.10 Magazine location management ...........................................................................10-384

Program management 11-385

11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn......................................................................11-386

11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded) .............................11-387 11.2.1 Opening the program ............................................................................................11-389 11.2.2 Program execution ................................................................................................11-390 11.2.3 Running a G code program from USB/network drive ...........................................11-391 11.2.4 Create a new directory/program ...........................................................................11-392 11.2.5 Selecting several programs...................................................................................11-393 11.2.6 Copying/renaming a directory or program ............................................................11-394 11.2.7 Deleting a directory/program.................................................................................11-395 11.2.8 Backing up/importing tool or zero point data.........................................................11-396

11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)...........................................11-399 11.3.1 Opening the program ............................................................................................11-401 11.3.2 Program execution ................................................................................................11-402 11.3.3 Loading/unloading a program ...............................................................................11-403 11.3.4 Executing a G code program from the hard disk, floppy disk or network drive ....11-404 11.3.5 Creating a new directory/program.........................................................................11-406 11.3.6 Selecting several programs...................................................................................11-407 11.3.7 Copying/renaming/moving a directory or program................................................11-408 11.3.8 Deleting a directory/program.................................................................................11-410 11.3.9 Backing up/importing tool or zero point data.........................................................11-410

Messages, alarms, user data 12-413

12.1 Messages ..............................................................................................................12-414

12.2 Alarms ...................................................................................................................12-414

12.3 User data...............................................................................................................12-415

12.4 Version display......................................................................................................12-417

Examples 13-419

13.1 Standard machining operations ............................................................................13-420

13.2 Contour milling ......................................................................................................13-432

Page 15: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 11/2006 Contents 0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition xv

Appendix A-441

A Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................A-442

B Index ........................................................................................................................ I-445

Page 16: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

0 Contents 11/2006

0

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. xvi SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Page 17: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction 1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-17

Introduction 1.1 ShopTurn .................................................................................................................. 1-18

1.1.1 Sequence of operations ............................................................................................ 1-19

1.2 Workstation ............................................................................................................... 1-20 1.2.1 Coordinate system .................................................................................................... 1-21 1.2.2 Operator panels ........................................................................................................ 1-22 1.2.3 Operator panel keys.................................................................................................. 1-25 1.2.4 Machine control panels ............................................................................................. 1-27 1.2.5 Elements of the machine control panels................................................................... 1-27

1.3 User interface............................................................................................................ 1-31 1.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................... 1-31 1.3.2 Operation via softkeys and hardkeys........................................................................ 1-34 1.3.3 Program views .......................................................................................................... 1-38 1.3.4 Entering parameters ................................................................................................. 1-42 1.3.5 CNC-ISO operator interface...................................................................................... 1-44 1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.3) ..................................................................................... 1-46

Page 18: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.1 ShopTurn

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-18 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

1.1 ShopTurn ShopTurn is an operating and programming software program for

turning machines that makes it easy for you to operate the machine and to program workpieces.

These are some of the features the software provides:

Setting up the machine Special measurement cycles make it easier to measure the tools and the workpiece.

Program execution You can display the program execution in 3-D on the screen. This makes it easy for you to check the result of programming and to observe the progress of workpiece machining at the machine (software option).

To execute a sequence program, you must have reading and writing rights.

The execution of sequence programs is a software option.

Program creation Programming the workpiece with ShopTurn is effortless, since it is graphically supported and doesn't require knowledge of G-code. ShopTurn shows the program in a user-friendly work plan and displays the individual cycles and contour elements in dynamic graphics. The powerful contour computer allows any contour to be input. A stock removal cycle with residual material detection saves extra machining processes.

Tool management ShopTurn saves your tool data. The software can also manage the data of tools that are not in the revolver.

Program management Programs can be created simply by copying and modifying similar programs; there is no need to start again from the beginning.

Remote diagnostics You can switch from ShopTurn to the CNC-ISO operator interface. There, you can also activate a remote diagnostic which allows the machine to be operated via an external computer.

Page 19: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.1 ShopTurn

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-19

1.1.1 Sequence of operations

Two typical working situations are considered separately in this Guide. • You want to execute a program for the purpose of automatically

machining a workpiece. • You want to create the program to be used for machining a

workpiece.

Program execution Before you execute a program, you have to set up your machine. To do this, you must perform the following actions, during which you will be supported by ShopTurn (see Sec. "Setting up the Machine"): • approach the reference point of the machine

(only for incremental position measuring systems) • tools measured • define the workpiece zero • enter any other work offsets If you have completely set up the machine, you can select a program and automatically execute it (see Sec. "Machining a Workpiece").

Program creation If you create a new program, you can select whether you would like to make a sequence program or a G-code program (see "Creating a Sequential Control Program" or "G-code Program"). When creating a sequence program, ShopTurn prompts you to input all relevant parameters. Programming progress is automatically indicated in a dashed-line diagram. Help screens that explain the parameters in each operation also support you with programming. You can, of course, also insert G code commands in a sequence program. A G code program, however, must be created entirely out of G code commands.

Page 20: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.2 Workstation

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-20 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

1.2 Workstation In addition to the lathe with CNC/positioning control, a ShopTurn

workstation also has an operator panel and machine control panel.

Workstation configuration

Turning machine You can use ShopTurn on a single-slide lathe with three axes, of a main spindle, of a tool spindle, and of a counter-spindle.

Control ShopTurn runs on the SINUMERIK 840D sl CNC-controller with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded) and PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced).

Operator panel Communication with ShopTurn is done via the operator panel.

Machine control panel You operate the lathe using the machine control panel.

Turning machine complete with control

Operator panel

Machinecontrol panel

Page 21: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.2 Workstation

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-21

1.2.1 Coordinate system

When machining a workpiece on a lathe, one basically uses a right-angled coordinate system. This consists of the three coordinate axes X, Y, and Z which are parallel to the machine axes. The coordinate axis Y does not have to be set up. Spindle axis Z is an independently rotating axis and is designated with the letter C.

The positions of the coordinate system and the machine zero depend on the type of machine used.

Position of the coordinate system, machine zero and workpiece zero (example)

WM X+

Z+

Y+

W = Workpiece zero

C

M = Machine zero

Page 22: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.2 Workstation

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-22 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

1.2.2 Operator panels

You can use one of the following operator panels for the PCU:

OP 010 OP 010C OP 010S OP 012 OP 015

Operator panel OP 010

3

4

2

1

6

.

5

2

Operator panel OP 010

1 Screen 2 Screen keys 3 Horizontal softkey bar 4 Vertical softkey bar 5 Alphanumeric keypad

Correction/cursor pad with control keys and input key 6 USB interface

Page 23: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.2 Workstation

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-23

Operator panel OP 010C

3

4

2

1

6

.

5

2

Operator panel OP 010C

1 Screen 2 Screen keys 3 Horizontal softkey bar 4 Vertical softkey bar 5 Alphanumeric keypad

Correction/cursor pad with control keys and input key 6 USB interface

OP 010S slimline

operator panel

1

A3

A4A2

5

A2

OP 010S operator panel

1 Screen 2 Screen keys 3 Horizontal softkey bar 4 Vertical softkey bar 5 USB interface

Page 24: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.2 Workstation

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-24 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

OP 012 operator panel

1

7A2A3

A4

A2

A4

6

A5

OP 012 operator panel

1 12" screen 2 Screen keys 3 Horizontal softkey bar 4 Vertical softkey bar 5 Alphanumeric keypad

Correction/cursor pad with control keys and input key 6 USB interface 7 Mouse

Operator panel OP 015

1

5

A2

A3

A4

A2

Operator panel OP 015

1 15" screen 2 Screen keys 3 Horizontal softkey bar 4 Vertical softkey bar 5 USB interface

Page 25: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.2 Workstation

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-25

1.2.3 Operator panel keys

Alarm Cancel Cancels the alarm that is marked with this symbol.

Channel Has no meaning for ShopTurn.

Help Toggles between the process plan and programming graphics as well as between the parameterization screen form with programming graphics and the parameterization screen form with the help display.

Next Window Has no meaning for ShopTurn.

Page Up or Page Down Page upward or downward in the directory or in the process plan.

Cursor Navigate between different fields or lines. Use Cursor right to open a directory or program. Use Cursor left to switch to the next highest level in the directory tree.

Select Chooses one of a number of options presented. This key has the same function as the "Alternat." softkey.

End Moves the cursor to the last input field in a parameterization screen form.

Backspace • Delete the value in the input field. • In insertion mode, it deletes the character after the cursor.

Tab Has no meaning for ShopTurn.

Shift Depress the Shift key to enter the upper character shown on the dual input keys.

Page 26: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.2 Workstation

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-26 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Ctrl Use the following key combinations to navigate in the process plan and in the G code editor: • Ctrl + Pos1: Jump to the beginning. • Ctrl + End: Jump to the end.

Old Has no meaning for ShopTurn.

Del • Deletes the value in the parameter field. • In insertion mode, it deletes the character marked by the cursor. • Deletes the machining lines during parallel drawing and in the

simulation.

Insert Activates insertion mode or the pocket calculator.

Input • Terminates entry of a value in the input field. • Opens a directory or program.

Alarm - only OP 010 and OP 010C Opens the "Messages/Alarms" operating area. This key has the same function as the "Alarm list" softkey.

Program - only OP 010 and OP 010C Opens the "Program" operating area. This key has the same function as the "Prog. edit" softkey.

Offset - only OP 010 and OP 010C Opens the "Tools/Offsets" operating area. This key has the same function as the "Tool zero point" softkey

Program Manager - only OP 010 and OP 010C Opens the "Program Manager" operating area. This key has the same function as the "Program" softkey.

Page 27: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.2 Workstation

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-27

1.2.4 Machine control panels

The lathe can be equipped with a machine control panel by Siemens or with a specific machine control panel from the machine manufacturer.

You perform actions on the lathe via the machine control panel, for example, traversing axes or starting the machining of the workpiece. When functions are active, the LEDs on the corresponding keys on the machine control panel light up.

1.2.5 Elements of the machine control panels

Emergency Stop button Press this pushbutton in an emergency, i.e. when there is a danger to life or there is a risk of damage to the machine or workpiece. All drives will be stopped with the greatest possible braking torque.

For additional responses to pressing the Emergency Stop button, please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Reset

Reset • Interrupts execution of the current program.

The CNC control remains synchronized with the machine. It is in its initial state and ready for a new program run.

• Cancels an alarm

Jog

Jog Select Machine Manual operating mode.

Teach In

Teach In Has no meaning for ShopTurn.

MDA

MDA Selects MDA mode.

Auto

Auto Selects Machine Auto operating mode.

Page 28: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.2 Workstation

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-28 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Single Block

Single Block Executes the program block by block (single block).

Repos

Repos Repositions, re-approaches the contour.

Ref Point

Ref. Point Approach reference point.

VAR

Inc Var (incremental feed variable) Incremental mode with variable increment size.

1

... 10000

Inc (Incremental feed) Incremental mode with predefined increment size of 1, ..., 10000 increments.

A machine data code defines how the increment value is interpreted. Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Cycle Start

Cycle Start Starts execution of a program.

Cycle Stop

Cycle Stop Stops execution of a program.

+X ...

Z

Axis keys Traverse axis in corresponding direction.

Rapid

Rapid Traverses axis at rapid traverse (fastest speed).

WCS MCS

WCS MCS Switches between the workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work) and machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).

Page 29: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.2 Workstation

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-29

%

Feedrate/Rapid Traverse Override Raises or lowers the programmed feedrate or rapid traverse. The programmed feedrate or rapid traverse is set to 100% and can be adjusted between 0% and 120% (only up to 100% for rapid traverse). The new feedrate setting appears in the feedrate status display on the screen as an absolute value and as a percentage.

Feed Stop

Feed Stop Stops execution of the running program and shuts down axis drives.

Feed Start

Feed Start Continues execution of the program in the current block and ramps up to the feedrate specified in the program.

%

Spindle override Increases or decreases the programmed spindle speed. The programmed spindle speed is set to 100% and can be controlled from 50 to 120%. The new spindle speed setting appears in the spindle status display on the screen as an absolute value in percent.

Spindle Dec.

Spindle Dec. – only OP032S machine control panel Decreases the programmed spindle speed.

Spindle Inc.

Spindle Inc. – only OP032S machine control panel Increases the programmed spindle speed.

100%

100 % – only OP032S machine control panel Restores the programmed spindle speed.

Spindle Stop

Spindle Stop Stop spindle.

Spindle Start

Spindle Start Start spindle.

Page 30: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.2 Workstation

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-30 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Keylock switch You can use the keyswitch to set various access rights. The keyswitch

has four settings for protection levels 4 to 7. Machine data can be programmed to interlock access to programs, data, and functions at various protection levels.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. The keyswitch has three keys of different colors that you can remove

in the specified positions:

Position 0 No key Security class 7 Position 1 Key 1 black Security class 6 Position 2 Key 1 green Security class 5 Position 3 Key 1 red Security class 4

Lowest Access rights

⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ↓ Increasing

Access authorization ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ⏐ ↓

Highest Access rights

When you change the key position to change the access authorization, this is immediately not visible on the operator interface. You have to initiate an action first (e.g. close or open a directory).

If the PLC is in the Stop state (LED of the machine control panel is flashing), ShopTurn does not evaluate the keyswitch positions during boot up.

The machine manufacturer can set up protection levels 0 to 3 using a password. When the password is set, ShopTurn does not evaluate the keyswitch position.

Page 31: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-31

1.3 User interface

1.3.1 Overview

Screen layout

User interface

1 Active operating mode/operating area and secondary mode 2 Alarm and message line 3 Program name 4 Program path 5 Channel state and program control 6 Channel operational messages 7 Position display of the axes 8 Display for

• active tool T • current feedrate F • active spindle (S1 = main spindle, S2 = tool spindle,

S3 = counter spindle) • spindle utilization in percent

9 Display of active work offsets and rotation 10 Working window 11 Dialog line for additional explanatory text 12 Horizontal softkey bar 13 Vertical softkey bar 14 Softkeys 15 Screen buttons

Page 32: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-32 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Secondary mode REF: Approaching a reference point REPOS: Repositioning INC1 ... INC10000: Fixed increment INC_VAR: Variable increment

Channel status RESET

Active

Interrupted

Program control SKP: Skip G code block DRY: DRY run feedrate !ROV: Feedrate override only (not feedrate and rapid traverse override)SBL1: Single-block (stop after each block that has a function on the machine) SBL2: Selection not possible in ShopTurn (stop after each block) SBL3: Single-block fine (stop after each block, also within a cycle) M01: Programmed stop DRF: DRF offset PRT: PRogram Test

Channel operational messages

Stop: An operator action is required.

Wait: No operator action is required. If a dwell time is active, the remaining dwell time is displayed. It is either displayed in seconds or as spindle revolutions.

Position display of the axes

The actual value display in the position display refers to the SZS coordinate system (settable zero system). The position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero is displayed. Symbols for axis displays:

Linear axis clamped Rotary axis clamped

Feedrate status Feedrate is not enabled

Spindle status Spindle is not enabled

Spindle is stationary

Spindle is turning clockwise

Spindle is turning counterclockwise The display of the spindle utilization as a percentage can be 200 %.

Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Page 33: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-33

Key to the meaning of the symbol colors: Red: Machine is stationary Green: Machine is running Yellow: Waiting for operator to take action Gray: Miscellaneous

Screen buttons

Machine Call active operating mode (Machine Manual, MDA, or Machine Auto).

Return Has no meaning for ShopTurn.

Extension Changes the horizontal softkey bar.

Menu Select Calls the main menu:

The machine manufacturer can display defined symbols instead of the

program path (4). The program path is then displayed together with the program name (3).

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Page 34: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-34 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

1.3.2 Operation via softkeys and hardkeys

The ShopTurn operator interface consists of various screen forms in which there are eight horizontal and eight vertical softkeys respectively. You operate the softkeys with the keys next to the softkey bars. Each softkey displays a new screen form.

ShopTurn has 3 modes (Manual Machine, MDA, and Machine Auto) and 4 operating areas (Program Manager, Program Messages/Alarms, and Tools/Zero-point offsets).

To switch from one operating mode/operating area to another, press the "Menu Select" key. The main menu is displayed, in which you can select the appropriate operating area via a softkey.

Alternatively, you can call the operating areas via the hardkeys on the operator panel.

Jog MDA Auto

You can activate an operating mode directly at any time via the keys on the machine control panel. If you select the "Machine" softkey in the main menu, the screen form for the currently active mode appears.

Page 35: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-35

If you select another operating mode or operating area, the horizontal and vertical softkey bars change.

Main menu

Operating mode Machine Manual

Page 36: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-36 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

If you press a horizontal softkey within an operating mode or operating area, only the vertical softkey bar will change.

Operating mode Machine Manual

Function within Machine Manual operating mode

Page 37: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-37

When the symbol appears to the right of the dialog line on the operator interface, you can change the horizontal softkey bar within an operating area. This is done by pressing the "Expansion" key. Pressing the "ETC" key again will take you back to the original horizontal softkey bar.

Within an operating mode or operating area, you can use the "Back" softkey to return to the next highest screen form.

Use the "Abort" softkey to exit a screen form without accepting the entered values and return to the next highest screen form.

When you have entered all the necessary parameters in the parameterization screen form correctly, you can close the screen form and save the parameters using the "Accept" softkey.

Use the "OK" softkey to initiate an action immediately, e.g., to rename or delete a program.

On

Some softkeys are displayed with a black background when you activate the function assigned to them.

Program test Off

In that case, you can deactivate the function by pressing the softkey again. The softkey will then have a gray background again.

Page 38: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-38 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

1.3.3 Program views

You can display a work step program in various views.

Program manager In the program manager, you manage all your programs. You can also select a program here for machining the workpiece.

Program manager

-or- Select the program manager with the "Program" softkey or "Program Manager" key.

You can move around within a directory using the "Cursor up" and "Cursor down" keys.

Use the "Cursor right" key to open a directory.

Use the "Cursor left" key to move up to the next-higher directory level.

-or-

Use the "Cursor right" or "Input" key to open the process plan for a program.

Page 39: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-39

Process plan The process plan provides an overview of the separate machining steps of a program.

Process plan

You can move between the program blocks in the process plan using the "Cursor up" and "Cursor down" keys.

Use the "Help" key to switch between the process plan and the programming graphics.

Programming graphics The programming graphics show the contour of the workpiece as a dynamic graphic with dashed lines. The program block selected in the process plan is color-highlighted in the programming graphics.

Programming graphics

Page 40: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-40 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Use the "Cursor right" key to open a program block in the process plan. The appropriate parameterization mask complete with programming graphics is then displayed.

Parameter screen with programming graphics

The programming graphics in a parameterization screen form show the contour of the current machining step in broken-line graphics complete with the parameters.

Parameter screen with programming graphics

Use the cursor keys to move between the input fields within a parameterization screen form.

Use the "Help" key to switch between the programming graphics and the help display.

Page 41: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-41

Parameter screen with help display

The help display in the parameterization screen form explains the parameters of the machining step individually.

Parameter screen with help display

The colored symbols in the help displays have the following meaning:Yellow circle = reference point Red arrow = tool traveling at rapid traverse Green arrow = tool traveling at machining feedrate

Page 42: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-42 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

1.3.4 Entering parameters

On setting up the machine and during programming, you must enter values in the white fields for various parameters. Parameters, whose input fields have a gray background, are automatically calculated by ShopTurn.

Parameter

White fieldinput

Unit

Gray fieldinput

Parameterization screen form

Selecting a parameter

Some parameters require you to select from a number of options in the input field. Fields of this type do not allow you to type in a value.

-or-

Press the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key until the required setting is displayed.

The "Alternat." softkey is only visible when the cursor is positioned on an input field that presents a choice of options. The "Select" key is also only active in this situation.

Entering parameters

For the remaining parameters, enter a numerical value in the input field using the keys on the operator panel.

Enter the desired value.

Press the "Input" key to terminate entry.

-or- If you do not want to enter a value, i.e. not even "0", press the "Backspace" or "Del" key.

Page 43: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-43

Selecting the unit

For certain parameters, you can choose between different units.

-or-

Press the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key until the required unit is displayed.

The "Alternat." softkey is only visible when you have a choice of units for this parameter. The "Select" key is also only active in this situation.

Deleting parameters

If an input field contains an invalid value, you can delete it completely.

-or-

Press the "Backspace" or "Del" key.

Changing or calculating parameters

If you only want to change individual characters in an input field rather than overwriting the entire entry, switch to insertion mode. In this mode, the pocket calculator is also active. You can use it during programming to calculate parameter values.

Press the "Insert" key.

Insertion mode and the pocket calculator are activated.

You can navigate within the input field using the "Left cursor" and "Right cursor" keys. Use the "Backspace" or "Del" key to delete individual characters.

For more information on the pocket calculator, see Section "Pocket calculator".

Accepting parameters

When you have correctly entered all the necessary parameters in the parameterization screen form, you can close the screen form and save the parameters.

-or-

Press the "Accept" softkey or the "Cursor left" key. If there are several input fields in a line and you want to use the "Cursor left" key to accept the parameters, you must position the cursor in the leftmost input field.

You cannot accept the parameters if they are incomplete or obviously erroneous. In this case, you can see from the dialog line which parameters are missing or were entered incorrectly.

Page 44: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-44 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

1.3.5 CNC-ISO operator interface

From the ShopTurn operator interface, you can switch to the CNC operator interface. There, you can activate remote diagnostics. This allows the controller to be operated via an external computer.

The machine manufacturer must have released the change from the

ShopTurn operator interface to the CNC-ISO operator interface.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. You can find a detailed description of the CNC-ISO operator interface

in: References: /BEM/, HMI Embedded Operator's Guide SINUMERIK 840D sl /BAD/, Operator's Guide HMI Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/840D sl /PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/840D sl /PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

The remote diagnosis is a software option.

For further information about remote diagnosis, please refer to: References: /FB/, Description of Functions, Extension Functions, F3 Remote diagnosis

CNC-ISO operator

interface

Press the "CNC ISO" softkey in the horizontal softkey bar.

-and-

Then press the "CNC ISO" softkey in the vertical softkey bar.

Page 45: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 11/2006 Introduction1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 1-45

CNC-ISO operator interface

Press the "Menu Select" key if you want to return to the ShopTurn operator interface.

-and-

ShopTurn

Press the "ShopTurn” softkey.

Remote diagnostics

Press the "Menu Select" key in the CNC-ISO operator interface.

Diagnosis

Press the "Diagnosis” softkey.

Remote diagnosis

Press the "Remote Diagnosis" softkey.

Page 46: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

1 Introduction 11/2006 1.3 User interface

1

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 1-46 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

1.3.6 ShopTurn Open (PCU 50.3)

There is ShopTurn software for the PCU 50.3 in the ShopTurn Open version.

In ShopTurn Open, the HMI-Advanced operator sections "Services",

"Diagnosis", "Commissioning" and "Parameters" (without tool management and zero-point offsets) are located directly on the expanded horizontal softkey bar.

You can find a detailed description of the integrated HMI-Advanced

operator interface in: References: /BAD/, Operator's Guide HMI Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D/840D sl

Some of the softkeys in the basic menu or extended menu bars may be assigned to other operating areas by the machine manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Page 47: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine 2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-47

Setting up the machine 2.1 Switching on and off.................................................................................................. 2-48

2.2 Approaching a reference point.................................................................................. 2-48 2.2.1 User agreement in Safety Integrated........................................................................ 2-50

2.3 Operating modes ...................................................................................................... 2-51

2.4 Settings for the machine ........................................................................................... 2-52 2.4.1 Switching over the unit of measurement (millimeter/inch) ........................................ 2-52 2.4.2 Switching the coordinate system (MCS/WCS) ......................................................... 2-53 2.4.3 Spindles .................................................................................................................... 2-54

2.5 Tools ......................................................................................................................... 2-56 2.5.1 Creating a new tool ................................................................................................... 2-58 2.5.2 Tool list...................................................................................................................... 2-59 2.5.3 Measuring the tool manually ..................................................................................... 2-65 2.5.4 Measuring the tool with the measuring calipers........................................................ 2-67 2.5.5 Calibrating the caliper ............................................................................................... 2-69 2.5.6 Measuring the tool with a magnifying glass .............................................................. 2-71

2.6 Measuring workpiece zero ........................................................................................ 2-72

2.7 Work offsets .............................................................................................................. 2-73 2.7.1 Activating the zero-point offset.................................................................................. 2-74 2.7.2 Defining the zero-point offsets .................................................................................. 2-76 2.7.3 Work offset list........................................................................................................... 2-77

2.8 Manual mode ............................................................................................................ 2-79 2.8.1 Selecting a tool and spindle ...................................................................................... 2-79 2.8.2 Traversing the axes .................................................................................................. 2-81 2.8.3 Positioning the axes.................................................................................................. 2-83 2.8.4 Simple stock removal from the workpiece ................................................................ 2-83 2.8.5 Settings for manual mode ......................................................................................... 2-86

2.9 MDA .......................................................................................................................... 2-86

2.10 Run times .................................................................................................................. 2-88

Page 48: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.1 Switching on and off

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-48 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

2.1 Switching on and off To switch the controller or machine on and off, please see the

machine manufacturer’s specifications. After running up the controller, the basic "Manual Machine" screen

appears.

Basic manual machine screen

2.2 Approaching a reference point You turning machine can be equipped with an absolute or incremental

path measuring system. An incremental path measuring system must be calibrated after being switched on, but an absolute path measuring system does not. For the incremental path measuring system, all the machine axes must therefore first approach a reference point, the coordinates of which are known to be relative to the machine zero-point.

The sequence in which you must refer the axes is preset by the

machine manufacturer. The axes can also all approach the reference point simultaneously, depending on the manufacturer’s settings.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

During the reference point traversing, the feedrate override is in effect.

Page 49: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.2 Approaching a reference point

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-49

Notice

Before approaching the reference point, the coordinates of the actual value display are incorrect. In addition, the path limitations of the axes set by the machine manufacturer are not yet in effect.

Warning

During the reference point approach, the axes travel along a direct path to the reference point. Therefore, first move the axes to a safe position in order to avoid collisions when during the approach to the reference point. It is important that you observe the movement of the axes on the machine during the approach to the reference point.

Referencing axes

Jog

Select "Machine Manual" mode.

Ref Point

Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.

X

Select the axis to be traversed.

… +

Press the "-" or “+” key.

The selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The coordinate of the reference point is displayed. The axis is identified with the following symbol:

If an axis key in the wrong direction is selected, the axis does not move.

Interrupting axis motion

Feed Stop

Press the "Feed Stop" key. The axis stops.

Approach again with axis

X

Select the axis to be moved and press the desired direction key.

The axis resumes moving in the direction of the reference point.

After the all machine axes have traversed to the reference point, the path measuring system is calibrated and the path limitations of the axes are in effect. The correct coordinates of the reference point are displayed in the actual value display.

Page 50: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.2 Approaching a reference point

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-50 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

2.2.1 User agreement in Safety Integrated

If you are using Safety Integrated (SI) on your machine, you will need to confirm that the current displayed position of an axis corresponds to its actual position on the machine when you reference an axis. Your confirmation is the precondition for the availability of other Safety Integrated functions.

You can only give your user agreement for an axis after it has

approached the reference point.

The displayed axis position always refers to the machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).

User agreement with Safety Integrated is only possible with a software option.

For more information on user agreement, please refer to: References: /FBSI/, Description of Functions SINUMERIK Safety Integrated

Jog

Select "Machine Manual" mode.

Ref Point

Press the "Ref Point" key on the machine control panel.

X

Select the axis to be traversed.

… +

Press the "-" or “+” key.

The selected axis moves to the reference point and stops. The coordinate of the reference point is displayed. The axis is identified

with the symbol.

User Agreement

Press the "User agreement" softkey.

The "User agreement" window opens. It shows a list of all machine axes with their current and SI positions.

Position the cursor in the "Agreement" field for the axis in question.

-or-

Give your agreement by pressing the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key.

The selected axis is marked with a cross meaning "safely referenced" in the "Agreement" column.

By pressing the "toggle keys," you again deactivate the agreement.

Page 51: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.3 Operating modes

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-51

2.3 Operating modes There are various modes in which you can work in ShopTurn:

• Machine Manual • MDA (Manual Data Automatic) • Machine Auto

Machine Manual In "Machine Manual“ mode, there is a provision for the following

preparatory actions in manual mode:

• Approaching the reference point, i.e. calibrating the machine’s path measuring system

• Preparing a machine for executing a program in automatic mode, i.e. measuring tools, measuring the workpiece and, if necessary, defining the work offsets used in the program

• Traversing axes, e.g. during a program interruption • Positioning axes • Simple stock removal of workpiece

Jog

You can select the "Manual Machine“ mode using the "Jog" key. The parameters set under "T, S, M..." affect all movements in manual mode with the exception of reference point approach.

Manual machine If you have the "Manual Machine" option, you are working in "Machine Manual" for the manual mode. Under "Machine Manual," you have the option of carrying out the following machining processes without having to write a program for them:

• Setting-up and simple traversing movements • Taper turning • Straight (plan or longitudinal turning) • Drilling (axial drilling, axial threads, drilling, reaming, deep-drilling,

threads) • Turning (stock removal, groove, undercut, threads, tapping) • Milling (pocket, shank, groove, multi-edged, engraving)

MDA In MDA mode, you can enter and execute G code commands non-modally to set up the machine or to perform a single action.

MDA

You can select MDA mode via the "MDA" key.

Page 52: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.4 Settings for the machine

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-52 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Machine Auto In automatic mode, you can execute a program completely or only partially. You can also trace execution of the program in a graphical display on the screen.

Auto

You can select "Machine Auto" via the "Auto" key.

2.4 Settings for the machine

2.4.1 Switching over the unit of measurement (millimeter/inch)

You can set millimeters or inches as the unit of measure. Switching the unit of measure is done for the entire machine, i.e. ShopTurn automatically converts all the specifications to the new unit of measuresuch as:

• Positions • Tool offsets • Work offsets

Independently of the general machine setting, you can change the unit of measure for manual mode (see Sec. "Settings for Manual Mode") or change it again for individual programs (see Sec. "Creating a New Program"). These settings for the unit of measure are only relative to the programmed positions. Tool offsets, zero-point offsets, etc. remain in the unit of measure of the entire machine. If, for example, you have set millimeters as the unit of measure for the machine, but a workpiece drawing is scaled in inches, you can select inches as the unit of measure for this program. This means that during programming, you can directly specify the positions in inches. On the other hand, tool offsets, feedrates, etc. must be set in millimeters as usual.

Jog

Open the extended horizontal softkey bar in "Machine Manual" mode.

Press the "ShopT. sett.” softkey.

Inch

Press the "Inch” softkey. Inch

Unit of measure: Millimeters (softkey is deselected.) Inch

Unit of measure: Inch (softkey is selected.)

A prompt asks you whether the unit of measure should really be switched.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The unit of measure for the entire machine is adapted.

Page 53: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.4 Settings for the machine

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-53

2.4.2 Switching the coordinate system (MCS/WCS)

The coordinates in the actual value display are relative to either the machine coordinate system or the workpiece coordinate system. The machine coordinate system (MKS), in contrast to the workpiece coordinate system (WKS), does not take into consideration any zero-point offsets (see Sec. "Zero-point Offsets"). By default, the workpiece coordinate system is set as a reference for the actual value display.

WCS MCS

Press the "WCS MCS" key.

-or-

Jog -or- Auto

Select the "Machine Manual" mode or "Machine Auto" mode.

-and-

Actualvalue MCS

Press the "Actual value MCS" softkey in order to select or deselect this coordinate system. Actualvalue MCS WKS (softkey is deselected.) Actualvalue MCS MKS (softkey is selected.)

Page 54: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.4 Settings for the machine

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-54 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

2.4.3 Spindles

In the "Spindles" screen form, you store the dimensions of the spindles on your machine.

Measuring a manual tool If you want to use the collet of the main or counter spindle as a

reference point during manual measuring, specify the collet dimensions ZL0 or ZL1.

Counterspindle You can measure either the forward edge or stop edge of the counter-

spindle. The forward edge or stop edge automatically serves as the valid reference point when traversing the counter-spindle. This is especially important when gripping the workpiece with the counter-spindle (see Sec. "Machining with the Counter-spindle").

Front edge Stop edge

Dimensioning of the counter-spindle

Please observe the machine manufacturer’s specifications for the parameter "Tensioning."

Main spindle

Dimensioning of the main spindle

Page 55: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.4 Settings for the machine

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-55

Tailstock

Dimensioning of the tailstock

The length of the tailstock (ZR) and the diameter of the tail stock (XR) of the spindle screen are needed for the display of the tailstock in the simulation.

Select the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Press the "Expansion" key.

Press the "Spindles” softkey.

Enter the parameters.

The settings take effect immediately.

Parameters Description Unit

S1 Speed limit for the main spindle rpm

Tensioning Main spindle: Tensioning the tool outside or inside

ZL0 Main spindle collet dimensions (inc) mm

S3 Speed limit for the counter-spindle rpm

Tensioning Counterspindle: Tensioning the tool outside or inside

Endpiece type Dimensions of the forward edge or stop edge

ZL1 Counter-spindle collet dimensions (inc) mm

ZL2 Counter-spindle stop dimensions (inc) mm

ZL3 Counter-spindle endpiece dimensions (inc) - (only for dimensioning the stop edge) mm

XR Tailstock diameter mm

ZR Tailstock length mm

Page 56: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-56 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

2.5 Tools The various tool geometry parameters must be referenced while the

program is running. These are entered in the tool list as so-called tool offset data. For each call-up of a tool, the controller takes the tool offset data into consideration.

When programming therefore, you only have to enter the workpiece dimensions from the finishing drawing. After this, the controller independently calculates the individual tool path.

Tool length offset The tool length offset compensates for the length differences between

the various tools in the X and Z direction. The tool length is the distance between the tool-carrier reference point T and tool tip P. If the tool is tensioned in the revolver for a new machining direction, other tool length offsets will result.

T

T Length Z Length Z

Leng

th X

Leng

th X

P

P

X

Z

Tool length offsets

You can determine the tool length offset using the "Measure tool" function or manually with calipers or a magnifying glass. The control calculates the traversing movements from the tool length offset and wear values (see Sec. "Entering Tool Wear Data").

Page 57: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-57

Tool/cutting edge radius offset

The workpiece contour and the traversing path of a tool are not identical, since a tool should not move with its center-point along the contour that is to be finished. ShopTurn shifts the programmed tool path, depending on the radius of the tool and on the machining direction, such that the tool's cutting edge traverses exactly along the desired contour. This shifted tool path is called the equidistant.

Equidistant Equidistant

Equidistants during turning and milling

The controller calculates the shifted tool path from the tool radius entered in the tool list and the wear values (see Sec. "Entering Tool Wear Data").

You can find further information on radius offset in Sec. "Program blocks".

Page 58: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-58 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

2.5.1 Creating a new tool

Before you can work with a new tool, you must first enter it in the tool list. When setting-up a new tool, ShopTurn makes a variety of tool types available to you. The tool type determines which geometry data are required and how they will be computed.

Possible tool types

The rotary drill can be used for centric drilling and turning. The direction of rotation must be specified for a turning tool.

Install the new tool in the revolver (see Sec. "Selecting the Tool

and Spindle").

Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Position the cursor on the location in the tool list that the tool occupies in the revolver. The location must still be empty in the tool list.

New > tool

Press the "New tool" softkey.

Roughing tool ...

3D_Probe

Select the desired tool type and position using the softkeys. Using the "Additional" softkey, additional tool types or cutting edge positions are made available to you.

The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the selected tool type.

Page 59: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-59

Enter a unique tool name. You can edit the tool name as required. A tool name may contain a maximum of 17 characters. You can use letters, digits, the underscore symbol (_), periods (".") and slashes ("/").

Enter the offset data of the tool.

2.5.2 Tool list

In the tool list, enter all the tool parameters that are needed:

• for calculating the tool length or radius offset, • for calculating the machining cycles, • for displaying the tools during the simulation of the program

execution.

Depending on the tool type, various parameters are required.

Le

ngth

X

Cutter radius

Length Z

Plat

e le

ngth

Toolholder angle

Plate angleCutting direction

Rougher/Finisher

Page 60: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-60 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Plat

e le

ngth

Radius Plate width

Leng

th X

Length Z

Recessing tool

Leng

th X

Length Z

Diameter

Milling tool

Le

ngth

X

Diameter

Length Z

Tip angle

Drill

Leng

th X

Length Z

Radius

Threading tool

Page 61: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-61

Leng

th X

Radius

Length Z

Button

Dia

met

er

Length Z Leng

th X

Stop

Le

ngth

X

Length Z

Bore Ø

Radius

Rotary drill

Toolholder angle

Plate angle

88° 90°

Rotary drill

Page 62: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-62 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Leng

th X

Length Z

Diameter

Pitc

h

Screw tap

Length Z

Leng

th X

Dia

met

er

3D probe

Tool list

The tool list is adapted by the machine manufacturer if necessary.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Loc. Location number in the magazine

The tool’s location number, which is located in the revolver in the machining position, has a gray background.

If you are working with several magazines, then you will first see the magazine number and then the location number inside the magazine (e.g. 1/10). Tools that are not currently located in the magazine are displayed without a location number. (You will find these tools when sorting for a magazine location at the end of the tool list.)

Page 63: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-63

For chain and disk magazines, the locations for a spindle and a dual-gripper can also be displayed.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Spindle location

Locations for grippers 1 and 2

Type Tool type and cutting edge position Using the "Alternative" key, you can change the tool’s cutting edge position.

Tool name The tool is identified by its name. You can enter the name as text or a number (see Sec. "Setting-up a New Tool").

DP Duplo-number of the sister tool (replacement tool) (DP 1 = original tool, DP 2 = first replacement tool, DP 3 = second replacement tool, etc.)

Tool offset data Cutting edge Tool offset data for a selected cutting edge of a tool (D-No.)

Length X Tool length offset in direction X You can determine this value using the "Measure Tool" function (see Sec. "Measure tool manually" or "Measure tool with the magnifying glass"). If the tool is measured externally, you can enter the value here.

Length Z Tool length offset in direction Z You can determine this value using the "Measure Tool" function (see Sec. "Measure tool manually" or "Measure tool with the magnifying glass"). If the tool is measured externally, you can enter the value here.

Radius or ∅ Radius or diameter of the tool For milling and drilling tools, you can also specify the diameter. For turning tools, you can only specify the cutting edge radius. A machine data code is used to switch from radius to diameter specification.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Reference direction for the holder angle

The holder angle of a cutting tool The holder angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when machining rear cuts.

The plate angle of a cutting tool The plate angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when machining rear cuts.

Page 64: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-64 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Lead Thread pitch of a tap drill in mm/rev or thread intervals/''

Drill ∅ Diameter of the drill hole for a rotary drill

Plat.width Plate width of a pin The plate width needs ShopTurn for calculating the groove cycles.

Plat.length The plate length of a cutting tool or pin The plate length needs ShopTurn for displaying the tools during the program execution simulation.

H The "H" column is displayed only if ISO dialects are set up. The number of the tool offset memory that belongs to the tool is displayed in the H column.

N The number of teeth for a milling machine From this, the controller internally calculates the rotational feedrate if the feedrate is set in mm/tooth in the program.

Angle of the tool tip for a drill When drilling, if you want to plunge as far as the shaft and not only as far as the tool tip, the controller takes the angle of the drill tip into consideration.

Tool-specific functions

Specification of the spindle’s direction of rotation The direction of the spindle’s rotation is relative to the tool spindle for powered tools (drilling and milling machines) and to the main or counter-spindle for turning tools.

If you are using a drilling or milling machine for "axial drilling" or "axial threading", the specified direction of rotation is relative to the cutting direction of the tool. The main spindle then rotates adapting to the tool.

Direction of spindle rotation to the right

Direction of spindle rotation to the left

Spindle not switched on

Page 65: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-65

Coolant supplies 1 and 2 (e.g. internal and external cooling) on/off

Coolant ON Coolant OFF

The coolant supply on the machine does not necessarily have to be set-up.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Enter the desired tool name and the values for the tool offset data

in the tool list.

-or-

Press the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key to carry out the desired settings for the tool-specific functions.

2.5.3 Measuring the tool manually

When measuring manually, manually traverse the tool to a known reference point in order to determine the tool dimensions in the X and Z directions. ShopTurn then calculates the tool offset data from the position of the tool-carrier reference point and the reference point.

You can also use the workpiece edge as a reference point or, when

measuring in the Z direction, you can also use the main spindle or counter-spindle collets.

Specify the position of the workpiece edge during the measurement. However, you must make the position of the collet known before the measurement (see Sec. "Spindles").

Reference Point

Workpiece Edge

Jog

Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Manual >

Press the "Manual” softkey.

X -or-

Z

Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you want to measure.

Tools

Press the "Tools” softkey.

Select the tool to be measured from the tool list. The cutting edge position and the radius or diameter of the tool must be entered in the tool list.

Page 66: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-66 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Back tomanual

Press the "Back to manual" softkey.

The tool is accepted into the Measure Tool screen form.

Select the tool cutting edge D and the duplo number DP for the tool.

Traverse the tool in the direction that is to be measured and scratch it (see Sec. "Traversing the Axes").

Measure length X Measure length Z

Enter the position of the workpiece edge in X0 or Z0. If no value is entered for X0 or Z0, the value is taken from the actual value display.

Setlength

Press the "Set length” softkey.

The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are automatically taken into consideration as well.

Storeposition

If you want to save the position of the tool after scratching the tool, press the "Mark position" softkey. Then, for example, you can traverse the axes in order to manually measure the position of the workpiece edge X0 more easily.

Reference Point Collet

Jog

Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Manual >

Z

Press the "Manual" and "Z" softkeys.

Select the "main spindle collet" or "counter-spindle collet" reference point.

Tools

Press the "Tools” softkey.

Select the tool to be measured from the tool list. The cutting edge position and the radius or diameter of the tool must be entered in the tool list.

Back to manual

Press the "Back to manual" softkey.

Page 67: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-67

The tool is accepted into the Measure Tool screen form.

Select the tool cutting edge D and the duplo number DP for the tool.

Traverse to the collet and scratch it (see Sec. "Traversing the Axes").

Measure length Z

Setlength

Press the "Set length” softkey.

The tool length is calculated automatically and entered in the tool list. During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are automatically taken into consideration as well.

2.5.4 Measuring the tool with the measuring calipers

During automatic measuring, you determine the tool dimensions in the directions X and Z with the aid of calipers. ShopTurn then calculates the tool offset data from the known position of the tool-carrier reference point and the calipers.

If you want to measure your tools with a caliper, a special cycle for

that purpose must be set-up by your machine manufacturer.

If there is a second caliper on the counter-spindle, the machine manufacturer must make this known in machine data.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Before the actual measurement, you must enter the cutting edge position and the radius or diameter of the tool in the tool list. You must also calibrate the calipers beforehand.

Page 68: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-68 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Change-in the tool that you want to measure (see Sec. "Selecting

the Tool and Spindle").

Jog

Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Autom. >

Press the "Autom.” softkey.

X -or-

Z

Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which tool length you want to measure.

Measure length X Measure length Z Select the cutting edge number D of the tool.

Select whether you want to use the caliper on the main or counter-spindle, in case there are two calipers on the machine.

Manually position the tool in the vicinity of the caliper such that the caliper can be traversed in the corresponding direction collision-free.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The automatic measuring process is started, i.e. the tool is traversed at the measurement feedrate to the caliper and back again. The tool length is calculated and entered in the tool list. During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are automatically taken into consideration as well.

Page 69: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-69

2.5.5 Calibrating the caliper

If you want to automatically measure your tools, you must first determine the position of the caliper in the machine space in reference to the machine zero-point.

The "Calibrate caliper" function is only available if an adequate

protective level is set.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

For balancing, you must approach the caliper from 4 directions (+X, -X, +Z, -Z). When doing this, use a calibrating tool with which you can touch the caliper in all required directions.

Z

X

Calibrating the tool probe with a calibration tool

The type (rougher or finisher) must be set for the caliper. During this, the cutting edge must always point in the X and Z direction (cutting edge position 3). You must enter the length and the radius or diameter of the calibrating tool in the tool list.

If there is a second caliper on the counter-spindle, the machine manufacturer must make this known in machine data.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Page 70: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-70 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Change the calibrating tool.

Jog

Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Calibrate meas. cal.

Press the "Calibrate meas. cal.” softkey.

X -or-

Z

Press the "X" or "Z" softkey, depending on which point of the caliper you want to determine first

Balance caliper in X Balance caliper in Z

Select whether you want to use the caliper on the main or counter-spindle, in case there are two calipers on the machine.

Select the direction (+ or -), in which you would like to approach the caliper.

Position the calibrating tool in the vicinity of the caliper such that the first point of the caliper can be approached collision-free.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The calibration process is started, i.e. the calibrating tool is automatically traversed at the measurement feedrate to the caliper and back again. The position of the caliper is determined and saved in an internal data area.

Repeat the process for the other 3 points of the caliper.

Page 71: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.5 Tools

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-71

2.5.6 Measuring the tool with a magnifying glass

For determining the tool dimensions, you can also use a magnifying glass if it is available on the machine. During this, ShopTurn calculates the tool offset data from the known positions of the tool-carrier reference point and the cross-hairs of the magnifying glass.

Jog

Select the "Meas. tool" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Zoom >

Press the "Magnifying glass” softkey.

Tools

Back to manual

Press the "Tools” softkey.

Select the tool to be measured from the tool list. The cutting edge position and the radius or diameter of the tool must be entered in the tool list.

Press the "Back to manual" softkey.

Traverse the tool to the magnifying glass (see Sec. "Traversing the Axes").

Bring the tool tip P into alignment with the cross-hairs of the magnifying glass.

Setlength

Press the "Set length” softkey.

The tool lengths are calculated and entered in the tool list. During this, the cutting edge position and tool radius or diameter are automatically taken into consideration as well.

Page 72: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.6 Measuring workpiece zero

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-72 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

2.6 Measuring workpiece zero The reference point for programming a workpiece is always the

workpiece zero. To determine this zero-point, measure the length of the workpiece and save the position of the cylinder in the direction Z in a zero-point offset. This means that the position is stored in the coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset are deleted.

The prerequisite for measuring the workpiece is that a tool with known

lengths is in the machining position (see Sec. "Select Tool and Spindle").

Jog

Select the "Meas. workp." softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Select the desired offset in which the position of the cylinder front surface is to be saved.

-or- Work

offset Press the "Work offset” softkey.

-and- Position the cursor on the desired zero-point offset.

-and- Back to

manual Press the "Back to manual" softkey.

Traverse the tool in the direction Z and scratch it (see Sec. "Traversing the Axes").

Enter the desired position of the workpiece edge Z0.

Set workoffset

Press the "Set work offset” softkey.

The workpiece zero-point and the accompanying zero-point offset are calculated. The tool length is automatically included in the calculation.

Example: Workpiece edge desired position Z0 = 0 Tool length offset Z = 37.6 mm ⇒ Z = -37.6

Page 73: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.7 Work offsets

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-73

2.7 Work offsets Following reference point approach, the actual value display for the

axis coordinates is based on the machine zero (M) of the machine coordinate system (MCS = machine). The program for machining the workpiece, however, is based on the workpiece zero (W) of the workpiece coordinate system (WCS = work). The machine zero and workpiece zero are not necessarily identical. The distance between the machine zero and workpiece vary in accordance with the type of tool and how it is clamped. This zero offset is taken into account during execution of the program and can be a combination of different offsets.

For ShopTurn, the actual value display of the positions is relative to the ENS coordinate system. The position of the active tool relative to the workpiece zero is displayed.

The offsets are summated as follows:

Basic offset MCS

M

WCSW

Totaloffset

Work offset coarse

Coordinate transformation

Work offset fine

Work offsets

When the machine zero is not identical to the workpiece zero, at least one offset (base offset or work offset) exists in which the position of the workpiece zero is saved.

Base offset The base offset is a work offset that is always active. If you have not defined a base offset, its value will be zero. You determine the base offset via "Zero-point workpiece" (see Sec. "Measuring the Workpiece Zero-point") or "Setting the Zero-point Offset" (see Sec. "Setting the Zero-point Offset").

Page 74: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.7 Work offsets

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-74 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Work offsets Every zero offset (G54 to G57, G505 to G599) consists of a coarse offset and a fine offset. You can call the work offsets from any sequence program (coarse and fine offsets are added together). You can save the workpiece zero, for example, in the coarse offset, and then store the offset that occurs when a new workpiece is clamped between the old and the new workpiece zero in the fine offset.

Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

For instructions on specifying and calling work offsets, see Sections "Defining work offsets" and "Calling work offsets".

Coordinate transformations

You always program coordinate transformations for a specific sequence program. They are defined by: • Offset • Rotation • Scaling • Mirroring (See Section "Defining the coordinate transformations")

Total offset The total offset is calculated from the sum of all offsets and coordinate transformations.

2.7.1 Activating the zero-point offset

As an alternative to "Workpiece Zero-point," you can also save the zero-point of the workpiece via "Set ZPO".

The offset (active zero-point offset or base offset) in which the new

zero-point is saved is set in machine data.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

If the values are stored in the active work offset, they are stored in the coarse offset and existing values in the fine offset are deleted.

The currently active work offset is displayed under the position windowfor the axes.

Traverse the machine axes to the desired position, e.g. to the

front surface of the workpiece (see Sec. "Traversing Axes").

Page 75: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.7 Work offsets

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-75

If you do not want to save the zero-point in the currently active zero-point offset or in the base offset, select another zero-point offset (see Sec. "Settings for Manual Mode").

Jog

Select the "Set WO" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Setting the base zero-point offset

Enter the desired new position value for Z or X or Y directly into the actual value display. You can use the cursor keys to switch between axes.

Press the "Input" key.

-or-

Z=0

Press the "Z=0" softkey in case the position value is to be set to zero.

The new zero-point is saved in the currently active zero-point offset or the base offset.

Delete

If you want to delete the saved zero-point, press the "Delete" softkey.

Page 76: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.7 Work offsets

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-76 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

2.7.2 Defining the zero-point offsets

Enter work offsets (coarse and fine) directly in the work offset list.

Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer. The number of possible zero-point offsets is set in machine data.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Select the "Work offset" softkey in the "Tools WO" operating section.

The work offset list appears.

Position the cursor on the coarse or fine offset that you wish to define.

Enter the desired coordinates for the axis in question You can use the cursor keys to switch between axes.

-or-

Set X ...

Set Z

Press the "Set X", "Set Y" or "Set Z" softkey to accept the position value of an axis from the position display for a coarse offset.

-or-

Set all

Press the "Set all" softkey to accept the position values of all axes from the position display for a coarse offset.

The new coarse offset is set. The values from the fine offset are included in the calculation and then deleted.

Delete Wo

Press the "Delete Wo" softkey to delete the coarse and fine offset values at the same time.

Further axes

With the "Further axes" softkey, you can display another three axes (2 round axes, 1 linear axis) and determine their offsets. These additional axes must be activated via machine data.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Page 77: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.7 Work offsets

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-77

2.7.3 Work offset list

The individual work offsets as well as the total offset are all displayed in the work offset list. The currently active work offset is displayed on agray background. The work offset list also includes the current axis positions in the machine and workpiece coordinate systems.

If the turning machine has a counter-spindle, a display in the column

completely to the right also shows which zero-point offset for the machining with a counter-spindle was mirrored. If required, you can also deselect the mirroring of the zero-point offset.

Work offset list

Base offset

Basic reference The coordinates of the base offset appear. You can change these here in the list.

Work offsets

ZPO1 ... ZPO4 The coordinates of the individual zero-point offsets (1st line coarse offset, 2nd line fine offset) are displayed. You can change these at this point in the list (see Sec. "Defining zero-point offsets"). Fine offsets must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

You can display more work offsets with the "Page Down" key.

Page 78: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.7 Work offsets

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-78 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Coordinate transformations

Program The active coordinates of the "Offset" transformation are displayed as well as the angle set in the "Rotation" transformation by which the coordinate system rotates. You cannot edit these values here.

Scale The active scaling factor for the "Scaling" transformation is displayed for the respective axis. You cannot edit these values here.

Mirror The mirror axis that was defined by means of the "Mirroring" transformation is displayed. You cannot edit these values here.

Total offset

Total The total offset resulting from the base offset and all active work offsets and coordinate transformations appears.

Further axes

With the "Further axes" softkey, you can display another three axes (2 round axes, 1 linear axis) and determine their offsets. These additional axes must be activated via machine data.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Select the "Work offset" softkey in the "Tools WO" operating section.

The work offset list appears.

Page 79: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.8 Manual mode

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-79

2.8 Manual mode Always use the "Machine Manual" mode when you want to set up the

machine for the execution of a program or to carry out simple traversing movements on the machine.

2.8.1 Selecting a tool and spindle

For the preparatory actions in manual mode, the tool selection and the spindle control is done centrally in a screen form. In addition to the main spindle (S1), there is another tool spindle (S2) for powered tools. Your lathe can also be equipped with a counter-spindle (S3).

In manual mode, you can select a tool either by its name or its

revolver location number. If you enter a number, ShopTurn first searches for a name and then for a location number. This means that if you enter "5", for example, and no tool with the name "5" exists, the tool is selected from location number "5".

Using the revolver location number, you can thus swing around an empty space into the machining position and then comfortably install a new tool.

Selecting a tool

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Enter the name or the number of the tool T.

-or-

Tools -or-

Call up the tool list by pressing the "Tools" softkey or the "Offset" key.

-and-

Place the cursor on the required tool in the tool list. Only one tool can be selected from the revolver.

-and-

Back to manual

Press the "Back to manual" softkey.

The tool is accepted into the "T, S, M... windows."

Select the tool cutting edge D or enter the number directly in the field.

Page 80: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.8 Manual mode

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-80 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The tool is automatically swung into machining position and the name of the tool is displayed in the tool status list.

Start spindle

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Select the main spindle (S1), the tool spindle (S2), or the counter-spindle (S3) in the left input field of the spindle parameter.

In the right input field, enter the desired spindle speed or cutting speed.

Set the gearing step, in case the machine has a gearbox for the spindle.

In the field below it, select the direction of spindle rotation:

Spindle rotates clockwise Spindle rotates counter-clockwise

The M function is displayed next to the field.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The spindle rotates.

Stopping the spindle

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

In the lower spindle field, select the "Spindle stop" function.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The spindle stops.

Changing the spindle speed

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Specify the desired spindle speed.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The spindle continues rotating at a new speed.

Page 81: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.8 Manual mode

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-81

Position spindle

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Select the main spindle (S1), the tool spindle (S2), or the counter-spindle (S3).

In the lower field, select the "Spindle position" function.

In the "Stop-Pos." parameter field, enter the desired spindle position (in degrees).

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

A stationary spindle is positioned via the shortest possible route. A rotating spindle is positioned as it continues to turn in the same direction.

2.8.2 Traversing the axes

You can traverse the axes in manual mode via the Increment and Axis keys or handwheels. During a traverse initiated from the keyboard, the selected axis moves by a specified increment with the programmed setup feedrate.

Depending on the machine manufacturer’s settings, you can

simultaneously traverse the axes.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect during the traversing.

Traversing the axes using the keyboard

If required, select a tool (see Sec. "Selecting a tool and spindle").

Jog

Open the extended horizontal softkey bar in "Machine Manual" mode.

Press the "ShopT. sett.” softkey.

Enter the desired value for the "Set-up feedrate" parameter in mm/min and mm/rev.

As to which of the two feedrates are used during the traversing of the axes, please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.

As to which of the two feedrates are used during the traversing of the axes, please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.

Page 82: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.8 Manual mode

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-82 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

You can move the axes in fixed or variable increments.

1

... 10000

Press one of the keys [1], [10], ..., [10000], in order to traverse the axis in a fixed increment. The numbers on the keys indicate the traverse path in micrometers or micro-inches. Example: For an increment of 100 µm (= 0.1 mm), press the "100" key.

-or-

Jog

Open the extended horizontal softkey bar in "Machine Manual" mode. -and-

Press the "ShopT. sett.” softkey. -and-

Enter the desired value for the "Variable increment" parameter. Example: For an increment of 500 µm (= 0.5 mm), enter 500. -and-

VAR

Press the "Inc Var" key.

+X

Press an axis key in the corresponding direction.

Each time you press an axis key, the axis will traverse by the selected increment.

If you want to traverse several axes simultaneously, you must press the corresponding axis keys.

Traversing the axes with the handwheel

For information on the selection and function of the handwheels, please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.

Page 83: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.8 Manual mode

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-83

2.8.3 Positioning the axes

In manual mode, you can traverse the axes to certain positions, in order to implement simple machining sequences. The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect during the traversing.

If required, select a tool (see Sec. "Selecting a tool and spindle").

Jog

Select the "Position" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Enter the target position for the axis or axes to be traversed.

Rapid traverse

Specify the desired value for the feedrate F.

-or-

Press the "Rapid traverse" key.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The axis is traversed to the specified target position. If target positions for several axes were specified, the axes are simultaneously traversed.

2.8.4 Simple stock removal from the workpiece

Some blanks have a smooth or even surface. Use the stock removal cycle in order to face the front surface of the workpiece before the actual machining.

The prerequisite for the simple stock removal of a workpiece in

manual mode is that a tool with known measurements is in the machining position (see Sec. "Selecting a Tool and Spindle").

If you want to turn out a collet using the stock removal cycle, you can program an undercut (XF2) in the corner.

Caution

The tool moves along a direct path to the start point of the stock removal. First move the tool to a safe position in order to avoid collisions during the approach.

You cannot use the "Repos" function during simple stock removal.

Page 84: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.8 Manual mode

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-84 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Jog

Select the "Stock removal" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Enter values for the parameters.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The input screen form closes.

Stock removal in manual mode

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The "Stock removal" cycle is started.

You can return to the parameter screen form at any time to check and correct the inputs.

Press the "Cursor right" key to jump back to the input screen form.

Page 85: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.8 Manual mode

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-85

Parameters Description Unit

F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks". In the left input field of the parameter spindle, you can choose between the main spindle (S1) and a counter spindle (S3). In the right input field, enter the spindle speed or the cutting speed.

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing

Position Roughing position:

Direction Roughing direction (flat or lengthwise) in the coordinate system:

Parallel to Z axis (longitudinal)

Outside Inside Outside Inside

Parallel to X axis (plane)

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm

X1 End point ∅ (abs) or end point (inc) mm

Z1 End point (abs or inc) mm

FS Chamfer (n=1...3) alternative to R mm

R Radius (n=1...3) alternative to FS mm

XF2 Undercut (alternative to FS2 or R2) mm

D Infeed depth (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

UX Final machining allowance in X direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

UZ Final machining allowance in Z direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

Page 86: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.8 Manual mode

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-86 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

2.8.5 Settings for manual mode

For manual mode, you can select the central machine functions and work offsets and set the unit of measurement. Machine functions (M functions) are functions such as "Close door" or "Release collet," for example, that were made available as extras by the machine manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

In manual mode, you can display the axis positions and distance-defining parameters either in "mm" or "inches". However, tool offsets and zero-point offsets remain in the original unit of measure, in which the machine was set (see Sec. "Switching the Unit of Measure (Millimeters/Inches)").

Selecting an M function

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Enter the number of the desired M function in the "Misc M fct." parameter field. Refer to the machine manufacturer's table for the correlation between the meaning and number of the function. Example:

M function Description ... ... M88 Close door ... ...

"88" must be entered in the input field, so that the door will be closed.

The M function will be active the next time you press the "Cycle Start" key.

Selecting work offset

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Select the desired zero-point offset.

-or-

Work offset

Press the "Work offset” softkey.

-and-

Position the cursor on the desired zero-point offset.

Page 87: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.9 MDA

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-87

Back tomanual

-and-

Press the "Back to manual" softkey.

The work offset will be active the next time you press the "Cycle Start" key.

Setting the unit of measurement

Jog

Select the "T, S, M" softkey in "Machine Manual" mode.

Select the unit of measure.

The unit of measurement will be active in manual mode the next time you press the "Cycle Start" key.

2.9 MDA In "MDA" mode (Manual Data Automatic mode), you can enter G-code

commands block-by-block and immediately execute them for setting up the machine.

When executing the G-code commands, you can control the sequence

as follows: Executing the program block-by-block Program:Testing Setting the test-run feedrate (see Sec. "Machining the workpiece")

MDA

Press the "MDA" key.

The MDA editor opens.

MDA

Page 88: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.10 Run times

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-88 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Input the desired G-code commands using the operator’s keyboard.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The control executes the input blocks.

Delete MDA Progr.

Depending on the machine manufacturer’s setting, the program created in MDA mode is automatically deleted after the complete execution, or you can delete it using the "Delete MDA Prog." softkey.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

2.10 Run times ShopTurn provides a status window so that you can have an overview

of the most important machine run times at any time. It shows the following operating times.

Program Measurement of the program run time starts as soon as you press the "Cycle Start" key and stops on NC Stop or NC Reset. If you start a new program, timing starts again from the beginning.

Timing continues if dwell time is active, or during program runs with program test or dry run feedrate. Upon NC-Stop or feedrate override = 0, the timing stops.

Loaded By means of a program progress display, you can track what percentage of the called up program has already loaded. The display only appears when a program or subroutine is called up via an EXTCALL command or if a program is executed from the hard-disk.

Workpiece

The current repetition and the programmed number of program repetitions (e.g. Workpiece: 15/100) are displayed in work-step and G-code programs. In work-step programs, the number appears, but only if the number of programmed repetitions N is greater than 1 (see Sec. "Specifying the Quantity"). After a programmed number of repetitions (100,000), only the current program repetition is displayed due to lack of space (e.g. workpiece: 15). If no information is yet available about the current program repetition, only two dashes are displayed (e.g. Workpiece: - -/100). After the start of a program, the counter shows 0 for the current repetition.

For counting workpieces, specify the actual and desired numbers of workpieces as pre-settings (see Sec. "Parameterize workpiece counter").

Page 89: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 11/2006 Setting up the machine2.10 Run times

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2-89

Time-of-day The current time is displayed here.

Date Today's date is displayed.

Machine The machine run time displays how much time has elapsed since the control was last switched on.

Processing The machining time displays the total run time of all programs executed since the control was last switched on.

Utilization The system calculates the actual machine utilization from the timed machining time and the current machine run time. The ratio of machining time to machine run time is displayed as a percentage.

A setting in the machine data determines which run times are displayed.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Jog or Auto

Select "Machine Manual" or "Machine Auto" mode.

Run times

Press the "Run times" softkey.

The T,F,S display window turns into the "Run times" window. Pressing the "Run times" softkey again, takes you back to the T,F,S display window.

Page 90: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

2 Setting up the machine 11/2006 2.10 Run times

2

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 2-90 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Notes

Page 91: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece 3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-91

Machining the workpiece 3.1 Starting/stopping machining...................................................................................... 3-92

3.2 Running-in a program ............................................................................................... 3-94

3.3 Displaying the current program block ....................................................................... 3-96

3.4 Repositioning the axes.............................................................................................. 3-97

3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point.......................................................... 3-98

3.6 Controlling the program run .................................................................................... 3-103

3.7 Overstore ................................................................................................................ 3-105

3.8 Testing the program................................................................................................ 3-106

3.9 Correcting the program........................................................................................... 3-107

3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions....................................................................... 3-108

3.11 Simulating machining.............................................................................................. 3-109 3.11.1 Simulation before the machining of the workpiece ................................................. 3-111 3.11.2 Simultaneous recording before machining a workpiece ......................................... 3-112 3.11.3 Simultaneous recording while a workpiece is being machined .............................. 3-113 3.11.4 Modifying the shape of a blank for a G-code program ........................................... 3-114 3.11.5 Different views of a workpiece ................................................................................ 3-114 3.11.6 Changing the cut-away ........................................................................................... 3-118

3.12 Settings for automatic mode ................................................................................... 3-120 3.12.1 Defining a dry run feedrate ..................................................................................... 3-120 3.12.2 Parameterizing the workpiece counter ................................................................... 3-121

Page 92: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.1 Starting/stopping machining

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-92 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

3.1 Starting/stopping machining During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in

accordance with the programming on the machine. After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece machining is performed automatically.

You must load the program in "Machine Auto" mode. Only then can

you start it. You can, however, stop the program at any time and then resume execution later. Apart from this, you have the option of graphically displaying the execution on the screen.

Once the program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode, and "Automatic" mode is also activated on the machine control panel, you can start the program whatever your current operating area, even if you are not in "Machine Auto" mode. This start option must be enabled in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The following prerequisites must be met before executing a program: • The measuring system of the control is synchronized with the

machine. • A program created in ShopTurn is available. • The necessary tool offsets and zero offsets have been entered. • The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine

manufacturer are activated.

Sequence programs that you created in earlier versions of ShopTurn can also be executed in your current version. Once an older sequence program has been executed in the current version of ShopTurn, it is treated as a current ShopTurn program.

Select program (total)

-or-

Press the softkey or the "Program" key.

The directory overview is displayed.

Place the cursor on the directory containing the program that you want to select.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

The program overview is displayed.

Page 93: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.1 Starting/stopping machining

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-93

Place the cursor on the required program.

Execute

Press the "Execute" softkey.

ShopTurn automatically switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the program.

Select program (by program block)

-or-

Press the softkey or the "Program" key.

The directory overview is displayed.

Place the cursor on the directory containing the program that you want to select.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

The program overview is displayed.

Place the cursor on the required program.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The machining plan of the program is displayed.

Place the cursor on the program block at which the program run must begin.

Press the "Execute" softkey.

ShopTurn automatically switches to "Machine Auto" mode, loads the program, and carries out a block search to the highlighted program block (see Section "Starting at a Specific Point in the Program").

Example for the program view in "Machine Auto" mode

Page 94: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.2 Running-in a program

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-94 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

When you select a program for the first time for execution, that contains the cycles "Stock removal towards contour" or "Contour pocket", the individual stock removal steps or solid machining steps for the contour pocket are calculated automatically. This process may take several seconds depending on the complexity of the contour.

Starting program

execution

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The program is started and executed from the beginning or from the highlighted program block.

Stopping the program

Cycle Stop

Press the "Cycle Stop" key.

Machining stops immediately, individual blocks do not finish execution.When it is started again, the machining will resume at the point where it stopped.

Cancel execution

Reset

Press the "Reset" key.

Execution of the program is interrupted. When it is started again, it will execute from the beginning.

Starting program execution from an operating area

The program is loaded in "Machine Auto" mode and "Automatic" mode is activated on the machine control panel.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The program is started and executed from the beginning. However, the interface of the previously selected operating area remains on the screen.

3.2 Running-in a program When running-in a program, ShopTurn can interrupt the machining of

the workpiece after each program block, which triggers a movement orauxiliary function on the machine. In this way, you can control the machining result block-by-block during the initial run-through of a program on the machine.

For drilling and pocket milling, the entire machining process and a

plane machining process (respectively) are compiled into one block. Drilling and pocket machining processes can be split up into single blocks using the "Single block fine" function. In addition, machining at this setting is stopped after each individual contour element of a contour.

Page 95: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.2 Running-in a program

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-95

Single Block Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section

"Starting/stopping program execution").

Single Block

Press the "Single Block" key.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The first block of the program is executed. Then the machining stops. In the channel status line, the text “Stop: Block in single block ended" appears.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The next block of the program is executed. Then the machining stops again.

Single Block

Press the "Single Block" key again, if the machining is not supposed to run block-by-block. (The key is then deselected again.)

If you now press the "Cycle Start" key again, the program is executed to the end without interruption.

Single block fine Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/stopping program execution").

Single Block Fine

Press the softkeys "Prog. Cntrl.“ and "Single Block Fine", in order to execute each individual drilling position and each individual pocket milling movement as its own block.

Single Block

Press the "Single Block" key.

Continue as described under "Single Block".

Page 96: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.3 Displaying the current program block

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-96 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

3.3 Displaying the current program block If you want precise information about axis positions and key G

functions during a trial run or execution of the program, you can show the basic block display.

You can use the basic block display both in test mode and when

machining the workpiece on the machine. All G code commands that initiate a function on the machine are displayed in the "Basic block" window for the currently active program block: • Absolute axis positions • G functions for the first G group • Other modal G functions • Other programmed addresses • M functions

The basic block display function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/stopping program execution").

Basic Block

Press the "Basic Block" softkey.

Single Block

Press the "Single Block" key if you wish to execute the program block by block.

Cycle Start

Start program execution.

The precise axis positions, modal G functions, etc., are displayed in the "Basic block" window for the currently active program block.

Page 97: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.4 Repositioning the axes

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-97

3.4 Repositioning the axes After a program interruption in automatic mode (e.g. after a tool

breaks) you can move the tool away from the contour in manual mode. ShopTurn saves the coordinates of the position at the time of the interruption and displays the path differences that the axes traversed in manual mode in the actual value window. This path difference is called "Repos-offset".

Using the "Repos" function, you can return the tool to the contour in order to continue executing the program.

You cannot traverse the interrupt position, because it is blocked by the

control system. The feedrate/rapid traverse override is in effect.

Warning

When repositioning, the axes move with the programmed feedrate andlinear interpolation, i.e. in a straight line from the current position to theinterrupt point. Therefore, you must first move the axes to a safe position in order to avoid collisions.

If you do not use the "Repos" function and subsequently move the axes in manual mode after a program interrupt, ShopTurn automatically moves the axes during the switch to automatic mode and the subsequent start of the machining process in a straight line back to the interrupt point.

The following prerequisites must be met when repositioning the axes: • The program execution was interrupted using "Cycle Stop". • The axes were moved from the interrupt point to another position in

manual mode.

Repos

Press the "Repos" key.

+X

Select each axis that is to be moved sequentially in the corresponding direction.

The axes are moved to the interrupt position.

Page 98: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-98 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point If you only want to execute a particular section of a program on the

machine, there is no obligation to start execution of the program from the beginning; you can also start processing from a specific program block or text string.

The point in the program at which you wish to start machining is called

the "target". ShopTurn distinguishes between 3 different types of targets: • ShopTurn cycle • Misc. ShopTurn block or G-code block • Any text

For target type "misc. ShopTurn block or G-code block", you can again specify the target on 3 different paths: • Position cursor on target block

This is ideal for straightforward programs. • Choose point of interruption

Machining resumes at the point at which it was interrupted earlier. This is especially convenient in large programs with multiple program levels.

• Specify target directly This option is only possible if you know the precise data (program level, program name etc.) of the target.

After specifying the target, ShopTurn then calculates the exact start point for the program execution. For the target types "ShopTurn cycle" and "any text" the calculation is always done to the end point of the block. When calculating the start point of all other ShopTurn blocks and G-code blocks, you can choose between four variants.

Calculation variants

1. Calculation to contour: During the block search, ShopTurn performs the same calculations as for the execution of the program. The program is executed from the start of the target block, identically to normal program execution.

2. Calculation to end point: During the block search, ShopTurn performs the same calculations as for the execution of the program. The program is executed from the end of the target block or from the next programmed position of the target block.

Page 99: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-99

3. Without calculation During the block search, ShopTurn does not perform any calculations, i.e. calculation is skipped until the target block. The parameters within the control contain the values valid before the block search. This option is only available for programs that exclusively comprise G code blocks.

4. External - without calculation This method is performed in the same way as calculation to end point, except that subroutines called via EXTCALL are skipped in the calculation. In the same way, with G code programs that are executed entirely by external drives (disk drive/network drive), calculation is skipped until the target block is reached. This helps to speed up the calculation process.

Notice Modal functions included in the part of the program that is not calculated are not taken into account for the part of the program to be executed. In other words, with the "Without calculation" and "External – without calculation" methods, you should choose a target block after which all the information needed for machining is included.

Specifying a target directly

In the "Search pointer" screen form, directly specify the target for the target type "miscellaneous ShopTurn block or G-code block." Each line of the screen form represents one program level. The actual number of levels in the program depends on the nesting depth of the program. Level 1 always corresponds to the main program and all other levels correspond to subroutines. You must enter the target in the line of the screen form corresponding to the program level in which the target is located. For example, if the target is located in the subroutine called directly from the main program, you must enter the target in program level 2. The specified target must always be unambiguous. This means, for example, that if the subroutine is called in the main program in two different places, you must also specify a target in program level 1 (main program).

The parameters in the "Search pointer" screen form have the following meaning: Number of program level Program: Program name (the name of the main program is automatically entered.) Ext: File extension P: Continuous counter (if part of a program is repeated several times, you can specify the repetition number at which you wish machining to be resumed.)

Page 100: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-100 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Line: Parameter is given by ShopTurn Type: " " Search target is ignored on this level N no. Block number Marker Jump marker Text Character string Sub-r. Subroutine call Line Line number Search target: Point in the program at which machining is to start

Selecting the ShopTurn

cycle

Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/stopping program execution").

Position the cursor on the desired target block.

Start Search Run

Press the "Block search" and "Start search run" softkeys.

Where chained program blocks have several technology blocks, select the desired technology block in the "Search run" window. The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

For chained program blocks, enter the number for the desired starting position. The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.

During the block search run on the position pattern, the skipped positions are not counted.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

The new starting position is approached. The workpiece is then machined from the beginning of the target block.

Reset

You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

Selecting the misc.

ShopTurn block or G-code block

Position cursor on target block

Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/stopping program execution").

Position the cursor on the desired target block.

Page 101: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-101

Press the "Block search" softkey.

To contour ...

External - without cal.

Select a calculation technique.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

The new starting position is approached. The program executes from the beginning or end of the target block, depending on the calculation technique.

Reset

You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

Select point of interruption Program execution must have been interrupted by pressing the

"Reset" key. (ShopTurn automatically remembers this point of interruption)

Switch back to "Machine Auto" mode.

Search pointer

Press the "Block search" and "Search pointer" softkeys.

Interrupt point

Press the "Interrupt point" softkey.

ShopTurn inserts the saved interrupt point as a target.

To contour ...

External - without cal.

Select a calculation technique.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

The new starting position is approached. The program executes from the beginning or end of the target block, depending on the calculation technique.

Reset

You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

Page 102: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.5 Starting execution at a specific program point

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-102 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Specify target directly Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section

"Starting/stopping program execution").

Search pointer

Press the "Block search" and "Search pointer" softkeys.

Specify the desired target.

To contour ...

External -without cal.

Select a calculation technique.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

The new starting position is approached. The program executes from the beginning or end of the target block, depending on the calculation technique.

Reset

You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

Searching for any text Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section

"Starting/stopping program execution").

Search

Press the "Block search" and "Search" softkeys.

Enter the text string that you want to locate.

Select whether the search is to commence at the start of the program or the current cursor position.

Search

Press the "Search" softkey.

The program block that contains the text string is marked.

Continue search

Press the "Continue search" softkey, if you want to continue the search.

Start search run

Press the "Abort" and "Start search run" softkeys.

Where chained program blocks have several technology blocks, select the desired technology block in the "Search run" window and press the "Accept" softkey. The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.

For chained program blocks, enter the number for the desired starting position and press the "Accept" softkey. The prompt does not appear in the case of single program blocks.

Page 103: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.6 Controlling the program run

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-103

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

The new starting position is approached. The workpiece is then machined from the beginning of the target block.

Reset

You can abort the search by pressing the "Reset" key.

3.6 Controlling the program run If you want to check previously obtained results while machining a

workpiece, you can have the machining stop at specially marked points (programmed stop). Within the sequence program, the stop occurs at the “safety distance” position.

Conversely, if you do not want to execute certain machining steps programmed in G codes on every program run, you can mark these blocks accordingly (skip G code blocks). This is not possible with sequence blocks.

You can also choose to allow DRF offsets, i.e. offsets with the handwheel, during machining. This function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Programmed stop Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/stopping program execution").

Press the "Prog. Cntrl." softkey.

Program. stop

Press the "Program. stop" softkey.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

Execution of the program starts. The program stops at each block for which the G-code command "M01" was programmed (see Sec. "G-code in the sequence program").

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again each time.

Execution of the program is continued.

Program. stop

Press the "Program. stop" softkey again if you want the program to be executed without a programmed stop. (The softkey is deactivated again.)

Page 104: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.6 Controlling the program run

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-104 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Skipping G code blocks Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/stopping program execution").

Press the "Prog. Cntrl." softkey.

Skip

Press the "Skip" softkey.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

Execution of the program starts. G code blocks with the "/" character (slash) in front of the block number are not executed.

Skip

Press the "Skip" softkey again if you want the marked G code blocks to be executed again during the next run. (The softkey is deactivated again.)

Allowing DRF offset Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section

"Starting/stopping program execution").

Press the "Prog. Cntrl." softkey.

DRF offset

Press the "DRF offset" softkey.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

Execution of the program starts. Offsets with the handwheel affect the machining process directly.

DRF offset

Press the "DRF offset" softkey again if you no longer want to allow handwheel offsets during machining. (The softkey is deactivated again.)

Page 105: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.7 Overstore

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-105

3.7 Overstore In "Machine Auto" mode, you can overstore technological parameters

(auxiliary functions, programmable instructions, etc.) in the work storage unit of the NCK. You can also enter and execute any NC block.

Overstore does not alter the programs stored in the part program memory.

Overstore with single

block

Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section "Selecting a program for execution").

Single Block

Press the "Single Block" key to execute the program block by block.

The program automatically stops at the next block boundary.

Press the "Overstore" softkey.

The "Overstore" window is opened. Enter the NC blocks to be processed.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The blocks you have entered are stored. You can observe execution in the "Overstore" window.

After "Overstore", a subroutine with the content REPOSA, which you can observe, is executed.

Overstore without single

block

Load a program in "Machine Auto" operating mode (see Section "Selecting a program for execution").

Cycle Stop

Press the "Cycle Stop" key.

Press the "Overstore" softkey.

The "Overstore" window is opened. Enter the NC blocks to be processed.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The blocks you have entered are stored. You can observe execution of the blocks in the "Overstore" window.

After the entered blocks have been executed, you can append blocks again.

Page 106: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.8 Testing the program

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-106 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Stopping overstore

Press the "Back" key to exit "Overstore".

The window is closed. You can switch modes now.

Cycle Start

After you have pressed "Cycle Start" again, the selected program continues before overstore.

3.8 Testing the program To prevent incorrect machining of the workpiece during the first pass

of the program on the machine, first test the program without moving the machine axes.

During testing, ShopTurn checks the program for the following

inadmissible conditions:

• Geometric incompatibility • Missing data • Non-executable instruction sequences and jumps • Violation of working area

ShopTurn automatically detects syntax errors when it is loading a program in "Machine Auto" mode.

Whether ShopTurn executes auxiliary functions (M and H functions) during the program test is dependent upon the machine manufacturer’s settings.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. The following functions can be used during the program test: • Stop execution with "Programmed Stop" (see Section "Controlling

the program run") • Graphical display on the screen (see Sec. "Co-illustrating before

machining the workpiece")

Page 107: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.9 Correcting the program

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-107

Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section

"Starting/stopping program execution").

Press the "Prog. Cntrl." softkey.

Program test

Press the "Program test" softkey.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The program is tested without traversing of the machine axes.

Program test

Press the "Program test" softkey again to deactivate test mode on completion of the program. (The softkey is deactivated again.)

3.9 Correcting the program As soon as ShopTurn detects a syntax error while loading a program

in "Machine Auto" mode, the error is displayed in the alarm line. You can then correct the program in the program editor.

Depending on whether the program is in the NC stop or reset state

after being interrupted by ShopTurn, you can make various corrections.

• NC Stop status: You can only modify blocks that have not yet been executed on the

machine or read by the NCK. • Reset status:

You can modify all blocks.

Press the "Prog. corr.” softkey

The program appears in the "Program" operating area and the erroneous block is highlighted.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The parameter screen form is displayed.

Input the corrections.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The correction is applied to the current program.

Press the "Execute" softkey.

The program is reloaded in "Machine Auto" mode and you can start the machining of the workpiece.

Page 108: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-108 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

3.10 Displaying G and auxiliary functions While the workpiece is being machined, if you want to know, for

example, whether the tool tip radius compensation is currently active or which unit of measurement is being used, you can activate display of the G functions or auxiliary functions.

16 different G groups are displayed under "G function". Within a

G-group, only the G functions that are currently active in the NCK appear. In addition, you can see the currently active transformation in the top line of the window.

As an alternative, all G groups with all associated G functions are listed in "All G Func.".

Auxiliary functions include M and H functions preprogrammed by the machine manufacturer, which pass parameters to the PLC to trigger reactions defined by the manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

A maximum of five M functions and three H functions are displayed.

You can have the G functions that are currently active in the NCK displayed during execution of a sequence program too, since the ShopTurn functions are internally translated into G-code.

G function

Press the "G function" softkey in "Machine Manual" or "Machine

Auto" mode.

Instead of parameters T, F and S, the currently active G functions within a G group will be displayed. If you press the "G function" softkey again, the "T, F, S" status display reappears.

-or-

All G func.

Press the "All G func." softkey.

Instead of parameters T, F and S, all G groups with G functions are now listed. If you select the "All G func." softkey again, the "T, F, S" status display reappears.

-or-

Auxiliary function

Press the "Auxiliary function" softkey.

Instead of parameters T, F and S, the currently active auxiliary functions will be displayed. If you press the "Auxiliary function" softkey again, the "T, F, S" status display reappears.

Page 109: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.11 Simulating machining

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-109

3.11 Simulating machining You can graphically display the execution of the program on the

screen, in order to easily control the programming result without moving the machine axes. In this way, you can detect incorrectly programmed machining steps early on and prevent erroneous machining of the workpiece. In addition, you can conveniently track the machining of the workpiece on the machine via the graphical display, if the view of the working area is blocked by coolant, for example.

In this graphical display, ShopTurn shows the workpiece, the tools, the

counter spindle and the headstock on the screen in the correct proportions, i.e. the programmed blank dimensions from the program head are used for the workpiece and the tools are variously symbolized according to the tool type and size. For displaying the counter spindle and headstock, the dimensions are taken from the “spindle” input screen form (see Sec. "Spindles").

For the graphical display of G-code programs, ShopTurn displays a pre-defined blank shape, which you can modify as you wish.

Finished-part contour If you have programmed turning machining processes in the main program, ShopTurn displays the corresponding finished-part contour for them at the start of the graphical display. Thus, you can easily compare the current contour with the finished-part contour, and also detect where possible residual material might remain when machining.

Display variants You can choose between three variants of graphical display: • Simulation before machining the workpiece

Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically display the execution of the program in a quick run-through. The machine axes do not move.

• Parallel drawing before machining the workpiece Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically display the execution of the program with a test run feedrate. The machine axes do not move. In contrast to the simulation, you can use the functions for program control, i.e. you can stop the graphical execution or have it run block-by-block.

• Parallel drawing during machining of the workpiece While the program is being executed on the machine, you can track the machining of the workpiece on the screen as well.

Page 110: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.11 Simulating machining

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-110 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Views For all three variants, the following views are available to you:

• 3-window view

• Side view

• Face view

• Volume model

The traverse paths for the tools are shown in color: Red line = tool is moving at rapid traverse Green line = tool is moving at machining feedrate

In all views, a clock is displayed during graphical processing. The displayed machining time (in hours/minutes/seconds) indicates the approximate time that would actually be required to execute the machining program on the machine (incl. tool change). If a program is interrupted during simultaneous recording, the clock stops.

In addition, the current axis coordinates, the override, and the programblock currently being executed are also displayed. The active tool with the cutting edge number and feedrate are also displayed in the simulation.

Transformations Transformations are displayed differently during simulation and simultaneous recording: • Coordinate transformations (translation, scaling, …) are displayed

as programmed. • In the graphical display, zero-point offsets (G54, ...) only lead to

the offsetting of the zero-point in the Z direction.

Counterspindle If you open or close the collet of the main spindle or counter-spindle during programming via M functions, ShopTurn can only display this graphically if the M functions are assigned via machine data cycles.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Page 111: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.11 Simulating machining

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-111

3.11.1 Simulation before the machining of the workpiece

Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically display the execution of the program in a quick run-through on the screen in order to easily monitor the result of the programming.

Feedrate override is also active during simulation.

0%: The simulation stops. ≥ 100%: The program is executed as fast as possible. Feedrate override for simulation must be activated via a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Start simulation

-or-

Press the softkey or the "Program" key.

The directory overview is displayed.

Place the cursor on the directory in which you would like to simulate a program.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

The program overview is displayed.

Place the cursor on the program that you would like to simulate.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor Right" key.

The selected program is displayed in the "Program" operating area.

Press the "Simulation" softkey.

Execution of the program will be displayed on the screen in graphical form. The machine axes do not move.

Details

Single Block

Press the "Details" and "Single Block" softkeys, if you wish to execute the program block by block.

Page 112: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.11 Simulating machining

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-112 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Stop simulation

Press the "Stop" softkey.

Simulation is stopped.

Aborting simulation

Press the "Reset" softkey.

Simulation is aborted and the unmachined blank shape of the workpiece is displayed again.

Resuming simulation

Press "Start" softkey.

Simulation is resumed.

End simulation End

Press the "End" softkey.

The machining plan or programming graphic for the program is displayed again.

3.11.2 Simultaneous recording before machining a workpiece

Before machining the workpiece on the machine, you can graphically display the execution of the program on the screen in order to easily monitor the result of the programming.

Simultaneous recording is a software option.

You can replace the programmed feedrate with a test-run feedrate in

order to control the execution speed (see Sec. "Establishing the test-run feedrate").

In addition, you can interrupt or control the graphical execution, i.e. the functions for program control such as "NC Stop," "Single Block," "Feedrate override," etc. are in effect.

If you would like to view the current program blocks again instead of the graphical display, you can switch to the program view. This function must be set-up via machine data.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/stopping program execution").

Page 113: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.11 Simulating machining

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-113

Program test

Press the "Prog. Cntrl." and "Program test" softkeys.

Dry run feedrate

Press the "Dry run feedrate" softkey, if the programmed feedrate speed is to be replaced by a test-run speed.

Press the "Real-sim." softkey.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

Execution of the program will be displayed on the screen in graphical form. The machine’s axes do not move.

Dry run feedrate

Press the "Dry run feedrate" softkey again, if the parallel drawing is to run in the programmed feedrate speed. (The softkey is deactivated again.)

Program view

Press the "Program view" softkey if you would like to switch away from the graphical display into the program view of the "Machine Auto" mode. Recording of the graphical data continues in the background.

Press one of the 4 softkeys for the graphical views, if you would like to return to the graphical display.

3.11.3 Simultaneous recording while a workpiece is being machined

If the view of the work space is blocked by coolant, for example, while the workpiece is being machined, you can also track the program execution on the screen.

Simultaneous recording is a software option.

You can switch on the parallel drawing of the machining process even

if the machining of the workpiece is already running on the machine. This function must be set-up via machine data.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Load a program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/stopping program execution").

Press the "Real-sim." softkey.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The machining of the workpiece is started and graphically displayed on the screen.

Page 114: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.11 Simulating machining

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-114 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

3.11.4 Modifying the shape of a blank for a G-code program

G-code programs typically do not contain a description of the shape of the blank. For the graphical display, ShopTurn therefore uses a pre-defined shape for the blank. You can modify it as you wish.

-or-

Select "Simulation" or "Real-sim."

Details >

Press the softkeys "Side View" and "Details".

Setting

Press the "Setting" softkey.

Select the shape of the blank (cylinder, tube, square, or N-angle).

Input the desired dimensions.

Press the "Back" softkey.

During the next graphical display of a G-code program, the input dimensions are taken into consideration.

3.11.5 Different views of a workpiece

In the graphical display, you can choose between different views in order to be able to optimally view the current machining on the workpiece or to display details or the overall view of the finished workpiece.

The following views are available to you:

• Side view The display shows the workpiece, partly in the longitudinal view, and partly the peripheral surface.

• Face view The workpiece is displayed in cross-section. The front of the workpiece is displayed by default. The viewing direction is always from the front to the cutting surface even if machining is to be done from behind or from the back side.

• Volume model The volume model is a 3-D display of the workpiece that does not appear while the simulation is running but only if you stop the simulation.

The volume model is a software option.

Page 115: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.11 Simulating machining

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-115

• 3-window view The 3-window view shows the side and front view and, on the PCU 50.3, a volume model. A cut-away change occurs synchronously for the side and front view. The cut-away of the volume model cannot be changed here. In the volume model, ShopTurn only displays drilling and milling work continuously. The turning work is only updated when you change to drilling or milling work.

You can still pan the displayed cut-away in any view.

If there is no longer sufficient storage space for the graphical display, ShopTurn fades out the blank. You can still see the side and front view as dashed-line graphics.

Side view

Press the "side view” softkey.

Side view

You can find information on changing the cut-away in Sec. "Changing the cut-away".

Page 116: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.11 Simulating machining

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-116 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Face view

Press the "Face view” softkey.

Face view

Details >

Press the "Details" softkey, if you want to pan the cross-section in the Z direction.

-and-

Z Cut + or

Press the "Z Cut +" or "Page Up" key in order to pan the cross-section in a positive Z direction.

-or-

Z Cut - or

Press the "Z Cut -" or "Page Down" key in order to pan the cross-section in a negative Z direction.

You can find further information on changing the cut-away in Sec. "Changing the cut-away".

Page 117: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.11 Simulating machining

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-117

Volume model

Press the "Volume model” softkey.

Volume model

Displaying the volume model

Press the "Stop" softkey if you would like to display the volume model at the current point in the machining.

Press the "Side view" and "Start" softkeys if you would like to continue the simulation.

View: Changing Details

> Press the "Details" softkey if you want to change the view.

-and-

or

Press the "View " or "View " softkey to rotate the workpiece about the X-axis.

-or-

Press the "View " softkey to rotate the workpiece about the Z-axis.

-or-

Cut

Press the "Cut" softkey to cut up the workpiece.

-and-

Cut

Press the "Cut" softkey again if the volume model is to be displayed in full again.

Page 118: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.11 Simulating machining

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-118 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

You can find further information on changing the cut-away in Sec. "Changing the cut-away".

3-window view

Press the "3-window view” softkey.

3-window view

You can find information on changing the cut-away in Sec. "Changing the cut-away".

3.11.6 Changing the cut-away

If you would like to pan, enlarge, or decrease the size of the cut-away on the graphical display, e.g. to view details or display the complete workpiece, use the Zoom or magnifying glass.

Increase or decrease the size of the existing cut-away from the center

using the zoom function. Then you can pan the new cut-away. Using the magnifying glass, you can first define the cut-away and then increase or decrease its size.

The zoom/magnifying settings are program-specific, i.e. the settings are retained if you change the cut-away and switch to the work plan and then back to the graphics, for example. If you then simulate the new program, ShopTurn will use the default settings of zoom and the magnifying glass. But you can also return to the default display of the workpiece from a changed cut-away.

Page 119: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.11 Simulating machining

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-119

In addition, you can delete the previously drawn machining lines in the graphics in order to get a clear display.

Details

> Press the "Details" softkey.

Original cut-away Back to

original

Press the "Back to original" softkey to restore the original size of the viewport.

The workpiece on the main spindle or counter-spindle appears.

Zoom Zoom

+ or +

Press the "Zoom +" or "+" softkey if you would like to enlarge the

cut-away.

-or-

Zoom- or

Press the "Zoom -" or "-" softkey if you would like to decrease the size of the cut-away.

-or-

Press a cursor key if you want to pan the cut-away up, down, left, or right.

The new cut-away appears.

Magnifying glass Zoom

Press the "Magnifying glass” softkey.

A magnifying glass in the shape of a rectangular frame appears.

Press a cursor key if you want to move the magnifying glass up, down, left, or right.

Magnifying glass +

Press the "Magnifying glass +" softkey if you want to enlarge the cut-away that you selected with the magnifying glass.

-or-

Magnifying glass -

Press the "Magnifying glass -" softkey if you want to decrease the size of the cut-away that you selected with the magnifying glass.

Magnifying glass zoom

Press the "Magnifying glass zoom” softkey.

The new cut-away appears.

Deleting machining lines

Press the "Del" key.

The previous machining lines are deleted.

Page 120: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.12 Settings for automatic mode

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-120 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

3.12 Settings for automatic mode

For automatic mode, configure the pre-settings for the following functions:

• Program sequence under Automatic For graphical display of a program, the feedrate of the test-run can be specified.

• Workpiece counter For counting workpieces in G-code programs, counters are available, which display the number of needed workpieces as well as the total number of workpieces produced.

3.12.1 Defining a dry run feedrate

Before machining a workpiece, test the program without moving the machine axes. For early detection of programming errors, the parallel drawing function is available to you. For this, you can use your own preset test-run feedrate (see Section "Parallel drawing before machining the workpiece").

The feedrate can be changed while the operation is running.

Auto

Switch to "Machine Auto" mode in the expanded horizontal softkey bar.

Press the "ShopT. sett.” softkey.

In "Test-run feedrate," enter the desired test-run speed.

Page 121: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 11/2006 Machining the workpiece3.12 Settings for automatic mode

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 3-121

3.12.2 Parameterizing the workpiece counter

With the aid of the "ShopTurn Settings," you can control the counter activation and the time of the zeroing. The display of the needed and currently machined workpieces is displayed in the machine run-time window (see Section "Run-times").

Number of workpieces

Auto

Switch to "Machine Auto" mode in the expanded horizontal softkey bar.

Press the "ShopT. sett.” softkey.

Enter the number of workpieces needed in the "Desired workpieces" field.

The number of workpieces finished since the program started is displayed in the "Actual workpieces" field. After the defined number of workpieces is reached, the current workpieces display is automatically reset to zero.

The choice of counter depends on the machine data setting. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The desired and actual numbers for the workpiece counter can also be changed during program execution.

Page 122: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

3 Machining the workpiece 11/2006 3.12 Settings for automatic mode

3

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 3-122 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Notes

Page 123: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program 4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-123

Creating a ShopTurn program 4.1 Program structure ................................................................................................... 4-124

4.2 Fundamentals ......................................................................................................... 4-126 4.2.1 Operating planes..................................................................................................... 4-126 4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and retract .................................................................... 4-128 4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions .................................................................... 4-130 4.2.4 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 4-132 4.2.5 Pocket calculator..................................................................................................... 4-133 4.2.6 Fit ............................................................................................................................ 4-135

4.3 Sequence program ................................................................................................. 4-136 4.3.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 4-136 4.3.2 Creating a new program ......................................................................................... 4-137 4.3.3 Creating program blocks......................................................................................... 4-142 4.3.4 Changing program blocks ....................................................................................... 4-146 4.3.5 Program editor ........................................................................................................ 4-147 4.3.6 Defining a quantity .................................................................................................. 4-150

Page 124: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006 4.1 Program structure

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-124 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

4.1 Program structure A sequence program is divided into three sub-areas:

• Program header • Program blocks • End of program These sub-areas form a machining plan.

Programheader

Programend

Programblocks

Program structure

Program header

The program header contains parameters that affect the entire program, such as blank dimensions or retraction planes.

Program blocks

You determine the individual machining steps in the program blocks. In doing this, you specify the technology data and positions, among other things.

Technology data andpositions

Plain text, e.g. type of machining

Block number allocatedby control

Symbol of machining cycle Program block

Linked program blocks

For the "Contour turning", "Contour milling", "Milling", and "Drilling" functions, program the technology blocks and contours or positioning blocks separately. These program blocks are automatically linked by the controller and connected by brackets in the work plan. In the technology blocks, specify how and in what form the machining should take place, e.g. centering first, and then drilling. In the positioning blocks, determine the positions for the drilling or milling machining, e.g. position the drill-holes in a full circle on the front surface.

Page 125: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program4.1 Program structure

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-125

Technology blocks

Positioning blocks Technology block and positioning block

Technology blocks

Contours

Contour and technology block

End of program

End of program signals to the machine that the machining of the workpiece has ended. In addition, you can specify the number of workpieces that you would like to machine.

Page 126: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006 4.2 Fundamentals

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-126 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

4.2 Fundamentals

4.2.1 Operating planes

Machining of a workpiece can be done on different planes. Two coordinate axes define a machining plane. On turning machines with X, Z, and C axes, three planes are available: • Turning • Face • Overall

The front and peripheral machining planes require that the CNC-ISO functions "front surface machining" (Transmit) and "cylindrical peripheral transformation" (Tracyl) be set up.

These functions are a software option.

For turning machines with an additional Y-axis, the machining planes are

expanded by two more planes: • Front Y • Peripheral Y The front and peripheral planes are thus called Front C and Peripheral C.

If the Y-axis is an oblique axis (i.e. the axis is not perpendicular to the others), you can also select the "Front Y" and "Peripheral Y" machining planes and program the traversing movements in Cartesian coordinates. The controller then automatically transforms the programmed traversing movements of the Cartesian coordinate system into the traversing movements of the oblique axis. For the transformation of the programmed traversing movements, ShopTurn needs the CNC-ISO function "Oblique Axis" (Traang).

This function is a software option.

The machining plane selection is integrated into the parameter screen

forms of the individual drilling and milling cycles. For turning cycles and for "axial drilling" and "axial threads", ShopTurn automatically selects the Turning plane. For the "straight" and "circle" functions, you must specify the machining plane separately.

The settings for the machining plane always act modally, i.e. until you select another plane.

The machining planes are defined as follows:

Page 127: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program4.2 Fundamentals

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-127

Z

XY

Face

Turning

Peripheral suerface

Machining planes

Turning

The Turning machining plane corresponds to the Z/X-plane (G18).

Front/Front C

The machining plane Front/Front C corresponds to the X/Y plane (G17). For machines without a Y-axis, the tools can only move in the Z/X plane. ShopTurn therefore automatically transforms the X/Y coordinates you entered into a movement in the X and C axis. When drilling and milling, you can use the front surface machining witha C-axis when you want to mill a pocket on the front surface, for example. In doing this, you can choose between the forward or rear front surface.

Peripheral/Peripheral C

The machining plane Peripheral/Peripheral C corresponds to the Y/Z plane (G19). For machines without a Y-axis, the tools can only move in the Z/X plane. ShopTurn therefore automatically transforms the Y/Z coordinates you entered into a movement in the C and Z axis. When drilling and milling, you can use the peripheral surface machining with a C-axis when you want to mill a groove with constant depth on the peripheral surface, for example. In doing this, you can choose between the inner or outer surface.

Front Y

The machining plane Front Y corresponds to the X/Y plane (G17). When drilling and milling, you can use the front surface machining witha Y-axis when you want to mill a pocket on the front surface, for example. In doing this, you can choose between the forward or rear front surface.

Peripheral Y

The machining plane Peripheral Y corresponds to the Y/Z plane (G19). When drilling and milling, you can use the peripheral surface machining with a Y-axis when you want to mill a pocket with a level bottom on the peripheral or to create drill-holes that do not point to the center. In doing this, you can choose between the inner or outer surface.

Page 128: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006 4.2 Fundamentals

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-128 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

4.2.2 Machining cycle approach and retract

Approaching and retracting during the machining cycle always follows the same pattern if you have not defined a special approach/retraction cycle (see Sec. "Programming the approach/eetraction cycle"). If the machine has a tailstock, you can also take it into consideration when traversing.

The retraction for a cycle ends at the safety distance. Only the subsequent cycle moves to the retraction plane. This allows the use of the special approach/retraction cycle (see Sec. "Programming the approach/retraction cycle").

During the choosing of the traversing path, ShopTurn always considers the tool tip, i.e. the elongation of the tool is not taken into consideration. Be careful therefore that the retraction planes are correspondingly far away from the workpiece.

Safety distance

Retract plane

Tool change point

Rapid traverseMachining feedrate

Machining cycle approach/return

• The tool travels in rapid traverse along the shortest path from the tool change point to the retraction plane which runs parallel to the machining plane.

• After this, the tool travels in rapid traverse to the safety distance. • Then the machining of the workpiece takes place with the

programmed machining feedrate. • After the machining, the tool retracts vertically in rapid traverse to

the safety distance. • Then the tool continues to travel vertically in rapid traverse to the

retraction plane. • From there, the tool travels in rapid traverse along the shortest

path to the tool change point. If the tool does not need to be changed between two machining processes, the tool travels from the retraction plane to the next machining cycle.

The spindle (main, tool, or counter-spindle) begins to rotate immediately after the tool change.

Page 129: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program4.2 Fundamentals

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-129

You define the tool change point, the retraction plane, and the safety distance in the program header (see Sec. "Creating a new program").

Taking the tailstock into consideration

Safety distance

Retract plane

Tool change point

Rapid traverseMachining feedrate

XR

Approach/return allowing for a tailstock

• The tool travels in rapid traverse from the tool change point along the shortest path to the protective plane XR from the tailstock.

• After this, the tool moves in rapid traverse on the retraction plane in the X direction.

• After this, the tool travels in rapid traverse to the safety distance. • Then the machining of the workpiece takes place with the

programmed machining feedrate. • After the machining, the tool retracts vertically in rapid traverse to

the safety distance. • Then the tool continues to travel vertically in rapid traverse to the

retraction plane. • After this, the tool travels in the direction X to the protective plane

XR from the tailstock. • From there, the tool travels in rapid traverse along the shortest

path to the tool change point. If the tool does not need to be changed between two machining processes, the tool travels from the retraction plane to the next machining cycle.

You define the tool change point, the retraction plane, the safety distance, and the protective area for the tailstock in the program header (see Sec. "Creating a new program").

Page 130: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006 4.2 Fundamentals

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-130 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

4.2.3 Absolute and incremental dimensions

When creating a sequence program, you can input positions in absolute or incremental dimensions, depending on how the workpiece drawing is scaled.

You can also use a mix of absolute and incremental dimensions, i.e. one coordinate in the absolute dimension and the other in incremental dimension.

For the plan axis (the X-axis, in this case), it is established in machine

data whether the diameter or radius is programmed in absolute or incremental dimensions.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Absolute dimensions (ABS)

With absolute dimensions, all position specifications refer to the zero-point of the active coordinate system.

Z

X

7.515

2535

P4

P3 P2

P1

Ø 2

5 Ø 4

0 Ø 6

0

Absolute dimension

The position specifications for the points P1 to P4 in absolute dimensions refer to the zero-point: P1: X25 Z-7.5 P2: X40 Z-15 P3: X40 Z-25 P4: X60 Z-35

Page 131: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program4.2 Fundamentals

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-131

Incremental dimension (INC)

With incremental dimensions, also called sequential dimensions, a position specification refers to the previously programmed point, i.e. the input value corresponds to the traversed path. As a rule, the preceding symbol plays no role during the inputting of the incremental value. ShopTurn only evaluates the amount of the increment. For some parameters, the preceding symbol specifies the traversing direction. These exceptions are identified in the parameter table of the individual functions.

Z

X

7.510

P4

P3 P2

P1

7.510

107.

5

Incremental dimensions

The positions for points P1 to P4 in incremental dimensions are as follows: P1: X25 Z-7.5 (relative to the zero-point) P2: X15 Z-7.5 (relative to P1) P3: Z-10 (relative to P2) P4: X20 Z-10 (relative to P3)

Page 132: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006 4.2 Fundamentals

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-132 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

4.2.4 Polar coordinates

You can specify positions using right-angled coordinates or polar coordinates. If a point in a workpiece drawing is defined by a value for each coordinate axis, you can easily input the position into the parameter screen form using right-angled coordinates. For workpieces that are dimensioned with arcs or angular data, it is often easier if you input the positions using polar coordinates.

You can only program polar coordinates for the functions "Straight

circle" and "Contour milling."

The point from which the dimensioning starts in polar coordinates is called the "pole".

Pole

X

Z

P1P2

P3

30

3030

30°30°

30°

Polar coordinates

The position specifications for the pole and points P1 to P3 in polar coordinates are: Pole: X30 Z30 (relative to the zero-point) P1: L30 α30° (relative to the pole) P2: L30 α60° (relative to the pole) P3: L30 α90° (relative to the pole)

Page 133: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program4.2 Fundamentals

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-133

4.2.5 Pocket calculator

You can use the pocket calculator to quickly calculate parameter values during programming. If, for example, the diameter of a workpiece is only dimensioned indirectly in the workpiece drawing, i.e., the diameter must be derived from the sum of several other dimension specifications, you can calculate the diameter directly in the input field of this parameter.

The calculation of a parameter value is always done in the input field

of the parameter. In doing this, you can perform as many calculations as you wish using the following kinds of calculations.

• Operators + Addition - Subtraction * Multiplication / Division () Parentheses MOD Modulo Operation AND AND operator OR OR operator NOT NOT operator

• Constants PI 3.14159265358979323846 TRUE 1 FALSE 0

• Functions SIN(x) Sine of x, (x in degrees) COS(x) Cosine of x, (x in degrees) TAN(x) Tangent of x, (x in degrees) ATAN2(x,y) Inverse tangent of x/y, (x and y in degrees) SQRT(x) Square root of x ABS(x) Absolute value of x

You can input a maximum of 256 characters in a field.

Page 134: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006 4.2 Fundamentals

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-134 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Position the cursor on the input field of a parameter screen form.

or

=

Press the "Insert" or “=” key.

The calculator is active.

Input the arithmetic statement. You can use arithmetic symbols, numbers, and commas.

or

=

Press the "Input" or “=” key.

The new value is calculated and displayed in the input field. The calculator is switched off.

If you would first like to delete an old value in an input field, press the "Backspace" key.

Example: Tool wear +0.1 Position the cursor on the input field "∆LengthX" in the tool wear

list.

Press the "Insert" key.

Input the calculating instructions: + 0.1

Press the "Input" key.

Example: Calculating the diameter

40

160

30

∅50

∅A∅12

0

Workpiece drawing

Page 135: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program4.2 Fundamentals

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-135

Position the cursor on the input field “X” in a parameter screen form.

Press the "Insert" key.

Input the calculating instructions: 30 * 2 + 50

Press the "Input" key.

4.2.6 Fit

If you would like to finish your workpiece to an exact fit, you can input the master dimension directly into the parameter screen form during programming.

Specify the master dimension in the following way:

F<Diameter/Length> <Tolerance class> <Tolerance quality>

For this, "F" identifies that a master dimension follows.

Example: F20h7

Possible tolerance classes: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, J, JS, T, U, V, X, Y, Z, ZA, ZB, ZC Uppercase letter: Drill-holes Lowercase letters: Shafts

Possible tolerance qualities: 1 to 18, if they are not restricted by DIN standard 7150.

Position the cursor on the input field of a parameter screen form.

Input the fit.

Press the "Input" key.

The controller automatically calculates the mean value from the upper and lower limit value.

If you would like to input a lowercase letter, highlight the input uppercase letter with the cursor and press the "Select" key. If you press the key again, the uppercase letter reappears.

Page 136: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006 4.3 Sequence program

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-136 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

4.3 Sequence program For sequence programs that you create directly at the machine, you

require a software option.

4.3.1 Overview

When creating a sequence program, always proceed according to the following diagram:

• Create a new program • Assign a program name • Fill out the program head • Program individual machining steps

The following listed machining steps can be selected.

Tool >

Straight >

Circle center >

Circle radius >

Polar >

Approach/Retract >

Drilling centric >

Thread centric >

Drilling Reaming >

Deep holedrill >

Thread >

Tapping

Thread drilling

Positions >

Repeat Position >

Solid machin. >

Recess >

Page 137: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program 4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-137

Undercut >

Thread >

Cutoff >

New contour >

Solid machin. >

St. remov.Rest >

Grooving >

Grooving Rest >

Plunge turning >

Plunge tur.Rest >

Pocket >

Spigot >

Groove >

Multi-edge >

Engraving

Contour milling >

New contour >

Path milling >

Predrilling >

Pocket milling

Pocket resid. mat.

Spigot milling

Spigot resid. mat.

Set mark >

Repeat >

Sub- program >

Counter- spindle >

Page 138: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-138 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Settings >

Transfor- mations >

Work offset >

Offset >

Rotation >

Scaling >

Mirroring >

Rotation C axis

4.3.2 Creating a new program

For each new workpiece that you would like to finish, create an individual program. The program contains the individual machining steps that must be performed for finishing the workpiece.

If you create a new program, a program header and program end are

automatically defined. In the program header, you must set the following parameters, which are active during the entire program.

WO The zero-point offset in which the zero-point of the workpiece is saved. You can also delete the pre-setting of the parameter if you do not want to specify a zero-point offset.

Unit of measurement

The setting of the unit of measure (millimeters or inches) in the program header is relative to the position specifications in the current program. You enter all other specification such as feedrate or tool offsets in the unit of measure that you have set for the entire machine.

Blank

For the blank of the workpiece, you must define the shape (cylinder, tube, rectangle, or N-angle) and the dimensions. W: Blank width – only for rectangle L: Blank length – only for rectangle N: Number of edges – only for N-angle L: Edge length (alternative to SW) – only for N-angle SW: Key width (alternative to L) – only for N-angle XA: Outside diameter (abs) – only for cylinder and tube XI: Inside diameter (abs or inc) – only for tube ZA: Initial dimension (abs) ZI: End dimension (abs or inc) ZB: Machining dimension (abs or inc)

Page 139: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program 4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-139

Cylinder blank

Tube blank

Retraction

The retraction area marks the area outside of which collision-free traversing of the axes must be possible. For each direction of movement, you define a retraction plane that is only traversed in that direction of movement during positioning. The retraction planes depend on the shape of the blank and the type of retraction (simple, expanded, or all). XRA: outer retraction plane in the direction X (abs) XRI: inner retraction plane in direction X (abs. or inc.) ZRA: outer retraction plane in the direction Z (abs) ZRI: inner retraction plane in direction Z (abs. or inc.)

The retraction planes XRA and XRI are always placed in a circle around the blank, even for rectangular and N-angle blanks.

Retraction tube: simple

Retraction tube: all

The retraction for a cycle ends at the safety distance. Only the subsequent cycle moves to the retraction plane. This allows the use of the special approach/retraction cycle (see Sec. "Programming the approach/retraction cycle").

A change to the retraction plane is already in effect during retraction from the previous machining (see Sec. "Changing program settings").

Page 140: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-140 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

During the choosing of the traversing path, ShopTurn always considers the tool tip, i.e. the elongation of the tool is not taken into consideration. Be careful therefore that the retraction planes are correspondingly far away from the workpiece.

Tailstock

If your machine has a tailstock, you can expand the retraction area again, so that a collision with the tailstock will be avoided when traversing the axes. Enter the retraction plane XRR of the tailstock in absolute dimensions.

Tool change point

The revolver with its zero-point travels to the tool change point and then positions the desired tool in machining position. The tool change point must be so far outside the retraction area that no tool projects into the retraction area when it is moving. Either you establish the current tool position as a tool change point (teaching a tool change point) or you must input the coordinates of the tool change point XT and ZT directly into the parameter screen form. Teaching the tool change point is only possible if you have selected the machine coordinate system (MKS).

Be sure that the tool change point is relative to the zero-point of the revolver and not to the tool tip.

Tool change point

Safety clearance

The safety distance SC defines how close the tool can approach the workpiece in rapid traverse. You must input the safety distance incremental dimensions without a preceding symbol.

Speed limits

If you want to machine the workpiece with a constant cutting speed, ShopTurn must increase the spindle speed once the workpiece diameter becomes smaller. Since the speed cannot be increased at will, you can set a speed limit for the main spindle (S1) and for the counter-spindle (S3), depending on the shape, size, and material of the workpiece or collet.

Page 141: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program 4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-141

The machine manufacturer only sets one speed limit for the machine, i.e. none that are dependent on the workpiece.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Press the "Program" softkey.

Select the directory in which you want to create a new program.

New

ShopTurn program

Press the "New" and "ShopTurn program" softkeys.

Enter a program name. Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length. You can use any letters (except umlauts), digits or the underscore symbol (_). ShopTurn automatically replaces lowercase letters with uppercase letters.

-or-

Press the "OK" softkey or the "Input" key.

The parameter screen form “Program Header” is displayed.

Set program header parameters

Work offset

Select a zero-point offset or input a zero-point offset directly into the input field or call up the zero-point offset list using the "Work offset" softkey if you want to select a zero-point offset there.

Input the other parameters.

Page 142: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-142 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Teach TC position

Press the "TC position" softkey if you want to set the current position of the tool as a tool change point.

The tool’s coordinates are adopted by the parameters XT and ZT.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The work plan is displayed. ShopTurn has automatically defined the end of the program.

4.3.3 Creating program blocks

After a new program is created and the program header is filled out, define the individual machining steps in program blocks that are necessary for finishing the workpiece.

A large amount of memory is available for one program.

However, depending on the storage space required, you can only program a limited number of blocks.

• ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded) You can program a maximum of 1,000 blocks using the "Straight" function or a maximum of 600 blocks using the "Pocket" function.

• PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced) You can program a maximum of 3500 blocks using the "Straight" function or a maximum of 2100 blocks using the "Pocket" function.

You can only create the program blocks between the program header and the program end. The following function groups are available to you for programming:

• Straight/Circle • Bore • Turning • Contour turning • Milling • Contour milling • Transformations

Fill out an individual parameter screen form for each machining step. Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain the parameters. The parameters tool, feedrate, speed, and machining are explained in the following:

Page 143: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program 4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-143

T (Tool)

For each machining of the workpiece, you must program a tool. Tool selection is done by name and is already integrated in all parameter screen forms of the machining cycles with the exception of straight/circle. Once the tool is changed, the tool length offsets become active. Tool selection is modal for straight/circle, i.e. if several machining steps occur in succession using the same tool, then you only have to program one tool for the first straight/circle.

D (cutting edge)

For tools having several cutting edges, there is a set of individual tool offset data for each cutting edge. For these tools, you must select or specify the number of the cutting edge with which you would like to carry out the machining.

Caution

If you specify the wrong cutting edge number for some tools (e.g. a flatchamfering drill with guide pilots or step drill) and then traverse the tool, collisions may result. Always ensure that you input the correct cutting edge number.

Radius compensation

ShopTurn automatically takes the tool radius compensation into account during all machining cycles, with the exception of track milling and straight. For track milling and straight, you have the option of programming the machining with or without radius compensation. The tool radius compensation is modal for straight, i.e. you have to deselect the radius compensation again if you want to traverse without radius compensation.

Radius compensation to right of contour

Radius compensation to left of contour

Radius compensation off

Radius compensation remains as previously set

Page 144: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-144 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

F (feed)

The feedrate F, also called machining feedrate, specifies the speed at which the axes move during machining of the workpiece. The machining feedrate is input in mm/min, mm/rev or in mm/tooth. The feedrate for milling cycles is automatically converted on switchover from mm/min to mm/rev and vice versa. The input of the feedrate in mm/tooth is only possible during milling and ensures that each cutting edge of the milling machine is cutting under the best possible conditions. Feed per tooth corresponds to the linear path traversed by the mill when a tooth is engaged. For milling and turning cycles, the feedrate during roughing is relative to the milling or cutting center-point. This is true during finishing too, with the exception of contours with inside curves. In this case, the feedrate is relative to the contact point between the tool and the workpiece. The maximum feedrate is determined via machine data.

Please refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

S (spindle speed)

The spindle speed S specifies the number of spindle revolutions per minute (rpm) and is programmed together with a tool. The speed specification is relative to the main spindle (S1) or counter-spindle (S3) during turning machining and axial drilling and to the tool spindle (S2) during drilling and milling machining. The spindle start occurs immediately after the tool change. Spindle stop occurs upon reset, program end, or a tool change. The spindle’s direction of rotation is set in the tool list for each tool.

Alternatively to the spindle speed, you can also program the cutting speed. During the milling cycles, the spindle speed is automatically recalculated into the cutting speed and vice versa.

V (cutting speed)

The cutting speed V is a circumferential speed (m/min) and it is programmed together with a tool, alternatively to the spindle speed. The cutting speed is relative to the main spindle (V1) or the counter-spindle (V3) for turning machining and axial drilling and corresponds to the circumferential speed of the workpiece at the point that is currently being machined. For drilling and milling machining on the other hand, the cutting speed is relative to the tool spindle (V2) and corresponds to the circumferential speed at which the cutting edge of the tool is machining the workpiece.

Page 145: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program 4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-145

Processing

For the processing of some cycles, you can choose between roughing, finishing, or complete machining For certain milling cycles, finishing edge or finishing bottom are possible. • Roughing

One or more machinings with depth setting • Finishing

One-time machining • Finishing edge

Only the edge of the object is finished • Finishing bottom

Only the bottom of the object is finished

• Complete machining Roughing and finishing with a tool in a machining step

If you want to rough and finish using two different tools, you must call up the machining cycle twice (1st block = roughing, 2nd block = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained on the second call.

Position the cursor in the work plan on the line behind which a

new program block is to be inserted.

...

Using the softkeys, select the desired function (see following section).

The corresponding parameter screen form is displayed.

Enter the values for the individual parameters.

Press the "Help" key if you want to see the help screen, which explains the individual parameters.

Tools

Press the "Tools" softkey if you want to select a tool from the tool list for parameter "T".

-and- Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.

-and- To

Program Press the "To program" softkey.

The selected tool is accepted into the parameter screen form.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The values are saved and the parameterization screen form is closed. The process plan is displayed and the newly created program block is marked.

Page 146: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-146 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

4.3.4 Changing program blocks

You can later optimize the parameters in the programmed ShopTurn blocks or adapt them to new situations, e.g. if you want to increase the feedrate or shift a position. In this case, you can change all the parameters in every program block directly in the associated parameter screen form.

Press the "Program" softkey.

The directory overview is displayed.

Place the cursor on the directory that contains the program that you want to open.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor Right" key.

All the programs in this directory are displayed.

Select the program that you want to change.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor Right" key.

The machining plan of the program is displayed.

Place the cursor on the desired program block in the machining plan.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The parameter screen for the selected program block appears.

Make the desired changes.

-or-

Press the "Accept" softkey or the "Cursor left" key.

The changes are accepted in the program.

Page 147: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program 4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-147

4.3.5 Program editor

You use the program editor when you want to change the sequence of program blocks within a program, delete program blocks or copy program blocks from one program to another.

The following functions are available in the program editor:

• Select You can select several program blocks simultaneously, for example, for cutting and pasting them subsequently.

• Copy/paste You can copy and paste program blocks within a program or between different programs.

• Cut You can cut and therefore delete program blocks. However, the program blocks remain in the buffer, so you can still paste them in somewhere else.

• Search You can search for a specific block number or any character string in a program.

• Rename You can rename a contour in the program editor, e.g. if you have copied the contour.

• Numbering When you insert a new or copied program block between two existing program blocks, ShopTurn automatically assigns a new block number. This block number may be higher than the one in the following block. With the "Numbering" function, you can renumber the program blocks in ascending order.

Page 148: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-148 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Opening the program editor

Select a program.

Press the "Expansion" key.

The softkeys for the program editor are displayed in the vertical softkey bar.

Selecting a program block

Place the cursor in the machining plan on the first or last block you want to select.

Mark

Press the "Mark" softkey.

Use the cursor keys to select any further program blocks.

The program blocks are marked.

Copying a program block

Select the program block(s) in the machining plan.

Copy

Press the "Copy" softkey.

The program blocks are copied into buffer memory.

Cutting a program block

Select the program block(s) in the machining plan.

Cut

Press the "Cut" softkey.

The program blocks are removed from the machining plan and stored in buffer memory.

Pasting a program block

Copy or cut the desired program blocks in the machining plan.

Place the cursor on the line after which the program block(s) is (are) to be inserted.

Insert

Press the "Insert" softkey.

The program blocks are inserted in the machining plan of the program.

Page 149: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 11/2006 Creating a ShopTurn program 4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 4-149

Find

Search >

Press the "Search" softkey.

Enter a block number or text.

Select whether the search is to commence at the start of the program or the current cursor position.

Search

Press the "Search" softkey.

ShopTurn searches throughout the program. The cursor highlights the search hit.

Find next

Press the "Find next" softkey to continue the search, as necessary.

Renaming a contour

Place the cursor on a contour in the machining plan.

Rename

Press the "Rename" softkey.

Enter a new name for the contour.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The name of the contour is changed and displayed in the machining plan.

Numbering program blocks

Renumber

Press the "Renumber" softkey.

The program blocks are renumbered in ascending order.

Closing the program editor

Press the "Back" softkey to close the program editor.

Page 150: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

4 Creating a ShopTurn program 11/2006

4

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 4-150 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

4.3.6 Defining a quantity

If you want to finish a certain number of the same kind of workpiece, you can input the desired quantity at the program end. When you start the program, the program will be repeatedly executed for as many times as you specified.

If your machine has a bar loader, you can program the reloading of

the workpiece and then the actual machining at the beginning of the program. Finally, remove the finished workpiece and enter the desired quantity at the program end.

In this way, workpiece finishing can take place fully automatically.

Open the "Program end" block, if you want to machine more than one workpiece.

Enter the number of workpieces that you want to machine.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

When you later start the program, the program will be repeatedly executed for as many times as you specified.

Endless

If you want to repeat the program execution an unlimited number of times, press the "Endless" softkey. You can abort the program execution with "Reset."

Page 151: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions 5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-151

ShopTurn Functions 5.1 Linear or circular path movements ......................................................................... 5-153

5.1.1 Selecting a tool and machining plane ..................................................................... 5-154 5.1.2 Straight line ............................................................................................................. 5-156 5.1.3 Circle with known center point ................................................................................ 5-158 5.1.4 Circle with known radius ......................................................................................... 5-159 5.1.5 Polar coordinates .................................................................................................... 5-161 5.1.6 Polar straight line .................................................................................................... 5-162 5.1.7 Polar circle .............................................................................................................. 5-164

5.2 Bore......................................................................................................................... 5-165 5.2.1 Centered drilling...................................................................................................... 5-166 5.2.2 Thread centered...................................................................................................... 5-168 5.2.3 Drilling and reaming ................................................................................................ 5-169 5.2.4 Deep hole drilling .................................................................................................... 5-171 5.2.5 Tapping ................................................................................................................... 5-173 5.2.6 Thread milling.......................................................................................................... 5-175 5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns............................................................................ 5-177 5.2.8 Freely programmable positions............................................................................... 5-178 5.2.9 Line position pattern................................................................................................ 5-180 5.2.10 Matrix position pattern............................................................................................. 5-181 5.2.11 Box position pattern ................................................................................................ 5-184 5.2.12 Full circle position pattern ....................................................................................... 5-186 5.2.13 Pitch circle position pattern ..................................................................................... 5-188 5.2.14 Including and skipping positions ........................................................................... 5-190 5.2.15 Repeating positions .............................................................................................. 5-191

5.3 Turning .................................................................................................................... 5-192 5.3.1 Roughing cycles...................................................................................................... 5-192 5.3.2 Recessing cycles .................................................................................................... 5-195 5.3.3 Undercut form E and F.......................................................................................... 5-198 5.3.4 Thread undercuts.................................................................................................. 5-199 5.3.5 Thread cutting ......................................................................................................... 5-201 5.3.6 Thread re-machining............................................................................................... 5-205 5.3.7 Parting..................................................................................................................... 5-206

5.4 Contour turning ....................................................................................................... 5-208 5.4.1 Representation of the contour................................................................................. 5-209 5.4.2 Creating a new contour........................................................................................... 5-212 5.4.3 Creating contour elements...................................................................................... 5-213 5.4.4 Changing a contour................................................................................................. 5-218 5.4.5 Stock removal ......................................................................................................... 5-220 5.4.6 Removal of residual material .................................................................................. 5-224 5.4.7 Grooving.................................................................................................................. 5-226 5.4.8 Grooving residual material ...................................................................................... 5-228 5.4.9 Plunge-turning......................................................................................................... 5-229 5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material ............................................................................. 5-231

5.5 Milling ...................................................................................................................... 5-233

Page 152: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-152 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.5.1 Rectangular pocket .................................................................................................5-234 5.5.2 Circular pocket ........................................................................................................5-238 5.5.3 Rectangular spigot ..................................................................................................5-242 5.5.4 Circular spigot .........................................................................................................5-246 5.5.5 Longitudinal slot ......................................................................................................5-249 5.5.6 Circumferential slot..................................................................................................5-252 5.5.7 Positions..................................................................................................................5-256 5.5.8 Multiple edge ...........................................................................................................5-257 5.5.9 Engraving ................................................................................................................5-259

5.6 Contour milling ........................................................................................................5-266 5.6.1 Representation of the contour.................................................................................5-269 5.6.2 Creating a new contour ...........................................................................................5-271 5.6.3 Creating contour elements ......................................................................................5-273 5.6.4 Changing a contour .................................................................................................5-280 5.6.5 Path milling..............................................................................................................5-282 5.6.6 Predrilling a contour pocket.....................................................................................5-287 5.6.7 Milling a contour pocket (roughing) .........................................................................5-291 5.6.8 Removing residual material from a contour pocket............................................... 5-294 5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket ................................................................................. 5-296 5.6.10 Chamfering a contour pocket ..................................................................................5-300 5.6.11 Milling a contour spigot (roughing) ..........................................................................5-301 5.6.12 Removing residual material from a contour spigot..................................................5-304 5.6.13 Finishing the contour spigot ....................................................................................5-306 5.6.14 Chamfering a contour spigot ...................................................................................5-309

5.7 Calling a subroutine.................................................................................................5-311

5.8 Repeating program blocks ......................................................................................5-313

5.9 Machining with the counterspindle ..........................................................................5-314

5.10 Changing program settings .....................................................................................5-320

5.11 Calling work offsets .................................................................................................5-321

5.12 Defining coordinate transformations .......................................................................5-322

5.13 Programming the approach/return cycle.................................................................5-324

5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program..........................................................5-326

5.15 Teaching..................................................................................................................5-328 5.15.1 Teaching a cycle .....................................................................................................5-328 5.15.2 Teaching a position sample ....................................................................................5-329 5.15.3 Teaching a contour object.......................................................................................5-330

Page 153: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.1 Linear or circular path movements

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-153

5.1 Linear or circular path movements When you want to perform straight or circular path movements or

machining without defining a complete contour, you can use the functions "Straight" or "Circle" respectively.

To program simple machining operations, proceed as follows:

• Specify the tool and the spindle speed • Select the machining plane • Program the machining • Program any further machining

The following machining options are available: • Straight line • Circle with known center point • Circle with known radius • Line with polar coordinates • Circle with polar coordinates

If you want to program a line or a circle using polar coordinates, you must define the pole first.

Caution If you use a straight or circular path movement to move the tool into the retraction zone specified in the program header, you must also move the tool out again. Otherwise a collision could occur as a result of the traversing movements in a subsequently programmed ShopTurn cycle.

Page 154: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.1 Linear or circular path movements

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-154 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.1.1 Selecting a tool and machining plane

Before you can program a line or circle, you have to select the tool, spindle, spindle speed and machining plane.

If you program a sequence of different straight or circular path

motions, the settings for the tool, spindle, spindle speed and machining plane remain active until you change them again.

If you change the selected machining plane subsequently, the coordinates of the programmed path motion are adjusted automatically to the new machining plane. The originally programmed coordinates remain unchanged only for a straight motion (right-angled, not polar).

Tool >

Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Tool" softkeys.

Enter a tool in parameter field "T".

-or-

Tools

Press the "Tools" softkey and select a tool from the tool list.

-and-

Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.

-and-

To Program

Press the "To program" softkey.

The tool is copied into the "T" parameter field.

Select the tool cutting edge number D if the tool has several cutting edges.

In the left-hand input field of the Spindle parameter, select main spindle (S1), tool spindle (S2) or counterspindle (S3).

Enter the spindle speed or cutting rate in the right-hand input field.

Page 155: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.1 Linear or circular path movements

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-155

Choose one of the machining planes (Rotate, End face/End face C, Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, End face Y or Peripheral surface Y).

Enter the cylinder diameter if you selected the machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C.

-or-

Enter the positioning angle for the CP machining area if you selected machining plane End face Y.

-or-

Enter reference point C0 if you selected the machining plane Peripheral surface Y.

Choose whether the spindle should be clamped or released or whether there should be no change (input field left blank).

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The values are saved and the parameterization screen form is closed. The process plan is displayed and the newly created program block is marked.

Page 156: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.1 Linear or circular path movements

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-156 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.1.2 Straight line

When you want to program a straight line in Cartesian coordinates, you can use the "Straight" function.

The tool moves across a straight line at the programmed feedrate or

at rapid traverse from its current position to the programmed end position.

Radius compensation Alternately you can implement the straight line with radius compensation. The radius compensation acts modally; therefore, you must deactivate the radius compensation again when you want to traverse without radius compensation. If several straight line blocks with radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you may select radius compensation only in the first program block.

For the first straight line with radius compensation, the tool approaches the starting point without radius compensation and the end point with radius compensation, i.e. if a vertical path is programmed, a slope will be traversed. The compensation does not act over the entire traverse path until the second programmed straight line with radius compensation. The reverse occurs when radius compensation is deactivated.

Programmedpath

Travel path

Programmedpath

Travel path

First straight line with radius

compensation First straight line with deactivated radius compensation

If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can program the first straight line with radius compensation or with deactivated radius compensation at a distance from the workpiece. Programming without coordinate data is not possible.

Page 157: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.1 Linear or circular path movements

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-157

Straight >

Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Straight" softkeys.

Rapide traverse

Press the "Rapid traverse" softkey if you want to use rapid traverse instead of a programmed machining feedrate.

Parameters Description Units

X Z Y C1 C3 C3

Target position in the X direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position of C axis of main spindle (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position of C axis of counterspindle (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position of special axis (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm mm mm

F Machining feedrate mm/rev mm/min mm/tooth

Radius compensation

Input defining which side of the contour the tool machines in the programmed direction:

Radius compensation to right of contour

Radius compensation to left of contour

Radius compensation off

The previously programmed setting for radius compensation is used

Page 158: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.1 Linear or circular path movements

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-158 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.1.3 Circle with known center point

To program a circle or arc with a known center point in Cartesian coordinates, use the "Circle center point" function.

The tool traverses a circular path from its current position to the

programmed target position at the machining feedrate. ShopTurn calculates the radius of the circle/arc on the basis of the entered interpolation parameter settings I and K.

Circle cen-ter point >

Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Circle center point" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

Direction of rotation

Dir. of rot. in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to circle end point Direction of rotation clockwise (right) Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)

X Y I J

Machining plane End face/End face C: Target position in the X direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X direction (inc) The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y direction (inc) The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm

Y Z J K

Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y direction (inc) The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z direction (inc) The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm

X Y I J

Machining plane End face Y: Target position in the X direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X direction (inc) The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y direction (inc) The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm

Page 159: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.1 Linear or circular path movements

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-159

Y Z J K

Machining plane Peripheral surface Y: Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Y direction (inc) The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z direction (inc) The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm

X Z I K

Machining plane Rotate: Target position ∅ in the X direction (abs) or target position in the X direction (inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the X direction (inc) The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance between the circle starting point and the circle center point in the Z direction (inc) The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm mm

F Machining feedrate mm/rev mm/min mm/tooth

5.1.4 Circle with known radius

To program a circle or arc with a known radius in Cartesian coordinates, use the "Circle radius" function.

The tool traverses a circular arc with the programmed radius from its

current position to the programmed target position at the machining feedrate. The position of the circle center point is calculated by ShopTurn.

You can choose to traverse the arc in the clockwise or anticlockwise direction. Depending on the direction of rotation, there are two options for approaching the target position from the current position via an arc of the specified radius. You can select the arc of your choice by entering a positive or a negative sign for the radius.

+

Target

Start

Arc angles of up to 180°: +

Arc angles larger than 180°: –

Arcs with different arc angles

Page 160: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.1 Linear or circular path movements

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-160 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Circle radius >

Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Circle radius" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

Direction of rotation

Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the circle end point

Direction of rotation clockwise (right)

Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)

X Y

Machining plane End face/End face C: Target position in the X direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

Y Z

Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

X Y

Machining plane End face Y: Target position in the X direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

Y Z

Machining plane Peripheral surface Y: Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

X Z

Machining plane Rotate: Target position ∅ in the X direction (abs) or target position in the X direction (inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

R Radius of arc The sign determines the type of arc traversed.

mm

F Machining feedrate mm/rev mm/min mm/tooth

Page 161: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.1 Linear or circular path movements

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-161

5.1.5 Polar coordinates

If a workpiece has been dimensioned from a central point (pole) with radius and angles, you will find it helpful to program these dimensions as polar coordinates.

Before you program a straight line or circle in polar coordinates, you must define the pole, i.e. the reference point, of the polar coordinate system.

Polar >

Pole >

Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Pole" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

X Y

Machining plane End face/End face C: X position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Y position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

Y Z

Machining plane Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Y position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

X Y

Machining plane End face Y: X position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Y position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

Y Z

Machining plane Peripheral surface Y: Y position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

X Z

Machining plane Rotate: X position of the pole ∅ (abs) or X position of the pole (inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z position of the pole (abs or inc) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm

Page 162: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.1 Linear or circular path movements

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-162 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.1.6 Polar straight line

When you want to program a straight line in polar coordinates, you can use the "Straight polar" function.

A straight line in the polar coordinate system is defined by the length L

and the angle α. The angle is based on another axis depending on the machining plane. The direction in which a positive angle points also depends on the machining plane.

Machining plane Turning Face Overall

Reference axis for angle Z X Y

Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z

The tool traverses a straight line from its current position to the programmed end point at the machining feedrate or at rapid traverse. The 1st line in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be programmed in absolute dimensions. You can program any further lines or circles with incremental coordinates.

Radius compensation Alternately you can implement the straight line with radius compensation. The radius compensation acts modally, therefore you must deactivate the radius compensation again when you want to traverse without radius compensation. Where several straight line blocks with radius compensation are programmed sequentially, you may select radius compensation only in the first program block.

For the first straight line with radius compensation, the tool approaches the starting point without radius compensation and the end point with radius compensation, i.e. if a vertical path is programmed, a slope will be traversed. The compensation does not act over the entire traverse path until the second programmed straight line with radius compensation. The reverse occurs when radius compensation is deactivated.

Programmedpath

Travel path

Programmedpath

Travel path

First straight line with radius compensation

First straight line with deactivated radius compensation

Page 163: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.1 Linear or circular path movements

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-163

If you want to prevent deviation from the programmed path, you can program the first straight line with radius compensation or with deactivated radius compensation at a distance from the workpiece. Programming without coordinate data is not possible.

Polar >

Straight polar >

Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Straight polar" softkeys.

Rapid traverse

Press the "Rapid traverse" softkey if you want to use rapid traverse instead of a programmed machining feedrate.

Parameters Description Units

L Distance between the pole and the end point of line mm

α Polar angle (abs or inc) The sign specifies the direction.

Degr.

F Machining feedrate mm/rev mm/min mm/tooth

Radius compensation

Input defining which side of the contour the tool machines in the programmed direction:

Radius compensation to right of contour

Radius compensation to left of contour

Radius compensation off

The previously programmed setting for radius compensation is used

Page 164: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.1 Linear or circular path movements

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-164 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.1.7 Polar circle

If you want to program a circle or arc using polar coordinates, you can use the "Circle polar" function.

A circle in the polar coordinate system is defined by an angle α. The

angle is based on another axis depending on the machining plane. The direction in which a positive angle points also depends on the machining plane.

Machining plane Turning Face Overall

Reference axis for angle Z X Y

Positive angle in direction of the axis X Y Z

The tool traverses a circular path from its current position to the programmed end point (angle) at the machining feedrate. The radius is obtained from the distance between the current tool position and the defined pole, i.e. the circle start and end point positions are at the same distance from the pole. The 1st arc in polar coordinates entered after the pole must be programmed in absolute dimensions. You can program any further lines or circles with incremental coordinates.

Polar >

Circle polar >

Press the "Strai. Circle", "Polar" and "Circle polar" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

Direction of rotation

Direction of rotation in which the tool travels from the circle starting point to the circle end point

Direction of rotation clockwise (right)

Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)

α Polar angle (abs or inc) The sign specifies the direction.

Degr.

F Machining feedrate mm/rev mm/min mm/tooth

Page 165: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-165

5.2 Bore The functions explained in this section are used when you want to

program various drill holes on the end face or peripheral surface.

You program drilling operations in the order in which they are

performed. The following technology cycles can be used: • Drilling centered • Thread centered • Centering • Boring • Reaming • Deep hole drilling • Tapping • Thread milling

You have to program the positions or position pattern after the technology cycles.

All program blocks involved in the drilling operation are shown in the process plan in square brackets.

Example: Bore

Clamp spindle With off-center drilling, it can be helpful to clamp the spindle to avoid spindle distortions. The "Clamp spindle" function must be set up by the machine manufacturer. The machine manufacturer also specifies whether ShopTurn will clamp the spindle automatically if this would facilitate machining, or if you can decide the types of machining for which the spindle should be clamped.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

If you are to decide the types of machining for which the spindle is to be clamped, the following applies: You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping remains activated only until the drilling operation ends. When machining in planes End face Y and Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand, clamping is modal, i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is changed or clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" "Tool" menu.

Page 166: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-166 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.2.1 Centered drilling

The "Drill centered" function is used to make a drill hole in the center of the end face.

You can choose between chip breakage during drilling or retraction

from the workpiece for stock removal. During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates. You can use a drill, rotary drill or milling cutter as the tool.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position, allowing for the return plane and safety clearance.

Chipbreaking

1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first infeed depth.

2. The tool retracts by the retraction value V2 and drills as far as the next infeed depth that can be reduced by the factor DF.

3. Step 2 is repeated until final drilling depth Z1 has been reached and dwell time DT has expired.

4. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Stock removal

1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first infeed depth.

2. The tool is retracted from the workpiece at rapid traverse to the safety clearance for stock removal and is then re-inserted at the 1st infeed depth reduced by a clearance distance calculated by the control system.

3. The tool then drills down to the next infeed depth that can be reduced by the factor DF and the tool retracts again for stock removal.

4. Step 3 is repeated until final drilling depth Z1 has been reached and dwell time DT has expired.

5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

If you want, for example, to drill very deep holes, you can also employ a rotating tool spindle. First specify the required tool and tool spindle speed under "Straight/Circle" "Tool" (see Section "Select tool and machining plane"). Then program the "Drill centered" function.

Page 167: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-167

Drilling centric >

Press the "Drilling" and "Drilling centric" softkeys.

Break chips -or-

Solid machin.

Press the "Break chips" or "Solid machin." softkey.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Shank Tip

The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the value programmed for Z1. The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied. The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the value programmed for Z1.

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm

Z1 Insertion depth with reference to Z0 for drill tip or drill shank. (abs. or inc.)

mm

D Maximum infeed mm

DF Percentage for each additional infeed DF = 100: Amount of infeed remains constant DF < 100: Amount of infeed is reduced in direction of final drilling depth. Example: DF = 80 Last infeed was 4 mm; 4 x 80% = 3.2; next infeed increment is 3.2 mm 3.2 x 80% = 2.56; next infeed increment is 2.56 mm, etc.

%

V1 Minimum infeed Parameter V1 is available only if DF<100% has been programmed. If the amount of infeed is very small a minimum infeed can be programmed with parameter V1. V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with infeed value. V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with the value programmed in V1.

mm

V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking.

mm

DT Dwell time for release cut s U

XD Center offset in X direction The center offset can be used for example to produce a drill hole with an exact fit. A rotary drill (rotary drill type) or U drill (drill type) is required. A "normal" drill is not suitable. The maximum center offset is stored in a machine data code.

mm

Page 168: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-168 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.2.2 Thread centered

The "Thread centered" function is used to tap a right-hand or left-hand thread in the center of the end face.

During machining, either the main spindle or counterspindle rotates.

You can alter the spindle speed via the spindle override; feedrate override is not operative.

You can select drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the workpiece for stock removal.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position, allowing for the retraction plane and safety clearance.

1 cut 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or cut rate V as far as the final drilling depth Z1.

2. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety clearance at the programmed spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

Stock removal

1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).

2. The tool retracts from the workpiece to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR for stock removal.

3. Then the tool is inserted again as far as the 1st infeed depth at spindle speed S or feedrate V and drills to the next infeed depth.

4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling depth Z1 is reached.

5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

Chipbreaking

1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).

2. The tool retracts by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking. 3. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S or

feedrate V. 4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling

depth Z1 is reached. 5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool

retracts to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

Page 169: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-169

The machine manufacturer may have made specific settings for centered tapping in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Thread centric >

Press the "Drilling" and "Thread centric" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

P Pitch The pitch is determined by the tool used.

mm/rev in/rev Turns/" MODULE

1 cut Stock removal Chipbreaking

The thread is drilled in one cut without stopping. The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal. The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm

Z1 Tapping depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) mm

D Maximum infeed (for stock removal or chipbreaking only) mm

V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) Amount by which the tap is retracted for chipbreaking. V2=automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.

mm

5.2.3 Drilling and reaming

The "Drilling" and "Reaming" functions are used when you want to program various drill holes on the end face or peripheral surface.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position,

allowing for the retraction plane and safety clearance.

Centering

1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at the programmed feedrate F until it reaches the depth or diameter.

2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

Bore

1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at programmed feedrate (F) until it reaches the depth X1 or Z1.

2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

Reaming

1. The tool is inserted into the workpiece at programmed feedrate (F) until it reaches the depth X1 or Z1.

2. On expiry of dwell time DT, the tool is retracted at the programmed feedrate to the safety clearance.

Page 170: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-170 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Drilling reaming >

Press the "Drilling" and "Drilling reaming" softkeys.

Centering -or-

Drilling

-or- Reaming

Press the "Centering", "Drilling" or "Reaming" softkey.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

FB Retraction feedrate (for reaming only) mm/min

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Diameter Shank Tip

The tool is inserted into the workpiece until the diameter of the tool reaches the workpiece surface. The angle of the center drill specified in the tool list is taken into account (only for centering). The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the programmed depth 1. The angle specified in the tool list is taken into account (only for drilling). The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches programmed depth 1 (only for centering and drilling).

∅ Diameter of centering (only for centering – diameter) mm

Z1 Insertion depth for the drill tip or the drill shank with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)

mm

X1 Insertion depth for the drill tip or the drill shank with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y)

mm

DT Dwell time before retraction to release from cut s rev

Page 171: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-171

5.2.4 Deep hole drilling

The "Deep hole drilling" function is used when you want to drill deep holes with several infeed steps on the end face or peripheral surface.

You can choose between chip breakage during drilling or retraction

from the workpiece for stock removal.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position, allowing for the retraction plane and safety clearance.

Chipbreaking

1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first infeed depth.

2. The tool is retracted by V2 for chipbreaking and drills up to the next infeed depth.

3. Step 2 is repeated until final drilling depth Z1 has been reached and dwell time DT has expired.

4. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Stock removal

1. The tool drills at the programmed feedrate F as far as the first infeed depth.

2. The tool is retracted from the workpiece at rapid traverse to the safety clearance for stock removal and is then re-inserted as far as the 1st infeed depth, reduced by a clearance distance V3.

3. Drilling is then resumed up to the next infeed depth and the tool is then retracted again.

4. Step 3 is repeated until the programmed drilling depth Z1 has been reached and dwell time DT has expired.

5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Deep hole drilling >

Press the "Drilling" and "Deep hole drilling" softkeys.

Page 172: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-172 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Stock removal Chipbreaking

The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal. The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.

Shank Tip

The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill shank reaches the programmed depth 1. The insertion angle entered in the tool list is applied. The drill is inserted into the workpiece until the drill tip reaches the programmed depth 1.

Z1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank with reference to Z0. (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)

mm

X1 Insertion depth for drill tip or drill shank with reference to X0. (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y)

mm

D Maximum infeed mm

DF Percentage for each additional infeed DF = 100: Amount of infeed remains constant DF < 100: Amount of infeed is reduced in direction of final drilling depth. Example: DF = 80 Last infeed was 4 mm; 4 x 80% = 3.2; next infeed increment is 3.2 mm 3.2 x 80% = 2.56; next infeed increment is 2.56 mm, etc.

%

V1 Minimum infeed Parameter V1 is available only if DF<100% has been programmed. If the amount of infeed is very small a minimum infeed can be programmed with parameter V1. V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with infeed value. V1 < Amount of infeed: Infeed with the value programmed in V1.

mm

V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking. V2=0: The tool is not retracted but is left in place for one revolution.

mm

V3 Limit distance (for stock removal only) Distance to last infeed depth that the drill approaches at rapid traverse after stock removal. Automatic: The clearance distance is calculated by ShopTurn.

mm

DT Dwell time for release cut s rev

Page 173: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-173

5.2.5 Tapping

The "Tapping" function is used when you want to tap an internal thread on the end face or peripheral surface.

The spindle speed can be changed with the spindle override during

tapping. The feed override is inoperative during this process.

You can select drilling in one cut, chipbreaking or retraction from the workpiece for stock removal.

The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the programmed position, allowing for the retraction plane and safety clearance. With the spindle stationary, the tool moves at rapid traverse to the retraction plane and then to the safety clearance. Here the spindle begins to rotate and the spindle speed and feedrate are synchronized. The tool continues to move at rapid traverse towards the programmed position.

1 cut 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or cut rate V as far as the tapping depth X1 or Z1.

2. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety clearance at the programmed spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

Stock removal

1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).

2. The tool retracts from the workpiece to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR for stock removal.

3. Then the tool enters the workpiece again at spindle speed SR and feedrate VR to the 1st infeed depth with an anticipation point of 1 mm, the spindle speed changes to S and the feedrate to V, and finally the tool drills to the next infeed depth.

4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling depth X1 or Z1 is reached.

5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

Chipbreaking 1. The tool drills at the programmed spindle speed S or feedrate V as far as the first infeed depth (maximum infeed depth D).

2. The tool retracts by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking. 3. The tool then drills to the next infeed depth at spindle speed S or

feedrate V.

Page 174: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-174 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the programmed final drilling depth X1 or Z1 is reached.

5. The direction of rotation of the spindle reverses and the tool retracts to the safety clearance at spindle speed SR or cut rate VR.

The machine manufacturer may have made specific settings for tapping in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Thread >

Tapping

Press the "Drilling", "Thread" and "Tapping" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

P Pitch The pitch is determined by the tool used.

MODULUS: Used with endless screws, for example, which extend into a gear wheel.

Turns/ ": Used with pipe threads, for example. For values entered in turns/", enter the integer in front of the decimal point in the first parameter field and the figures after the decimal point as a fraction in the second and third field. For example, 13.5 turns/" is entered as follows:

mm/rev in/rev Turns/" MODULE

SR Spindle speed for retraction rpm

VR Cutting rate for retraction (alternative to SR) m/min

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

1 cut Stock removal Chipbreaking

The thread is drilled in one cut without stopping. The drill is retracted from the workpiece for stock removal. The drill is retracted by the retraction amount V2 for chipbreaking.

Z1 Tapping depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y)

mm

X1 Tapping depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y)

mm

Page 175: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-175

D Maximum infeed (for stock removal or chipbreaking only) mm

V2 Retraction amount (for chipbreaking only) Amount by which the drill is retracted for chipbreaking. V2=automatic: The tool is retracted by one revolution.

mm

5.2.6 Thread milling

The "Thread milling" function is used when you want to mill an internal or external thread on the end face.

For metric threads (thread pitch P in mm/rev) ShopTurn assigns a

value calculated from the thread pitch to the Thread depth K parameter. You can change this value. The default selection must be activated via a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The entered feedrate refers to the machining. However the feedrate of the cutter center point is displayed. That is why a smaller value is displayed for internal threads and a larger value is displayed for external threads than was entered.

You can mill a right-hand thread or a left-hand thread. Internal thread

1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the thread center point on

the return plane, and then to the safety clearance. 2. The tool describes an approach circle calculated by the control and

then approaches the thread diameter at the programmed feedrate along a helical path.

3. The thread is cut along a helical path in clockwise or counterclockwise direction (depending on whether it is a left-hand or right-hand thread).

4. The tool is retracted from the workpiece along a helical path at the programmed feedrate.

5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

External thread

1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the starting point on the return plane, and then to the safety clearance.

2. The tool describes an approach circle calculated by the control and then approaches the thread diameter at the programmed feedrate along a helical path.

3. The thread is cut along a helical path in clockwise or counterclockwise direction (depending on whether it is a left-hand or right-hand thread).

4. The tool is retracted from the thread along a helical path at the programmed feedrate.

Page 176: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-176 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Thread >

Cut thread

Press the "Drilling", "Thread" and "Cut thread" softkeys.

Parameters

Description

Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 6 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Roughing Finishing

Direction Depending on the rotational direction of the spindle, a change in direction also changes the machining direction (climb/conventional). Z0 to Z1: Machining starts at workpiece surface Z0 (only for end face/end face C and end face Y) Z1 to Z0: Machining starts at the thread depth (only for end face/end face C and end face Y) X0 to X1: Machining starts at workpiece surface X0 (only for peripheral surface Y) X1 to X0: Machining starts at the thread depth (only for peripheral surface Y)

Internal thread External thread

Internal thread External thread

Left-hand thread Right-hand thread

Left-hand thread Right-hand thread

NT Number of teeth in a milling insert. Single or multiple toothed milling inserts can be used. The motions required are executed by the cycle internally, so that the tip of the bottom tooth on the milling insert corresponds to the programmed end position when the thread end position is reached. Depending on the cutting edge geometry of the milling insert, the retraction path must be taken into account at the base of the workpiece.

Z1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y) mm X1 Thread length (abs. or inc.) – (only for peripheral surface Y) mm ∅ Nominal thread diameter, example: nominal thread diameter of M12=12mm mm P Pitch

If the cutter has several teeth, the thread pitch is determined by the tool. mm/rev in/rev Turns/" MODULE

Page 177: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-177

K Thread depth mm

DXY Infeed per cut (for roughing only) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)

mm %

DYZ Infeed per cut (for roughing only) – (only for peripheral surface Y) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)

mm %

U Final machining allowance (for roughing only) mm

α0 Start angle Degr.

5.2.7 Positioning and position patterns

The drilling positions must be programmed after you have programmed the drilling technologies (centering, tapping, etc.).

The following position patterns are available:

• Freely programmable positions • Position on a line, on a matrix or box • Position on a full or pitch circle

You can program several position patterns in succession (up to 20 technologies and position patterns together). They are traversed in the order in which you program them. The programmed technologies and subsequently programmed positions are automatically chained by the control.

Sequence of execution 1. The first tool in the program (e.g. centering tool) initially traverses all programmed positions. Machining of the positions always starts at the reference point. In the case of a matrix, machining is performed first in the direction of the 1st axis and then back and forth. The box and hole circle are machined counterclockwise.

2. All programmed positions are then machined with the second programmed tool.

3. This procedure is repeated until each programmed technology has been executed at all programmed positions.

Tool traverse path Within a position pattern or on approach from one position pattern to the next, the tool is retracted to the safety clearance, and the new position or position pattern is then approached at rapid traverse.

Including/skipping positions

You can include or skip any positions (see chapter entitled "Including and skipping positions").

Page 178: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-178 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.2.8 Freely programmable positions

You can use the "Freely programmable positions" function to program any number of positions on the peripheral surface or end face.

ShopTurn approaches the individual positions in the order in which

you enter them.

In a program block, you can specify up to 8 positions. To program other freely programmable positions, you must call the "Freely programmable positions" function again.

Positions >

Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Freely Programmable Positions" softkeys.

Delete all

Press the "Delete all" softkey if you want to delete all the programmed positions.

Parameters Description Units

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Cartesian/ polar Cartesian/ cylindrical

Dimensioning in Cartesian coordinates or polar coordinates (only for end face/end face C and end face Y) Dimensioning in Cartesian coordinates or cylinder coordinates (only for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C)

mm mm

Z0 CP X0 Y0

X1 ... X7 Y1 ...Y7

End face/end face C and end face Y - Cartesian: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area (only for end face Y) X coordinate for first position (abs.) Y coordinate for first position (abs.)

X coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm Degr. mm mm

mm mm

Page 179: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-179

Z0 CP C0 L0

C1 ...C7 L1 ...L7

End face/end face C and end face Y - Polar: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area (only for end face Y) C coordinate for first position (abs.) 1st position of hole with reference to Y axis (abs.)

C coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Distance to position (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm Degr. Degr. mm

Degr. mm

X0 Y0 Z0

Y1 ...Y7 Z1 ... Z7

Peripheral surface/peripheral surface C - Cartesian: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Y coordinate for first position (abs.) Z coordinate for first position (abs.)

Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm mm mm

mm mm

C0 Z0

C1 ...C7 Z1 ... Z7

Peripheral surface/peripheral surface C - Cylindrical C coordinate for first position (abs.) 1st position of hole with reference to Z axis (abs.)

C coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Further positions in the Z axis (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

Degr. mm

Degr. mm

X0 C0 Y0 Z0

Y1 ...Y7 Z1 ... Z7

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate for first position (abs.) Z coordinate for first position (abs.)

Y coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Z coordinate for further positions (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm Degr. mm mm

mm mm

Page 180: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-180 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.2.9 Line position pattern

The "Line position pattern" function is used to program any number of positions that lie equidistant on a line.

Positions >

Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Line/Matrix/Box" softkeys.

Select the “Line” position pattern in the "Line/Matrix/Box” parameter field.

Parameters Description Units

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Z0 X0 Y0 α0

End face/End face C: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.

mm mm mm Degr.

X0 Y0 Z0 α0

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.

mm mm mm Degr.

Z0 CP X0 Y0 α0

End face Y: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of line in relation to the X axis Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.

mm Degr. mm mm Degr.

Page 181: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-181

X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of line with reference to Y axis Positive angle: Line is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Line is rotated clockwise.

mm Degr. mm mm Degr.

L Position spacing mm

N Number of positions

5.2.10 Matrix position pattern

The "Matrix position pattern" function is used to program any number of positions that lie equidistant on several parallel straight lines. If you want to program a rhombus-shaped matrix, enter the angle αX or αY.

Positions >

Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Line/Matrix/Box" softkeys.

Select the “Matrix” position pattern in the "Line/Matrix/Box” parameter field.

Parameters Description Units

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Page 182: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-182 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Z0 X0 Y0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

End face/End face C: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of matrix Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Matrix is rotated clockwise. Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Matrix is rotated clockwise. Shear angle of matrix relative to Y axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Matrix is rotated clockwise. Column spacing in X direction Line spacing in Y direction Number of columns in X direction Number of lines in Y direction

mm mm mm Degr. Degr. Degr. mm mm

X0 Y0 Z0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of matrix Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Shear angle of matrix relative to Y axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Column spacing in Y direction Line spacing in Z direction Number of columns in Y direction Number of lines in Z direction

mm mm mm Degr. Degr. Degr. mm mm

Page 183: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-183

Z0 CP X0 Y0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

End face Y: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of matrix Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Shear angle of matrix relative to Y axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Column spacing in X direction Line spacing in Y direction Number of columns in X direction Number of lines in Y direction

mm Degr. mm mm Degr. Degr. Degr. mm mm

X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of matrix Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Matrix is rotated clockwise. Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Shear angle of matrix relative to X axis Positive angle: Matrix is rotated counter-clockwise Negative angle: Matrix is rotated in CW direction. Column spacing in Y direction Line spacing in Z direction Number of columns in Y direction Number of lines in Z direction

mm Degr. mm mm Degr. Degr. Degr. mm mm

Page 184: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-184 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.2.11 Box position pattern

You can use this function to program any number of positions spaced at an equal distance along on a box. The spacing may be different on both axes. If you want to program a rhombus-shaped box, enter the angle αX or αY.

Positions >

Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Line/Matrix/Box" softkeys.

Select the “Box” position pattern in the "Line/Matrix/Box” parameter field.

Parameters Description Units

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Z0 X0 Y0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

End face/End face C: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of box Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise. Shear angle of box relative to X axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise. Shear angle of box relative to Y axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise. Column spacing in X direction Line spacing in Y direction Number of columns in X direction Number of lines in Y direction

mm mm mm Degr. Degr. Degr. mm mm

Page 185: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-185

X0 Y0 Z0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of box Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Shear angle of box relative to X axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Shear angle of box relative to Y axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Column spacing in Y direction Line spacing in Z direction Number of columns in Y direction Number of lines in Z direction

mm mm mm Degr. Degr. Degr.

mm mm

Z0 CP X0 Y0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

End face Y: Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of box Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Shear angle of box relative to X axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Shear angle of box relative to Y axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Column spacing in X direction Line spacing in Y direction Number of columns in X direction Number of lines in Y direction

mm Degr. mm mm Degr. Degr. Degr.

mm mm

Page 186: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-186 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0 αX αY L1 L2 N1 N2

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point – first position (abs.) Angle of rotation of box Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Shear angle of box relative to X axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Shear angle of box relative to Y axis Positive angle: Box is rotated counterclockwise Negative angle: Box is rotated clockwise Column spacing in Y direction Line spacing in Z direction Number of columns in Y direction Number of lines in Z direction

mm Degr. mm mm Degr. Degr. Degr. mm mm

5.2.12 Full circle position pattern

The "Full circle position pattern" function is used to program any number of positions that lie on a circle with a defined radius.

ShopTurn calculates the distance (angle) between the individual

positions from the number of positions. This distance is always the same.

You can choose whether the tool should approach the next position on a straight line or circular path. The rapid traverse feedrate for positioning on a circular path is defined in a machine date code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. If you approach the next position in a straight line in a circumferential groove, a collision may result.

Approach next positionon a straight line

Approach next positionin a circle

Approach positions on a linear or circular path

Page 187: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-187

Positions >

Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Full/Pitch Circle" softkeys.

Select the “Full circle” position pattern in the "Full/Pitch Circle” parameter field.

Parameters Description Units

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

centered off-center Z0 X0 Y0 α0 R

End face/End face C: Position full circle centered on the end face Position full circle off-center on the end face Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius of full circle

mm mm mm Degr. mm

X0 Z0 α0

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.

mm mm Degr.

centered off-center Z0 CP X0 Y0 C0 L0 α0 R Position

End face Y: Position full circle centered on the end face Position full circle off-center on the end face Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to C0) Y coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to L0) Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to X0) Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to Y0) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius of full circle Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.

mm Degr. mm mm mm mm Degr. mm

Page 188: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-188 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0 R Position

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius of full circle Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.

mm Degr. mm mm Degr. mm

N Number of positions on full circle

5.2.13 Pitch circle position pattern

The "Pitch circle position pattern" function is used to program any number of positions that lie on a pitch circle with a defined radius.

You can specify whether the tool should approach the next position

along a straight line or circular path (for detailed description, see Section "Full circle position pattern").

Positions >

Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Full/Pitch Circle" softkeys.

Select the “Pitch Circle" position sample in the “Full/Pitch Circle” parameter field.

Parameters Description Units

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Page 189: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-189

centered off-center

Z0 X0 Y0 α0 R

End face/End face C: Position full circle centered on the end face Position full circle off-center on the end face

Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) – (only for off-center) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius

mm mm mm Degr. mm

X0 Z0 α0

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction.

mm mm Degr.

centered off-center

Z0 CP X0 Y0 C0 L0 α0 R Position

End face Y: Position full circle centered on the end face. Position full circle off-center on the end face.

Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Positioning angle for machining area X coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to C0) Y coordinate of reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to L0) Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to X0) Reference point (abs.) – (for off-center only) (alternative to Y0) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.

mm Degr. mm mm mm mm Degr. mm

X0 C0 Y0 Z0 α0 R Position

Peripheral surface Y: X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Reference point Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to Y axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Radius Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.

mm Degr. mm mm Degr. mm

α1 Advance angle; after the first hole has been drilled, all further positions are approached at this angle. Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction. Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in clockwise direction.

Degr.

N Number of positions on pitch circle

Page 190: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-190 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.2.14 Including and skipping positions

You can skip any positions in the following position patterns:

• Position pattern line • Position pattern matrix • Position pattern box • Full circle position pattern • Pitch circle position pattern The suppressed positions are skipped during machining.

Including/skipping any

positions

Positions >

Press the "Drilling" and "Positions" softkeys.

or

Press the "Line/Matrix/Box" or "Full/Pitch Circle" softkeys.

Skip pos.>

Press the "Skip pos." softkey.

The "Skip positions" window opens on top of the input form of the position pattern.

The number of the current position is displayed along with its status (on/off) and its coordinates (X, Y). The current position is highlighted by a circle.

Enter the number of the point you want to skip in the "Position" field (in accordance with the machining sequence).

- OR - Position

+

Press the "Position +" softkey to select the next position (in the machining direction).

- OR - Position

- Press the "Position -" softkey to select the previous position

(opposite direction to the machining direction).

Press the "Alternat." softkey to include or skip the current position.

The skipped positions are indicated by an enabled cross in the graphic.

Page 191: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.2 Bore

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-191

Including or skipping all positions at once

Skip all

Press the "Skip all" softkey to skip all positions.

Include all

Press the "Include all" softkey to include all positions again.

5.2.15 Repeating positions

If you want to approach positions that you have already programmed again, you can do this quickly with the function "Repeat position".

ShopTurn automatically allocates a number for each position pattern

and displays it next to the block number in the process plan.

Position pattern 001

Repeat positionpattern 001

Repeat position pattern

Repeat position >

Press the "Drilling", and "Repeat position" softkeys.

Enter the number of the position pattern that you want to repeat.

Page 192: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-192 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.3 Turning If your turning machine has a Y axis and if you want to work with a

position Y ≠ 0, proceed as follows: 1. Select the "Turning" machining level from the "Straight/Circle"

function group (see Section "Selecting the tool and the machining plane").

2. Program a straight line to the required Y position using the "Straight/Circle" function group (see Section "Straight").

3. Program the turning function.

The Y position is retained until you deactivate the "Turning" machining plane.

5.3.1 Roughing cycles

The stock removal cycles are used to remove stock from corners at external and internal contours in the longitudinal or transverse direction.

You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing).

Roughing In roughing applications, paraxial cuts are machined to the programmed finishing allowance. If no final machining allowance is programmed, the workpiece is roughed down to the final contour.

During roughing, ShopTurn reduces the programmed infeed depth D if necessary to make cuts of an equal size. For example, if the overall infeed depth is 10 and you have specified an infeed depth of 3, this would result in cuts of 3, 3, 3 and 1. ShopTurn would reduce the infeed depth to 2.5 to create 4 cuts of equal size.

Whether the tool rounds the contour at the end of each cut by the infeed depth D, to remove residual corners, or is raised immediately, depends on the angle between the contour and the tool cutting edge. The angle above which rounding is performed is stored in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

If the tool does not round the corner at the end of the cut, it is raised by the safety distance or a value specified in machine data at rapid traverse. ShopTurn always observes the lower value, since otherwise stock removal at inside contours, for example, could cause the contour to be damaged.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Page 193: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-193

Finishing Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing. ShopTurn automatically selects and deselects tool radius compensation during finishing.

Longitudinal stock removal from external contour

Paraxial roughing

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and then to the safety clearance.

2. The tool moves to the first infeed depth at rapid traverse. 3. The first cut is made at machining feedrate. 4. The tool rounds the contour at machining feedrate or is raised at

rapid traverse (see "Roughing"). 5. The tool is moved at rapid traverse to the starting point for the next

infeed depth. 6. The next cut is made at machining feedrate. 7. Steps 4 to 6 are repeated until the final depth is reached. 8. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Stock Removal >

Press the "Turning" and "Stock Removal" softkeys.

Select one of the three stock removal cycles with the softkey: Simple stock removal cycle straight line -or- Stock removal cycle straight line with radii or chamfers -or- Stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii or chamfers

Page 194: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-194 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing

Position Roughing position:

Direction Roughing direction (flat or lengthwise) in the coordinate system:

parallel to Z axis (longitudinal)

Outside Inside Outside Inside

parallel to X axis (plane)

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X

Z

X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm

X1 End point ∅ (abs) or end point (inc) mm

Z1 End point (abs or inc) mm

D Infeed depth (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

UX Final machining allowance in X direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

UZ Final machining allowance in Z direction (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

FSn Chamfer (n=1 to 3) alternative to Rn mm

Rn Radius (n=1 to 3) alternative to FSn mm

Xm-Zm-α1-α2 Select which of the parameters Xm, Zm, α1 and α2 should be displayed – (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)

Xm Intermediate point ∅ (abs) or intermediate point (inc) mm

Zm Intermediate point (abs or inc) mm

α1 Angle of first path (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)

Degr.

α2 Angle of second path (only for stock removal cycle with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)

Degr.

Page 195: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-195

5.3.2 Recessing cycles Recessing cycles are used when you want to machine symmetrical

and asymmetrical grooves on any straight contour element.

Z

X

Inclined recess

You can machine outside and inside recesses in the longitudinal or transverse directions. Use the Recess width and Recess depth parameters to determine the shape of the recess. If a recess is wider than the active tool, it is machined in several cuts. The tool is moved by (a maximum of) 80% of the tool width for each recess. You can specify a final machining allowance for the recess base and the flanks; the part is then roughed down to this allowance. The hold time between recessing and retraction is stored in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Approach/retraction Roughing (infeed depth D > 0)

D

D

Safety clearance (1)

(3)

(2)(5)

(4)

(7) (6) (8)

D D + safety clearance

D + safety clearance

Machining steps in recessing

1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and then to the safety clearance.

2. The tool cuts a recess in the center of infeed depth D (1). 3. The tool moves back by D + safety clearance at rapid traverse. 4. The tool cuts a recess next to the first recess of infeed depth 2D

(2).

Page 196: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-196 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5. The tool moves back by D + safety clearance at rapid traverse. 6. The tool cuts alternately in the first and second recess by the

infeed depth 2D until the final depth T1 is reached (3) and (4). Between the individual recess cuts the tool moves back by D + safety clearance at rapid traverse. After the last recess cut, the tool is retracted at rapid traverse to the safety clearance.

7. All further recess cuts are made alternately directly down to the final depth T1 (5) to (8). Between the individual recess cuts the tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Finishing 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and

then to the safety clearance. 2. The tool moves at machining feedrate down one flank and along

the bottom to the center. 3. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse. 4. The tool moves at machining feedrate down the other flank and

along the bottom to the center. 5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Recess >

Press the "Turning" and "Recess" softkeys.

Select one of the three recess cycles with the softkey: Simple recessing cycle -or- Recessing cycle with oblique lines, radii or chamfers -or- Recessing on an incline with oblique lines, radii or chamfers

Page 197: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-197

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing

+ Complete machining

Position Groove position:

Reference point

Reference point:

X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm

B1 Recess width, bottom (incr.) mm

B2 Recess width, top (inc) alternative to B1 – (only for recess with oblique lines and radii)

mm

T1 Recess depth at reference point (abs or inc) mm

T2 Recess depth opposite reference point (abs or inc) alternative to T1 – (only for inclined recess with oblique lines, radii and chamfers)

mm

α0 Angle of the incline on which the recess should be machined – (only for inclined recess with oblique lines, radii and chamfers) The angles can be between -180 and +180°

Longitudinal recess: α0 = 0° ⇒ Parallel to the Z axis Face recess: α0 = 0° ⇒ Parallel to the X axis A positive angle indicates rotation from the X axis to the Z axis

Degr.

α1, α2 Flank angle (not for simple recess cycle) Asymmetrical recesses can be described by separate flank angles. The angles can be between 0 and < 90°.

Degr.

FS Chamfer (n = 1 ... 4) alternative to R (not for simple recess cycle) mm

R Radius (n = 1 ... 4) alternative to FS (not for simple recess cycle) mm

D Infeed depth for 1st cut (inc) – (for roughing only) D=0: 1st cut is made directly to final depth T1 D>0: The 1st and 2nd cuts are made alternately to infeed depth D for improved chip clearance and avoidance of tool breakage.

1 2

34

5D

T1D

All further cuts are made directly to final depth T1. The lateral infeed for the alternate cuts is determined automatically in the cycle. Alternate cutting is not possible if the tool can only reach the recess base at one position.

mm

U Contour-parallel finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX and UZ)

mm

UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

Page 198: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-198 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

N Number of recesses (N=1....65535)

P Distance between recesses (inc) P is not displayed when N=1

mm

5.3.3 Undercut form E and F

The "Undercut form E" and "Undercut form F" are used when you want to turn undercuts to DIN509 in form E or form F.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and

then to the safety clearance. 2. The undercut is made in one cut at machining feedrate, starting

from the flank through to the cross-feed V. 3. The tool moves back to the return plane at rapid traverse.

Undercut form E

Undercut form F

Undercut >

Press the "Turning" and "Undercut" softkeys.

Undercut form E -or-

Undercut form F

Press the "Undercut form E" or "Undercut form F" softkey.

Page 199: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-199

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Position of undercut form E:

Position of undercut form F:

Undercut size Undercut size according to DIN table: Radius/depth, e.g.: E1.0x0.4 (undercut form E) or F0.6x0.3 (undercut form F)

X0 Reference point for dimensioning ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point for dimensioning (abs) mm

X1 Allowance in X direction ∅ (abs) or allowance in X direction (inc) mm

Z1 Allowance in Z direction (abs or inc) – (for undercut form F only) mm

V Cross-feed X ∅ (abs) or cross-feed X (inc) mm

5.3.4 Thread undercuts

The "Thread undercut DIN" or "Thread undercut" functions are used when you want to program thread undercuts to DIN 76 for workpieces with metric ISO threads or freely-definable thread undercuts.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and

then to the safety clearance. 2. The first cut is made at machining feedrate starting from the flank

along the shape of the thread undercut as far as the safety clearance.

3. The tool moves to the next starting position at rapid traverse. 4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the thread undercut is finished. 5. The tool moves back to the return plane at rapid traverse.

During finishing the tool travels as far as cross-feed V.

Thread undercut

Page 200: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-200 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Undercut >

Press the "Turning" and "Undercut" softkeys.

Undercut thread DIN -or-

Undercut thread

Press the "Undercut thread DIN" or "Undercut thread" softkey.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing

+ Complete machining

Position Position of thread undercut:

P Select the pitch from the preset DIN table or enter – (for "Thread undercut DIN" only) mm/rev

X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm

X1 Allowance in X direction ∅ (abs) or Allowance in X direction (inc) – (for "Thread undercut" only)

mm

Z1 Allowance in Z direction (abs or inc) – (for "Thread undercut" only) mm

R1, R2

Radius1, Radius2 (inc) – (for "Thread undercut" only) mm

α Plunge angle Degr.

V Cross-feed X ∅ (abs) or cross-feed X (inc) mm

D Infeed (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

U Contour-parallel finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX and UZ)

mm

UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

Page 201: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-201

5.3.5 Thread cutting

The "Longitudinal thread", "Conical thread" and "Face thread" functions are used when you want to cut external or internal threads with constant or variable pitch.

The thread can be single or multiple.

You define a right or left-hand thread by the direction of spindle rotation and the feed direction.

The infeed is performed automatically with constant infeed depth or constant cutting cross-section.

• With constant infeed depth, the cutting cross-section increases from cut to cut. The final machining allowance is machined in one cut after roughing. A constant infeed depth can produce better cutting conditions at small thread depths.

• With constant cutting cross-section, the cutting pressure remains constant over all roughing cuts and the infeed depth is reduced.

For metric threads (thread pitch P in mm/rev) ShopTurn assigns a value calculated from the thread pitch to the Thread depth K parameter. You can change this value. The default selection must be activated via a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The cycle requires a speed-controlled spindle with a position measuring system.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool moves to the return plane at rapid traverse. 2. Thread with advance:

The tool moves at rapid traverse to the first starting position displaced by the thread advance W. Thread with run-in: The tool moves at rapid traverse to the first starting position displaced by the thread run-in W2.

3. The first cut is made with thread pitch P as far as the thread run-out R.

4. Thread with advance: The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance V and then to the next starting position. Thread with run-in: The tool moves at rapid traverse to the return distance V and then back to the starting position.

5. Steps 3 and 4 are repeated until the thread is finished.

Page 202: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-202 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

6. The tool moves back to the return plane at rapid traverse.

Thread longitudinal

Thread machining can be stopped at any time thanks to the "Quick-raise" function. It ensures that the tool does not damage the thread groove when raised.

Thread >

Press the "Turning" and "Thread" softkeys.

Thread long. -or-

Thread cone

-or- Thread face

Press the "Thread long.", "Thread cone" or "Thread face" softkey.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

P Pitch

mm/rev in/rev Turns/" MODULE

G Pitch change – only for P= mm/rev or inch/rev G = 0 The thread pitch P does not change. G > 0 The thread pitch P increases by the value G per revolution. G < 0 The thread pitch P decreases by the value G per revolution. If the start and end pitch of the thread are known, the pitch change to be programmed can be calculated as follows:

|Pe2

- P2 | G = ⎯⎯⎯⎯⎯ [mm/rev2] 2*Z1

The identifiers have the following meanings: Pe End pitch of thread [mm/rev] P Start pitch of thread [mm/rev] Z1 Thread length [mm] A larger pitch results in a larger distance between the threads on the workpieces.

Page 203: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-203

Linear: Degressive:

Infeed with constant cutting depth (for roughing only) Infeed with constant cutting cross-section (for roughing only)

Machining type Roughing

Finishing

+ Complete machining

Internal thread External thread

Internal thread External thread

X0 Reference point for dimensioning ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point for dimensioning (abs) mm

X1/Xα Thread incline ∅ (abs or inc) – (for conical thread only) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm/degrees

X1 Thread length ∅ (abs) or thread length (inc) – (for face thread only) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

Z1 Thread length (abs or inc) – (only for longitudinal and conical threads) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

W W2 W2=R

Thread advance (inc) The starting point for the thread is the reference point (X0, Z0) displaced by the thread advance distance W. The thread advance can be used if you wish to begin the individual cuts slightly earlier in order to produce a precise start of thread too. Thread run-in (inc) The thread run-in can be used if you cannot approach the thread from the side but have to insert the tool into the material (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft). Thread run-in = thread run-out (inc)

mm mm mm

R Thread run-out (inc) The thread run-out can be used if you wish to retract the tool obliquely at the end of the thread (e.g. lubrication groove on a shaft).

mm

K Thread depth (inc) If the value is calculated by ShopTurn, the field is displayed with a gray background. The value can still be changed, however, in which case the field is displayed with a white background again. The programmed final machining allowance U is subtracted from the preset thread depth K and the remainder is segmented into a number of roughing cuts. The cycle automatically calculates the individual current infeed depths as a function of the specified cut segmentation.

mm

α Infeed slope as angle – alternative to infeed slope as flank α > 0: Infeed along the rear flank α < 0: Infeed along the front flank α = 0: Infeed at right angles to cutting direction If you wish to infeed along the flanks, the absolute value for this parameter must not exceed half the flank angle of the tool.

Degr.

I Infeed slope as flank (inc) – alternative to infeed slope as angle I > 0: Infeed along the rear flank I < 0: Infeed along the front flank

mm

Infeed along the flank Infeed with alternate flanks (alternative) Instead of infeeding along one flank, you can also infeed along alternate flanks to avoid always loading the same tool cutting edge and increase the tool life.

Page 204: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-204 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

α > 0: Start at rear flank α < 0: Start at front flank

AS Number of roughing cuts or first infeed (for roughing only) The respective value is displayed when you switch between the number of roughing cuts and the first infeed.

mm

U Final machining allowance (inc) – (for roughing only) mm

NN Number of non-cuts (finishing only) To improve the surface finish the tool moves along the thread depth K a further NN times.

V Return distance (inc) mm

Q Starting angle offset for single-start threads, i.e. angle that determines the initial cut of the start of thread on the circumference of the turned part (-360°<Q<360°). E.g. Q = 30.0 The initial cut of the thread is at 30°.

Degr.

Multiple thread

The sequence of motions for single and multiple threads is fundamentally the same.

Place the cursor on parameter field "Q".

Press the "Alternat." softkey.

Instead of parameter "Q", the parameters for a multiple thread are displayed.

Parameters Description Units

L Number of threads (max. 6) The threads are distributed evenly across the periphery of the turned part; the first thread is always placed at 0°.

If a multiple thread is to be machined with the first thread not starting at 0°, a cycle must be programmed for each thread and the appropriate starting angle offset must be entered for Q.

A Thread changeover depth (inc) First machine all threads in sequence to thread change depth A, then machine all threads in sequence to depth 2A, etc., until the final depth is reached. A=0: Thread changeover depth is not taken into account, i.e. finish machining each thread before starting the next thread.

mm

N 1 of L threads. N ≠ 0: only machine thread N N = 0: machine all threads

P Start thread P = 1 ... L only when N=0 If P > 1, the previous threads are not taken into account.

Page 205: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-205

5.3.6 Thread re-machining

The "Thread re-machining" function is used if you want to machine a thread again, e.g. if the tool cutting tip breaks while the thread is being cut.

ShopTurn takes into account the angular offset of a thread that occurs

due to reclamping the workpiece.

Jog

Switch the spindle off.

Select "Machine Manual" mode.

Thread the thread cutting tool into the thread groove.

Thread >

Press the "Turning" and "Thread" softkeys.

Sync. Point

Press the "Sync. Point" softkey when the thread cutting tool is exactly in the thread groove.

Press the "OK" softkey.

Enter the value 0 in parameter field "Q" (starting angle offset).

Press the "Accept" softkey.

Move the thread cutting tool back until the reference point (X0, Z0) can be reached without a collision.

Load the program in "Machine Auto" mode (see Section "Starting/stopping program execution").

Place the cursor on the thread cutting program block.

Start search run

Press the "Block search" and "Start search run" softkeys.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

ShopTurn sets all the necessary parameters.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key again.

The new start position is approached and re-machining of the thread starts. The angular offset is taken into account.

Page 206: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-206 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.3.7 Parting

The "Parting" function is used when you want to cut off dynamically balanced parts (e.g. screws, bolts or barrels).

You can program a chamfer or rounding on the edge of the machined

part. You can machine at a constant cutting rate V or speed of rotation S up to a depth X1, from which point the workpiece is machined at a constant speed. From the depth X1, you can also program a reduced feedrate FR or a reduced speed of rotation SR in order to adapt the velocity to the smaller diameter.

Use parameter X2 to enter the final depth that you wish to reach with parting. With barrels, for example, you do not need to part right to the center; it is sufficient to part to slightly more than the wall thickness of the barrel.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool is moved at rapid traverse first to the return plane and then to the safety clearance.

2. The chamfer or radius, if applicable, is made at machining feedrate.

3. Parting down to depth X1 is performed at machining feedrate. 4. Parting is continued down to depth X2 at reduced feedrate FR and

reduced speed SR. 5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

If your turning machine is appropriately set up, you can extend a drawer to accept the cut-off workpiece. Extension of the workpiece drawer must be enabled in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Page 207: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.3 Turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-207

Part >

Press the "Turning" and "Part" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

SV Speed limit for constant cutting rate (with V only) rpm

X0 Reference point ∅ (abs) mm

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm

FS Chamfer alternative to R mm

R Radius alternative to FS mm

X1 Depth for feedrate reduction ∅ (abs) or depth for feedrate reduction (inc) mm

FR Reduced feedrate mm/rev

SR Reduced speed of rotation rpm

Parts gripper Yes: Extend workpiece drawer No: Do not extend workpiece drawer

XM Depth to which the drawer must be extended (abs) mm

X2 Final depth ∅ (abs) or final depth (inc) mm

Page 208: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-208 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.4 Contour turning The "Contour turning" function is used when you want to create and

cut complex contours. A contour comprises separate contour elements, whereby at least two and up to 250 elements result in a defined contour. You can also program chamfers, radii, undercuts or tangential transitions between the contour elements.

The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of

the individual contour elements taking into account the geometrical relationships, which allows you to enter incompletely dimensioned elements.

When you machine the contour, you can make allowance for a blank contour which must be entered before the finished part contour. You then choose one of the following machining technologies: • Stock removal • Grooving • Plunge-turning

You can rough, remove residual material and finish for each of the three technologies above.

For example, the programming procedure for stock removal is as follows:

1. Enter unmachined-part contour If you want to base cutting of the contour on a contour of an unmachined part (instead of a cylinder or allowance), you have to define the contour of the unmachined part before you define the finished-part contour. You build up the unmachined-part contour gradually from a series of different contour elements.

2. Enter finished-part contour You build up the finished-part contour gradually from a series of different contour elements.

3. Stock removal towards the contour (roughing) The contour is machined in the longitudinal or transverse directions or parallel to the contour.

4. Remove residual material (roughing) During stock removal, ShopTurn automatically detects residual material that has been left. A suitable tool will allow you to remove this without having to machine the contour again.

5. Stock removal towards the contour (finishing) If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour is machined again.

Page 209: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-209

All machining steps involved in the contour turning operation are shown in the process plan in square brackets.

Example: Cut a contour

If your turning machine has a Y axis and if you want to work with a position Y ≠ 0, proceed as follows: 1. Select the "Turning" machining level from the "Straight/Circle"

function group (see Section "Selecting the tool and the machining plane").

2. Program a straight line to the required Y position using the "Straight/Circle" function group (see Section "Straight").

3. Program the turning function.

The Y position is retained until you deactivate the "Turning" machining plane.

5.4.1 Representation of the contour

ShopTurn presents a contour as one program block in the process plan. If you open this block, the individual contour elements are listed symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.

Symbolic representation The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent

to the graphics window. They appear in the order in which they were entered.

Contour element Icon Meaning

Start point Start point of contour

Straight line up Straight line down

Straight line in 90° matrix Straight line in 90° matrix

Page 210: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-210 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Straight line left Straight line right

Straight line in 90° matrix Straight line in 90° matrix

Straight line in any direction

Straight line with any gradient

Arc Right Arc Left

Circle Circle

Pole

Straight diagonal or circle in polar coordinates

Finish contour END End of contour definition The different color of the symbols indicates their status:

Foreground Background Meaning - Red Cursor on new element Black Red Cursor on current element Black White Normal element Red White Element not currently evaluated

(element will only be evaluated when it is selected with the cursor)

Page 211: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-211

Graphic representation The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line graphics while the contour elements are being entered.

Graphical presentation of the contour during contour turning

When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in different line styles and colors: • Black: Programmed contour • Orange: Current contour element • Green dashed: Alternative element • Blue dotted: Partially defined element

The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to match the complete contour.

The symmetry axis of the contour is represented as a line with dots and dashes.

The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics window.

Page 212: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-212 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.4.2 Creating a new contour

For each contour that you want to cut, you must create a new contour.

The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point.

ShopTurn automatically defines the end of the contour. You have the option of beginning the contour with a transition element to the blank. You can also enter any additional commands (up to 40 characters) in G code format for the start point.

Additional commands You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, with additional G code commands (see also Section "Create exact contour transitions" in Chapter "Create contour elements”). However, make sure that the additional commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour. Therefore do not use any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.

If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour, you can copy the existing one, rename it and just alter selected contour elements. In contrast, if you want to use an identical contour at another place in the program, you must not rename the copy. Changes to the one contour will then automatically be applied to the other contour with the same name.

New contour >

Press the "Cont. turn." and "New contour" softkeys.

Enter a name for the new contour. The contour name must be unique.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The input form for the start point of the contour appears.

Enter the parameters.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

Enter the individual contour elements (see Sec. "Creating contour elements").

Page 213: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-213

Parameters Description Units

X Start point in X direction ∅ (abs.) mm Z Start point in Z direction (abs.) mm FS: Chamfer as transition element at contour start

R: Radius as transition element at contour start FS=0 or R=0: No transition element

mm mm

Transition to contour start

Location of transition element relative to contour start point

Additional command

Additional G code commands; see above

5.4.3 Creating contour elements

When you have created a new contour and specified the start point, you can define the individual elements that the contour comprises.

The following contour elements are available for the definition of a

contour:

• Straight vertical line

• Straight horizontal line

• Diagonal line

• Circle/arc

For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate screen form. Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain the parameters.

If you leave certain fields blank, ShopTurn assumes that the values are unknown and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.

Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely necessary for a contour. In such a case, try entering less parameters and allowing ShopTurn to calculate as many parameters as possible.

Contour transition elements

As the transition element between two contour elements, you can select a radius or a chamfer or, in the case of linear contour elements, an undercut. The transition is always appended to the end of a contour element. The contour transition is selected in the parameterization screen form of the contour element.

Page 214: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-214 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an intersection between two successive elements which can be calculated from input values. Otherwise you must use the "Straight/Circle" contour elements.

The contour end is an exception. Although there is no interface to another element, you can still define a radius or a chamfer as a transition element to the blank.

Additional commands

You can enter additional commands in the form of G code for each contour element. You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the extended parameterization screen form ("All parameters" softkey).

You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, using additional G code commands. However, make sure that the additional commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour. Therefore do not use any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.

Additional functions

The following additional functions are available for programming a contour:

• Tangent to preceding element You can program the transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

• Dialog selection If two different possible contours result from the parameters entered thus far, one of the options must be selected.

• Close contour From the current position, you can close the contour with a straight line to the starting point.

Create exact contour

transitions The contour is finished in continuous-path mode (G64). As a result, contour transitions such as corners, chamfers or radii may not be machined precisely.

To prevent this you have a choice of two different programming options (using an additional command or programming a special feedrate for the transition element).

• Additional command For the contour illustrated below, first program the vertical straight line and enter the additional command "G9" (Non-modal exact stop) for the parameter. Then program the horizontal straight line.The corner will be machined exactly, since the feedrate at the end of the vertical straight line is briefly zero.

Page 215: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-215

G64

G9

Machining direction

Workpiece

Finishing contour edges

• Feedrate for transition element If you have chosen a chamfer or a radius as the transition element, enter a reduced feedrate in the "FRC" parameter. The slower machining rate means that the transition element is turned more accurately.

Creating a contour

element

...

Select a contour element via softkey.

Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the input form (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to next element, angle of lead, etc.).

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The contour element is added to the contour.

Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The programmed contour is transferred to the machining plan.

All parameters

If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements, e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" softkey.

Tangent to preceding

element When entering data for a contour element you can program the transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

Tangent to prec. elem.

Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." softkey.

Page 216: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-216 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

The angle to the preceding element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential" selection appears in the parameter input field.

Selecting a dialog When entering data for a contour element, there may be two different contour options, one of which you have to select.

Select dialog

Press the "Select dialog" softkey to switch between the two different contour options.

The selected contour appears in the graphics window as a solid black line and the alternative contour appears as a dashed green line.

Close contour

A contour always has to be closed. If you do not wish to create all contour elements from starting point to starting point, you can close the contour from the current position to the starting point.

Close contour

Press the "Close contour" softkey.

ShopTurn inserts a straight line between your current position and the starting point.

Transition element at contour end

When you have created all contour elements, you can still define a transition element to the blank at the end of the contour before you transfer the contour to the process plan.

Place the cursor on the last contour element.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The associated input screen form opens.

Enter a transition element.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

Place the cursor on the contour end .

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The associated input screen form opens.

Choose the position you require for the transition element.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

A transition element to the blank is added at the end of the contour.

Parameters Description for contour element "straight line" Units

X Target position in the X direction ∅ (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

Z Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

Page 217: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-217

L Length of straight line mm

α1 Angle of lead with reference to the Z axis Degr.

α2 Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

Degr.

FB Feedrate for contour element "Straight line" mm/rev

Transition to next element

FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element R: Radius as transition element to next contour element Undercut: Undercut (thread, DIN thread, Form E or Form F) as transition element to the next contour element

mm mm

Z1 Length 1 (inc.) – (thread only) mm

Z2 Length 2 (inc.) – (thread only) mm

R1 Radius 1 (inc.) – (thread only) mm

R2 Radius 2 (inc.) – (thread only) mm

T Depth (inc.) – (thread only) mm

P Pitch (for DIN thread only) mm/rev

α Insertion angle (for DIN thread only) Degr.

Undercut size Undercut size acc. to DIN table (for forms E and F only): Radius/depth, e.g.: E1.0x0.4 (undercut form E) or F0.6x0.3 (undercut form F)

FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev

CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm

Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)

Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

Additional command

Additional G code commands; see above

Parameters Description for contour element "circle" Units

Direction of rotation Clockwise rotation

Counterclockwise rotation

R Radius of circle mm

X Target position in the X direction ∅ (abs.) or target position in the X direction (inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

Z Target position in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

I Position of circle center point in X direction ∅ (abs.) or Position of circle center point in X direction (inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

K Position of circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm

α1 Start angle with reference to Z axis Degr.

α2 Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

Degr.

β1 End angle with reference to Z axis Degr.

β2 Angle of aperture of circle Degr.

FB Feedrate for circle contour element mm/rev

Page 218: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-218 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Transition to next element

FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element R: Radius as transition element to next contour element

mm mm

FRC Feedrate for transition element chamfer or radius mm/rev

CA Allowance for subsequent grinding mm

Grinding allowance to right of contour (viewed from starting point)

Grinding allowance to left of contour (viewed from starting point)

Additional command

Additional G code commands; see above

Parameters Description for end of contour Units

Transition to contour end

Location of transition element relative to contour end point

5.4.4 Changing a contour

You can change a previously created contour later. Individual contour elements can be • appended, • modified, • inserted or • deleted.

If your program contains two contours of the same name, changes to

the one contour are automatically applied to the second contour with the same name.

Append contour element

Select the contour in the machining plan.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The individual contour elements are listed.

Place the cursor on the last element before the end of the contour.

...

Select the required contour element via softkey.

Enter the parameters in the input screen.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The required contour element is appended to the contour.

Modifying contour element

Select the contour in the machining plan.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

Page 219: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-219

The individual contour elements are listed.

Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to modify.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The associated input form is opened and an enlarged view of the selected element appears in the programming graphics.

Enter the desired changes.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The current values for the contour element are accepted and the change is immediately visible in the programming graphics.

Changing dialog selection

If when you entered the data for a contour element there were two different contour options and you chose the wrong one, you can alter your choice afterwards. If the contour is unique as a result of other parameters, the system will not prompt you to make a selection.

Open the input screen form for the contour element.

Change selection

Press the "Change selection" softkey.

The two selection options appear again.

Select dialog

Press the "Select dialog" softkey to switch between the two different contour options.

Accept dialog

Press the "Accept dialog" softkey.

The chosen alternative is accepted.

Insert a contour element

Select the contour in the machining plan.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The individual contour elements are listed.

Place the cursor on the contour element after which the new element is to be inserted.

...

Select a new contour element via softkey.

Enter the parameters in the input screen.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The contour element is inserted in the contour. Subsequent contour elements are updated automatically according to the new contour status.

Page 220: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-220 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Delete contour element

Select the contour in the machining plan.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The individual contour elements are listed.

Place the cursor on the contour element that you want to delete.

Delete element

Press the "Delete element" softkey.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The selected contour element is deleted.

5.4.5 Stock removal

You can use the "Stock removal" function to machine contours in the longitudinal or transverse direction or parallel to the contour.

Stock removal

Before you can machine the contour, you must enter the contour.

Blank For stock removal, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined as a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any unmachined-part contour. You must define an unmachined-part contour as a separate closed contour in advance of the finished-part contour.

If the blank and finished-part contours do not intersect, ShopTurn defines the boundary between blank and finished part.

If the angle between the straight line and the Z axis is greater than 1°, the boundary is placed at the top and if the angle is less than or equal to 1°, the boundary is placed at the side.

Page 221: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-221

Contour finish

Unmachined part

Finished part

α

α > 1: Finish to top

X

Z

α =45°

Boundary between unmachined and finished parts at the top

Contour finish

Unmachined part

Finished part

α

α ≤ 1: Finish to side

X

Z

α = − 45°

Boundary between unmachined and finished parts at the side

Alternating cutting depth

Instead of working with constant cutting depth D, you can use an alternating cutting depth to vary the load on the tool edge and increase the tool life.

First cut

Second cut

D

D

D - 10%

D - 10%

Alternating cutting depth

The percentage for alternating cutting depth is stored in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Page 222: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-222 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Rounding at the contour

In order to avoid residual corners during roughing, you can enable the "Always round the contour" function. This will remove the protrusions that are always left at the end with each cut (due to the cut geometry).The "Do not round contour" setting accelerates machining of the contour. However, any resulting residual corners will not be recognized or machined. Thus, it is imperative that you check the behavior before machining using the simulation.

When set to "automatic", rounding is always performed if the angle between the cutting edge and the contour exceeds a certain value. The angle is set in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Cut segmentation

To avoid the occurrence of very thin cuts in cut segmentation due to contour edges, you can align the cut segmentation to the contour edges. During machining the contour is then divided by the edges into individual sections and cut segmentation is performed separately for each section.

Set machining area limits

If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected. You can define between 1 and 4 limit lines.

Feed interruption

To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machining, you can program a feed interruption. Parameter DI specifies the distance after which the feed interruption should occur. The interruption time or retraction distance is defined in machine data.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Machining type You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing). During contour roughing, parallel cuts of maximum infeed depth are created. Roughing is performed up to the final machining allowance programmed.

You can also specify a compensation allowance U1 for finishing operations, which allows you to either finish several times (positive allowance) or to shrink the contour (negative allowance). Finishing is performed in the same direction as roughing.

Page 223: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-223

If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained on the second call. If you want to finish a contour more than once, you must program the machining cycle a corresponding number of times.

Stock removal

Press the "Cont. turn." and "Stock removal" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing

Stock removal direction

Stock removal direction: Longitudinal, transverse or parallel to contour.

Machining side Machining side: For stock removal direction longitudinal and parallel to contour: external or internal For stock removal direction transverse and parallel to contour: end face or rear side

Machining direction

Machining direction: ↑: From inside to outside ↓: From outside to inside ←: From end face to rear side →: From rear side to end face The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction and choice of tool.

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm

DX Infeed depth for roughing in X direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D only)

mm

DZ Infeed depth for roughing in Z direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D only)

mm

Do not round contour at end of cut

Always round contour at end of cut

Round contour automatically at end of cut

Equal cut segmentation

Align cut segmentation to edges

Constant cutting depth

Alternating cutting depth - (only with align cut segmentation to edges)

Page 224: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-224 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX and UZ)

mm

UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

Stock allowance

Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)

U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only) Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance

mm

DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm

BL Description of unmachined part: Cylinder. allowance or contour (only for roughing)

XD Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction ∅ (abs.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction (inc.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance based on contour in X direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)

mm

ZD Allowance or cylinder dimension in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance based on contour in Z direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)

mm

Set machining area limits

Limit machining area or not

XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm

XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm

Relief cuts Machine relief cut elements or not

FR Insertion feedrate relief cut mm/rev

5.4.6 Removal of residual material

The "Residual material" function is used when you want to machine the material that remained after stock removal along the contour.

During stock removal along the contour, ShopTurn automatically

detects any residual material and generates an updated blank contour. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The "Residual material" function allows you to remove unwanted material with a suitable tool.

The "Residual material" function is a software option.

Remove resid.

Press the "Cont. turn." and "Remove resid." softkeys.

Page 225: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-225

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks". Machining

type

Roughing

Finishing

Stock removal direction

Stock removal direction: longitudinal, transverse or parallel to contour.

Machining side Machining side: For stock removal direction longitudinal and parallel to contour: external or internal For stock removal direction transverse and parallel to contour: end face or rear side

Machining direction

Machining direction: ↑: From inside to outside ↓: From outside to inside ←: From end face to rear side →: From rear side to end face The machining direction depends on the stock removal direction.

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm DX Infeed depth for roughing in X direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D

only) mm

DZ Infeed depth for roughing in Z direction (inc) – (for parallel to contour alternative to D only)

mm

Do not round contour at end of cut

Always round contour at end of cut

Round contour automatically at end of cut

Equal cut segmentation

Align cut segmentation to edges

Constant cutting depth

Alternating cutting depth - (only with align cut segmentation to edges)

U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX and UZ)

mm

UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm Stock

allowance Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)

U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only) Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance

mm

DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm Set machining

area limits Limit machining area or not

XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm Relief cuts Machine relief cut elements or not FR Insertion feedrate relief cut mm/rev

Page 226: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-226 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.4.7 Grooving

The "Grooving" function is used to machine grooves of any shape.

Grooving

Before you program the groove, you must define the groove contour.

If a recess is wider than the active tool, it is machined in several cuts. The tool is moved by (a maximum of) 80% of the tool width for each recess.

Blank For grooving, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined as a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any unmachined-part contour.

Set machining area limits

If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected.

Feed interruption To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machining,you can program a feed interruption.

Machining type You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing).

For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal" in each case.

Page 227: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-227

Grooving

Press the "Cont. turn." and "Grooving" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing

Stock removal direction

Stock removal direction: Longitudinal or transverse

Machining side Machining side: For stock removal in longitudinal direction: external or internal For stock removal in transverse direction: end face or rear side

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm

XDA 1st grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm

XDB 2nd grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm

U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX and UZ)

mm

UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

Stock allowance

Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)

U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only) Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance

mm

DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm

BL Description of unmachined part: Cylinder. allowance or contour (only for roughing)

XD Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction ∅ (abs.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction (inc.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance based on contour in X direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)

mm

ZD Allowance or cylinder dimension in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance based on contour in Z direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)

mm

Set machining area limits

Limit machining area or not

XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm

XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm

N Number of grooves

Page 228: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-228 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.4.8 Grooving residual material

The "Grooving residual material" function is used when you want to machine the material that remained after grooving along the contour.

During grooving along the contour, ShopTurn automatically detects

any residual material and generates an updated blank contour. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The "Grooving residual material" function allows you to remove unwanted material with a suitable tool.

The "Grooving residual material" function is a software option.

Grooving resid.

Press the "Cont. turn." and "Grooving resid." softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing

Stock removal direction

Stock removal direction: Longitudinal or transverse

Machining side Machining side: For stock removal in longitudinal direction: external or internal For stock removal in transverse direction: end face or rear side

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm XDA 1st grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm XDB 2nd grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX

and UZ) mm

UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm Stock

allowance Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)

U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only) Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance

mm

DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm Set machining

area limits Limit machining area or not

XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm N Number of grooves

Page 229: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-229

5.4.9 Plunge-turning

The "Plunge-turning" function is used to machine grooves of any shape. In contrast to grooving, the plunge-turning function removes material on the sides after the groove has been machined in order to reduce machining time. Unlike grooving, the plunge-turning function allows you to machine contours that the tool must enter vertically.

Plunge-turning

You will need a special tool for plunge-turning. Before you program the "Plunge-turning" cycle, you must define the contour.

Blank With plunge-turning, ShopTurn can start from a blank that is defined

as a cylinder, an allowance on the finished-part contour or any unmachined-part contour.

Set machining area limits

If, for example, you want to machine a certain area of the contour with a different tool, you can set machining area limits so that machining only takes place in the area of the contour you have selected.

Feed interruption To prevent the occurrence of excessively long chips during machining, you can program a feed interruption.

Machining type You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing).

For more detailed information, please refer to section "Stock removal" in each case.

Page 230: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-230 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Plunge-turning

Press the "Cont. turn." and "Plunge-turning" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

FX Feed in X direction mm/rev

FZ Feed in Z direction mm/rev

Machining type Roughing

Finishing

Stock removal direction

Stock removal direction: Longitudinal or transverse

Machining side Machining side: For stock removal in longitudinal direction: external or internal For stock removal in transverse direction: end face or rear side

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm

XDA 1st grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm

XDB 2nd grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm

U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX and UZ)

mm

UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

Stock allowance

Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)

U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only) Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance

mm

DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm

BL Description of unmachined part: Cylinder. allowance or contour (only for roughing)

XD Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction ∅ (abs.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance or cylinder dimension in X direction (inc.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance based on contour in X direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)

mm

ZD Allowance or cylinder dimension in Z direction (abs. or inc.) – (for cylinder only) Allowance based on contour in Z direction (inc.) – (for allowance only)

mm

Set machining area limits

Limit machining area or not

XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm

XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm

N Number of grooves

Page 231: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-231

5.4.10 Plunge-turning residual material

The "Plunge-turning residual material" function is used when you want to machine the material that remained after grooving along the contour.

During plunge-turning, ShopTurn automatically detects any residual

material and generates an updated blank contour. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material. The "Plunge-turning residual material" function allows you to remove unwanted material with a suitable tool.

The "Plunge-turning residual material" function is a software option.

Plunge-turn resid.

Press the "Cont. turn." and "Plunge-turn. resid." softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

FX Feed in X direction mm/rev

FZ Feed in Z direction mm/rev

Machining type Roughing

Finishing

Stock removal direction

Stock removal direction: Longitudinal or transverse

Machining side Machining side: For stock removal in longitudinal direction: external or internal For stock removal in transverse direction: end face or rear side

D Infeed depth for roughing (inc.) mm

XDA 1st grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm

XDB 2nd grooving limit tool (inc) – (end face or rear face only) mm

U Finishing allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to UX and UZ)

mm

UX Finishing allowance in X direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

UZ Finishing allowance in Z direction (inc) – (roughing only) – (alternative to U) mm

Stock allowance

Compensation allowance for contour or not – (finishing only)

Page 232: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.4 Contour turning

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-232 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

U1 Compensation allowance in X and Z direction (inc) – (with allowance only) Positive value: Compensation allowance is not removed Negative value: Compensation allowance is removed in addition to finishing allowance

mm

DI Distance after which feed interruption occurs - (only for roughing) mm

Set machining area limits

Limit machining area or not

XA Limit X (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm

XB Limit X (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZA Limit Z (abs) – (with limited machining area only) mm

ZB Limit Z (abs or inc) – (with limited machining area only) mm

N Number of grooves

Page 233: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-233

5.5 Milling The functions explained in this section are used when you want to mill

simple geometric shapes on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following geometric shapes are available for milling:

• Rectangular pocket • Circular pocket • Rectangular spigot • Circular spigot • Longitudinal slot • Circumferential slot • Multiple edge • Engraving

To mill pockets, spigots or slots at one position only, enter the position in the technology block. If you want to mill these shapes at more than one position, however, you must program the positions or position pattern in a separate block after the technology block.

The technology block and the positioning block are shown in the process plan in square brackets.

Example: Milling

Clamp spindle When milling, it can be useful, for example, during vertical insertion into the material, to clamp the spindle to avoid spindle distortions. The "Clamp spindle" function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.The machine manufacturer also specifies whether ShopTurn will clamp the spindle automatically if this would facilitate machining, or if you can decide the types of machining for which the spindle should be clamped.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Page 234: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-234 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

If you are to decide the types of machining for which the spindle is to be clamped, the following applies: You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping is automaticallyreleased after insertion. When machining in planes End face Y and Peripheral surface Y, on the other hand, clamping is modal, i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is changed or clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" "Tool" menu.

5.5.1 Rectangular pocket

The "Rectangular pocket" function is used when you want to mill any rectangular pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following machining methods are available:

• Mill rectangular pocket from solid material. • Pre-drill rectangular pocket in the center first if, for example, the

milling cutter does not cut across center (program the drilling, rectangular pocket and position program blocks one after another).

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.

2. The tool is inserted into the material according to the chosen strategy.

3. The pocket is always machined with the chosen machining type from inside out.

4. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Page 235: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-235

Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the rectangular pocket as follows: • Roughing

In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the pocket are machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.

• Finishing In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The pocket edge is approached on the quadrant which joins the corner radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from the center out.

• Edge finishing Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except that the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.

• Chamfer Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the pocket.

Pocket >

Rectangu-lar pocket

Press the "Milling", "Pocket" and "Rectangular pocket" softkeys.

If you want to mill a chamfer and the corner radius was R = 0 during finishing, you must specify the radius of the finishing milling tool in parameter R during chamfering.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing Finishing on the edge

Chamfer

Single pos. Pos. pattern

Mill rectangular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several rectangular pockets in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).

Page 236: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-236 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket. Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Pocket depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm %

mm mm mm mm mm

Y0 C0 Z0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket. Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Pocket depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm Degr. mm mm mm mm %

mm mm mm mm mm

CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Pocket depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degr. mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm mm

Page 237: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-237

C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular pocket. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point (abs) Pocket depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degr. mm mm mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm mm

W Pocket width mm

L Pocket length mm

R Radius at pocket corners mm

α0 Angle of rotation of pocket Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis

Degr.

Insertion

Insertion strategy Helical: Insertion along helical path The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius and depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle motion is executed in the plane. Oscillating: Insertion with oscillation along center axis of pocket The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed. If the depth has been reached, the path is executed again in the plane without depth infeed. Center: Insert vertically in center of pocket The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket. Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center or if the pocket has been predrilled.

EP Maximum insertion pitch (for helical insertion only) The helix gradient might be smaller in some geometric conditions.

mm/rev

ER Insertion radius (only for helical insertion) The radius must not be larger than the cutter radius, otherwise material will remain. Also make sure the pocket is not violated.

mm

EW Insertion angle (for insertion with oscillation only) Degr.

FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min

FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min

Page 238: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-238 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.5.2 Circular pocket

The "Circular pocket" function is used when you want to mill any circular pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following machining variants are available:

• Mill circular pocket from solid material. • Pre-drill circular pocket in the center first if, for example, the

milling cutter does not cut across center (program the drilling, circular pocket and position program blocks one after another).

For milling with the “circular pocket” function two methods are available, the plane-by-plane method and the helical method.

Plane-by-plane machining In plane-by-plane machining of the pocket, the material is removed horizontally layer by layer.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.

2. The tool is inserted into the material according to the chosen strategy.

3. The pocket is always machined with the chosen machining type from inside out.

4. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the circular pocket as follows: • Roughing

In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the pocket are machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.

• Finishing In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The pocket edge is approached on the quadrant, which joins the pocket radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from the center out.

• Edge finishing Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except that the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.

• Chamfer Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the pocket.

Page 239: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-239

Helical machining In helical reaming, the material is removed down to pocket depth in a helical movement.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the pocket at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.

2. Infeed to the first machining diameter. 3. The pocket is machined with the selected machining method to

pocket depth. 4. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the circular pocket as follows: • Roughing

During roughing, the pocket is machined downward with helical movements. A full circle is effected down to pocket depth to remove the residual material. The tool is retracted from the edge and base of the pocket in a quadrant and retracted with rapid traverse to a safety clearance. This operation is repeated in layers from inside out until the pocket has been completely machined.

• Finishing During finishing, the edge is first machined down to the base with a helical movement. A full circle is effected down to pocket depth to remove the residual material. The base is milled from outside in a spiral movement. The tool is retracted from the center of the pocket to a safety clearance.

• Finishing the edge During finishing the edge, the edge is first machined down to the base with a helical movement. A full circle is effected down to pocket depth to remove the residual material. The tool is retracted from the edge and base of the pocket in a quadrant and retracted with rapid traverse to a safety clearance.

Pocket >

Circular pocket

Press the "Milling", "Pocket" and "Circular pocket" softkeys.

Page 240: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-240 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing

Finishing on the edge Chamfering (only plane by plane)

Plane-by-plane helical

Machine pocket plane by plane Machine pocket helically

Single pos. Pos. pattern

Mill circular pocket at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several circular pockets in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket. Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Pocket depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Plane by plane: Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Helical: Maximum pitch of the helix Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm/rev mm mm mm mm

Y0 C0 Z0 X0 X1 DYZ

Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket. Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Pocket depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only)

mm Degr. mm mm mm mm %

Page 241: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-241

DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm mm

CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Pocket depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm mm

C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the circular pocket. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point (abs) Pocket depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (pocket edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (pocket base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degr. mm mm mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm mm

∅ Diameter of pocket mm Insertion

Insertion strategy (only for “plane by plane” machining variant) Helical: Insertion in a helical path The cutter center point traverses along the helical path determined by the radius and depth per revolution. If the depth for one infeed has been reached, a full circle motion is executed in the plane. Feedrate: Machining feed Center: Vertical insertion at center of pocket The tool executes the calculated depth infeed vertically in the center of the pocket. Feedrate: Infeed rate as programmed under FZ Note: Vertical insertion into the pocket center can be used only if the tool can cut across center or if the workpiece has been predrilled.

Page 242: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-242 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

EP Maximum insertion pitch (for helical insertion only) The helix gradient might be smaller in some geometric conditions.

mm/rev

ER Insertion radius (for helical insertion only) The radius cannot be any larger than the cutter radius; otherwise, material will remain. Also make sure the pocket is not violated.

mm

FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min

FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min

5.5.3 Rectangular spigot

The "Rectangular spigot" function is used when you want to mill various rectangular spigots.

You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner

radius:

Rectangular spigot

In addition to the required rectangular spigot, you must also define a blank spigot, i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. The blank spigot must not overlap anyadjacent blank spigots. ShopTurn automatically centers the finished spigot within the blank.

The spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine the spigot using multiple infeeds, you must program the "Rectangular spigot" function several times with a reducing finishing allowance.

Page 243: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-243

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety clearance. The starting point is on the positive X axis rotated through α0.

2. The tool traverses the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at machining feed. The tool first executes infeed at machining depth and then moves in the plane. The spigot is machined as a function of the programmed machining direction (climb/conventional) in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool retracts from the contour in the plane in a semicircle and then infeeds to the next machining depth.

4. The spigot is approached again in a semicircle and circumnavigated once. This process is repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.

5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

X

Y

Retractingcontour Approaching

contour

Tool

Rectangularspigot

Approaching and retracting from the rectangular spigot in a semicircle Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the rectangular spigot

as follows: • Roughing

Roughing involves moving round the spigot until the programmed finishing allowance has been reached.

• Finishing If you have programmed a finishing allowance, the spigot is moved round until depth Z1 is reached.

• Chamfer Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the rectangular spigot.

Page 244: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-244 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Spigot >

Rectangu-lar spigot

Press the "Milling", "Spigot" and "Rectangular spigot" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 6 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing Chamfer

Single pos. Pos. pattern

Mill rectangular spigot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several rectangular spigots in a positioning pattern (full circle or matrix).

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot. Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Spigot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot depth) – (for chamfer only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

Page 245: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-245

CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Spigot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degr. mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the rectangular spigot. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point in X direction (abs.) Spigot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degr. mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

W Width of finished-part spigot mm L Length of finished-part spigot mm R Radius at edges of spigot (corner radius) mm α0 Angle of rotation of spigot

Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis

Degr.

W1 Width of specified blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm L1 Length of specified blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm

Page 246: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-246 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.5.4 Circular spigot

The "Circular spigot" function is used when you want to mill a circular spigot.

In addition to the required circular spigot, you must also define a blank

spigot, i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. The blank spigot must not overlap any adjacent blank spigots. ShopTurn automatically centers the finished spigot within the blank.

The spigot is machined using only one infeed. If you want to machine the spigot using multiple infeeds, you must program the "Circular spigot" function several times with a reducing finishing allowance.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety clearance. The starting point is always on the positive X axis.

2. The tool traverses the spigot contour sideways in a semicircle at machining feed. The tool first executes infeed at machining depth and then moves in the plane. The spigot is machined as a function of the programmed machining direction (climb/conventional) in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

3. When the spigot has been circumnavigated once, the tool retracts from the contour in the plane in a semicircle and then infeeds to the next machining depth.

4. The spigot is approached again in a semicircle and circumnavigated once. This process is repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.

5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Page 247: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-247

X

Y

Retractingcontour Approaching

contour

Tool

Circularspigot

Approaching and retracting from the circular spigot in a semicircle

Spigot >

Circular spigot

Press the "Milling", "Spigot" and "Circular spigot" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 6 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing Chamfer

Single pos. Pos. pattern

Mill circular spigot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several circular spigots in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY UZ

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot. Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Spigot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only)

mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm mm mm

Page 248: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-248 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

FS ZFS

Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm

CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Spigot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degr. mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the circular spigot. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point in X direction (abs.) Spigot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (spigot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (spigot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degr. mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

∅ Diameter of finished-part spigot mm ∅1 Diameter of blank spigot (important for determining approach position) mm

Page 249: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-249

5.5.5 Longitudinal slot

The "Longitudinal slot" function is used when you want to mill a longitudinal slot on the end face or peripheral surface.

The following machining methods are available:

• Mill longitudinal slot from solid material. • Pre-drill longitudinal slot in the center first if, for example, the

milling cutter does not cut across center (program the drilling, rectangular pocket and position program blocks one after another).

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the slot at rapid traverse at the height of the return plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.

2. The tool is inserted into the material according to the chosen strategy.

3. The longitudinal slot is always machined with the chosen machining type from inside out.

4. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the longitudinal slot as follows: • Roughing

In "Roughing" mode, the individual planes of the slot are machined one after another from inside out until depth Z1 or X1 is reached.

• Finishing In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first. The slot edge is approached on the quadrant, which joins the corner radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from the center out.

• Edge finishing Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except that the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.

• Chamfer Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the longitudinal slot.

Page 250: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-250 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Slot >

Long. slot

Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Long. slot" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select position: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type Roughing

Finishing

Finish edge Chamfer

Single pos. Pos. pattern

Mill longitudinal slot at the programmed position (X0, Y0, Z0, L0, C0, CP). Mill several longitudinal slots in a positioning pattern (e.g. full circle or matrix).

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

FS ZFS

Single position End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot. Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Slot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – (for roughing and finishing only) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm mm

Y0 C0 Z0 X0 X1

Single position Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot. Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Slot depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing)

mm Degr. mm mm mm

Page 251: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-251

DYZ DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – (for roughing and finishing only) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm % mm mm mm mm mm

CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ FS ZFS

Single position End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Slot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – (for roughing and finishing only) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degr. mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm mm

C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX FS ZFS

Single position Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the longitudinal slot. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point (abs) Slot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) – (for roughing and finishing only) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (slot base) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degr. mm mm mm mm mm % mm mm mm mm mm

W Slot width mm

L Slot length mm

α0 Angle of rotation of slot Face: α0 refers to the X axis or to the position of C0 with a polar reference point Peripheral surface: α0 refers to the Y axis

Degr.

Page 252: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-252 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Insertion Insertion strategy

Central: Vertical insertion at center of slot The tool executes the depth infeed vertically in the center of the slot. Note: This setting can be used only if the cutter can cut across center. Oscillating: Insert with oscillation along center axis of longitudinal slot: The cutter center point oscillates along a linear path until it reaches the depth infeed. If the depth has been reached, the path is executed again in the plane without depth infeed.

mm

EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degr.

FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min

FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min

5.5.6 Circumferential slot

The "Circumferential slot" function is used when you want to mill one or more circumferential slots of the same size in a full circle or pitch circle.

Tool size Please note that there is a minimum size for the milling cutter used to

machine the circumferential slot: • Roughing:

1/2 slot width W – finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter

• Finishing: 1/2 slot width W ≤ milling cutter diameter

• Edge finishing: Finishing allowance UXY ≤ milling cutter diameter

Annular slot

To create an annular slot, you must enter the following values for the "Number N" and "Aperture angle α1" parameters: N = 1 α1 = 360°

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the center point of the semicircle at the end of the slot at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.

2. It then plunges into the workpiece at machining feedrate, allowing for the maximum Z direction infeed (for face machining) and X direction infeed (for peripheral surface machining) as well as the finishing allowance. The circumferential slot is machined in the programmed machining direction (climb or conventional) in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

Page 253: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-253

3. When the first circumferential slot is finished, the tool moves to the retraction plane at rapid traverse.

4. The next circumferential slot is approached along a straight line or circular path and then machined. The rapid traverse feedrate for positioning on a circular path is defined in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse. Machining type You can select the machining mode for milling the circumferential slot

as follows: • Roughing

During roughing, the individual planes of the slot are machined one after the other from center point of the semicircle at the end of the slot until depth Z1 is reached.

• Finishing In "Finishing" mode, the edge is always machined first until depth Z1 is reached. The slot edge is approached on the quadrant, which joins the radius. In the last infeed, the base is finished from the center point of the semicircle to the end of the slot.

• Edge finishing Edge finishing is performed in the same way as finishing, except that the last infeed (finish base) is omitted.

• Chamfer Chamfering involves edge breaking at the upper edge of the circumferential slot.

Slot >

Circ. slot

Press the "Milling", "Slot" and "Circ. slot" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

FZ Depth infeed rate mm/toothmm/min

Position You can select 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Page 254: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-254 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing

Finish edge Chamfer

Full circle Pitch circle

Position slots around a full circle. The slot spacing is uniform and is calculated by the control. Position slots around a pitch circle. The slot spacing can be determined on the basis of angle α2.

X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY FS ZFS

End face/End face C: The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle. Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Slot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth for the drill tip (abs or inc) – (only for chamfer)

mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm mm mm mm

Y0 C0 Z0 X0 X1 DX UYZ FS ZFS

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle. Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Slot depth based on X0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm Degr. mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

CP X0 Y0 L0 C0 Z0 Z1 DZ UXY FS ZFS

End face Y: The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle. Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Slot depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degr. mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm mm mm mm

Page 255: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-255

C0 Y0 Z0 X0 X1 DX UYZ FS ZFS

Peripheral surface Y: The reference point is always the center point of the full or pitch circle. Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point in X direction (abs.) Slot depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (slot edge) – (for roughing and finishing only) Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degr. mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

W Slot width mm

R Radius of circumferential slot mm

α0 Start angle α0 is based on the end face on the X axis and the peripheral surface on the Y axis

Degr.

α1 Angle of aperture of a slot Degr.

α2 Advance angle (for pitch circle only) Degr.

N Number of slots

Positioning Linear: Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.

Page 256: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-256 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.5.7 Positions

If you want to mill a pocket, spigot or longitudinal slot at more than oneposition, you must program a separate positioning block.

You must set "Pos. Pattern" for the milling cycle if you want to mill at

more than one position.

Position pattern

You will find further information about freely definable positions or position patterns in the Section "Drilling".

Positions >

Press the "Drilling" and "Positions" softkeys.

...

Select the required position pattern via softkey.

Then proceed as described in the Section "Drilling".

Page 257: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-257

5.5.8 Multiple edge

The "Multiple edge" function is used when you want to mill a multiple edge with any number of edges on the end face.

You can select from the following shapes with or without a corner

radius or chamfer:

Multiple edge

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.

2. The tool traverses the multiple edge in a quadrant at machining feed. The tool first executes infeed at machining depth and then moves in the plane. The multiple edge is machined as a function of the programmed machining direction (climb/conventional) in a clockwise or counterclockwise direction.

3. When the first plane has been machined, the tool retracts from the contour in the plane in a quadrant and then infeeds to the next machining depth.

4. The multiple edge is traversed again in a quadrant. It repeats the process until the depth of the multiple edge has been reached.

5. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

A multiple edge with more than two edges is circumnavigated helically; with a single or double edge, each edge is machined separately.

Y

X

Retractingcontour

Approachingcontour

Tool

Multipleedge

Approaching and retraction from the multiple edge in a quadrant

Page 258: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-258 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Multiple edge >

Press the "Milling", and "Multiple edge" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position You can select 3 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing

Finishing on the edge Chamfer

∅ Diameter of blank part mm

Z0 Reference point (abs) mm

N Number of edges (1, 2,.....)

SW Across the flats (alternative to L) – (for N = 1 or N = integer only) mm

L Edge length (alternative to SW) mm

α0 Angle of rotation of first edge with reference to X axis α0 > 0: Multiple edge is rotated in CCW direction. α0 < 0: Multiple edge is rotated in CW direction.

Degr.

FS1 Chamfer in XY plane (alternative to R1) – (3 edges or more)

R1 Rounding in XY plane (alternative to FS1) – (3 edges or more) mm

Z1 End point Z1 (abs or inc) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm

FS Chamfer width (abs) – (for chamfer only) mm

ZFS Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

DZ Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) mm

DXY Maximum infeed in the XY plane – (for roughing and finishing only) Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm)

mm %

UZ Finishing allowance in depth – (for roughing and finishing only) mm

UXY Finishing allowance in the plane – (for roughing and finishing only) mm

Page 259: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-259

5.5.9 Engraving

The "Engraving" function is used when you want to mill a text along a line or arc. You can enter the text directly in the text field as "fixed text" or assign it via a variable as "variable text".

ShopTurn uses a proportional font for engraving, i.e. the width of the

individual characters varies.

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety clearance.

2. The tool traverses at infeed FZ or FX to machining depth Z1 and X1 and mills the character.

3. The tool retracts to the safety clearance at rapid traverse and moves along a straight line to the next character.

4. Steps 2 and 3 are repeated until the entire text has been milled.

Variable texts There are various ways of defining variable text: • Date and time

You can engrave workpieces with the production date and current time of day, for example. The values for date and time are read from the NCK.

• Workpiece count Using the workpiece variables you can assign a consecutive number to the workpieces. You can define the format (number of digits, leading zeroes). The “workpiece count” variable is defined as a user variable (_E_PART[0]) in the GUD 7 data block. The place holder (#) is used to format the number of digits at which the workpiece counts output will begin.

If you output the workpiece count 1 for the first workpiece, you can specify an additive value (e.g., <#,_E_PART[0] + 100>). The workpiece count output is then incremented by this value (e.g. 101, 102, 103,...).

• Numbers When outputting number (e.g. measurement results), you can select the output format (digits either side of the point) of the number to be engraved.

• Text Instead of entering a fixed text in the engraving text field, you can specify the text to be engraved via a text variable (e.g., VARTEXT=“ABC123“).

Page 260: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-260 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Mirror writing

Programming engraving in the "End face rear" or "Peripheral surface inner" machining planes produces mirrored text. To obtain normal text here, you must first program mirroring (see "Defining the coordinate transformations") and then the "Engraving" function. Please note that before mirroring you are in the machining plane in which you want to engrave. (To change the machining plane, see "Selecting the tool and the machining plane".) To engrave mirrored text in the "End face front" and "Peripheral surface outer" machining planes, first program mirroring and then enter the normal text in the "Engraving" function.

Full circle To distribute the characters evenly around a full circle, there is no need to calculate the arc angle α2 between the first and the last character; instead simply enter α2=360°. ShopTurn then distributes the characters evenly around the full circle.

Engraving

Press the "Milling" and "Engraving" softkeys.

Lowercase letters Lowercase

Press the "Lowercase" softkey to enter lowercase letters.

Press it again to enter uppercase letters.

Special characters Special

characters Press the "Special characters" softkey if you need a character that

does not appear on the input keys.

The "Special characters" window appears.

Place the cursor on the character you require.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The desired character will be inserted in the text.

The “Special characters” softkey is not available in all languages.

Page 261: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-261

Entering a date Variable >

Date

Press the "Variable" and "Date" softkeys if you want to engrave

the current date.

The data is inserted in the European date format (<DD>.<MM>.<YYYY>).

To obtain a different date format, you must adapt the format specified in the text field. For example, to engrave the date in the American dateformat (month/day/year => 8/16/04), change the format to <M>/<D>/<YY> .

Entering a time Variable >

Time

Press the "Variable" and "Time" softkeys if you want to engrave

the current time.

The time is inserted in the European format (<TIME24>).

To have the time in the American format, change the format to <TIME12>.

Example: Text entry: Time: <TIME24> Execution: Time: 16.35 Time: <TIME12> Time: 04.35 PM

Entering workpiece

counts

Variable >

Workpc. ct. 000123

Press the "Variable" and "Workpiece ct. 000123" softkeys to engrave a workpiece count with a fixed number of digits and leading zeroes.

The format text <######,_E_PART[0]> is inserted and you return to the engraving field with the softkey bar.

Define the number of digits by adjusting the number of place holders (#) in the engraving field.

If the specified number of digits (e.g. ## ) is not enough to display the workpiece count, ShopTurn will increase the number digits automatically.

- OR - Variable >

Workpiece

ct.123 Press the "Variable" and "Workpiece ct. 123" softkeys if you want

to engrave a workpiece count without lead zeroes.

The format text <#,_E_PART[0]> is inserted and you return to the engraving field with the softkey bar.

If the specified number of digits is not enough to display the workpiece count (e.g. 123), ShopTurn will increase the number digits automatically.

You can enter an additive value, for example, if you want to resume production of workpieces after an interruption. The workpiece count output is then increased by this value.

Page 262: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-262 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Entering a variable number

Variable >

Number 123.456

Press the "Variable" and "Number 123.456" softkeys if you want to engrave a any number in a certain format.

The format text <#.###,_VAR_NUM> is inserted and you return to the engraving field with the softkey bar.

The placeholders #.### define the digit format in which the number defined in VARNUM will be engraved.

For example, if you have stored 12.35 in VARNUM, you can format the variable as follows.

Input Output Meaning <#,_VAR_NUM> 12 Integer digits not formatted,

no fractional digits <####,_VAR_NUM> 0012 4 integer digits, leading

zeroes, no fractional digits <#,_VAR_NUM> 12 4 integer digits, leading

zeroes, no fractional digits <#.,_VAR_NUM> 12.35 Integer and fractional digits

not formatted. <#.#,_VAR_NUM> 12.4 Integer digits not formatted,

1 fractional digit (rounded) <#.##,_VAR_NUM> 12.35 Integer digits not formatted,

2 fractional digits (rounded) <#.####,_VAR_NUM> 12.3500 Integer digits not formatted,

4 fractional digits (rounded) If there is insufficient space in front of the decimal point to display the

number entered, it is automatically extended. If the specified number of digits is larger than the number to be engraved, the output format is automatically filled with the appropriate number of leading and trailing zeroes. Instead of the decimal point you can also use a blank.

Instead of VARNUM you can use any other numeric variable (e.g. R0).

Page 263: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-263

Entering a variable text

Variable >

Variable text

Press the "Variable" and "Variable text" softkeys if you want to take the text to be engraved (up to 200 characters) from a variable.

The format text <Text, VARTEXT> is inserted and you return to the engraving field with the softkey bar.

You can use any other text variable instead of VARTEXT. Deleting text Delete text

Press the "Delete text" softkey to remove the entire text.

The format text for the variables is always inserted at the current

cursor position.

The "Lowercase", "Special characters", "Variable", and "Delete text"

softkeys only appear when you place the cursor in the input field for engraving text.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Sec. "Creating program blocks".

Position You can select 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y and Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Alignment Align text to line

Align text to arc

Align text to arc

Reference point

Position of reference point within text

Engraving text a maximum of 91 characters

X0 L0 Y0 C0 Z0 Z1

End face/End face C: Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Machining depth (inc.)

mm mm mm Degr. mm mm

Page 264: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-264 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

FZ W DX1 DX2 α1 α2

Depth infeed rate Character height Character spacing Total width (alternative to DX1) – (for linear alignment only) Text direction (for linear alignment only) Arc angle (alternative to DX1) – (for curved alignment only) The center point of the arc is the workpiece zero.

mm/min mm/toothmm mm mm Degr. Degr.

Y0 C0 R Z0 α0 X0 X1 FX W DY1 DY2 α1 α2 YM CM ZM

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point (alternative to Y0) – (for linear alignment only) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to Y0) – (for curved alignment only) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Z0) – (for curved alignment only) Reference point in X direction (abs.) Machining depth (inc.) Depth infeed rate Character height Character spacing Total width (alternative to DY1) – (for linear alignment only) Text direction (for linear alignment only) Arc angle (alternative to DY1) – (for curved alignment only) Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) Center point of arc (abs.) – (alternative to YM) Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only)

mm mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm/min mm/toothmm mm mm Degr. Degr. mm Degr. mm

CP X0 L0 Y0 C0 Z0 Z1 FZ W DX1 DX2 α1 α2

End face Y: Positioning angle for machining area Reference point in X direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to X0) Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Y0) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Machining depth (inc.) Depth infeed rate Character height Character spacing Total width (alternative to DX1) – (for linear alignment only) Text direction (for linear alignment only) Arc angle (alternative to DX1) – (for curved alignment only) The center point of the arc is the workpiece zero.

mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm/min mm/toothmm mm mm Degr. Degr.

Page 265: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.5 Milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-265

C0 Y0 R Z0 α0 X0 X1 FX W DY1 DY2 α1 α2 YM ZM

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in Y direction (abs.) Reference point on longitudinal polar axis (alternative to Y0) – (for curved alignment only) Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Reference point on angular polar axis (alternative to Z0) – (for curved alignment only) Reference point in X direction (abs.) Machining depth (inc.) Depth infeed rate Character height Character spacing Total width (alternative to DY1) – (for linear alignment only) Text direction (for linear alignment only) Arc angle (alternative to DY1) – (for curved alignment only) Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only) Center point of arc (abs.) – (for curved alignment only)

mm mm mm mm Degr. mm mm mm/min mm/toothmm mm mm Degr. Degr. mm mm

Page 266: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-266 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.6 Contour milling The "Contour milling" function is used when you want to mill simple

and complex contours. You can define open contours or closed contours (pockets, islands, spigots) and machine them with path milling or milling cycles.

A contour comprises separate contour elements, whereby at least two

and up to 250 elements result in a defined contour. You can also program chamfers, radii or tangential transitions between the contour elements.

The integrated contour calculator calculates the intersection points of the individual contour elements taking into account the geometrical relationships, which allows you to enter incompletely dimensioned elements.

With contour milling, you must always program the geometry of the contour before you program the technology. You have the option of machining contours of any type by path milling, stock removal from pockets with or without islands, or clearing spigots.

Freely-definable contours

The machining of freely-definable open or closed contours is generally programmed as follows:

1. Enter contour You build up the contour gradually from a series of different contour elements.

2. Path milling (roughing) The contour is machined taking into account various approach and retract strategies.

3. Path milling (finishing) If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the contour is machined again.

4. Path milling (chamfer) If you have planned edge breaking, chamfer the workpiece with a special tool.

Contours for pockets or

islands

Contours for pockets or islands must be closed, i.e. the start point and end point of the contour are identical. You can also mill pockets that contain one or more islands. The islands can also be located partially outside the pocket or overlap each other. ShopTurn interprets the first contour specified as a pocket contour and all others as islands.

Page 267: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-267

The machining of contour pockets with islands is generally programmed as follows:

1. Enter contour for the pocket You build up the contour pocket gradually from a series of different contour elements.

2. Enter contour for the island You enter the contour for the island after the contour for the pocket.

3. Centering predrilling of the contour pocket If you want to predrill the contour pocket, you can center the drill hole first to prevent the drill slipping.

4. Predrill contour pocket If you want the cutter to plunge into the material vertically and if a milling cutter with an end tooth is not available, you can predrill the pocket.

5. Remove stock from contour pocket with island (roughing) The stock is removed from the contour pocket complete with island taking into account various insertion strategies.

6. Remove residual material (roughing) During stock removal from the pocket, ShopTurn automatically detects residual material that has been left. A suitable tool will allow you to remove this without having to machine the complete pocket again.

7. Finish contour pocket with island (finish edge/base) If you programmed a finishing allowance for the edge/base when you programmed roughing, the pocket edge/base will be machined again.

All machining steps involved in the contour milling operation are shown in the machining plan in square brackets.

Example: Removing stock from a contour pocket

Page 268: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-268 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Contours for spigots

Contours for spigots must be closed, i.e. the start point and end point of the contour are identical. You can define multiple spigots, which can also overlap. ShopTurn interprets the first contour specified as a blank contour and all others as spigots.

The machining of contour spigots is generally programmed as follows:

1. Enter the blank contour i.e. the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. Material is then removed between the blank contour and spigot contour.

2. Enter contour for the spigot You enter the contour for the spigot after the blank contour.

3. Clear contour spigot (roughing) The contour spigot is cleared.

4. Remove residual material (roughing) As it mills the spigot, ShopTurn automatically detects residual material that has been left behind. A suitable tool will allow you to remove this without having to machine the complete spigot again.

5. Finish contour spigot (edge/base finishing) If you programmed a finishing allowance for roughing, the spigot edge/base is machined again.

6. Chamfer contour spigot If you have planned edge breaking, subsequently chamfer the workpiece.

Clamp spindle When milling contours, it can be useful, for example, during vertical

insertion into the material, to clamp the spindle to avoid spindle distortions. The "Clamp spindle" function must be set up by the machine manufacturer. The machine manufacturer also specifies whether ShopTurn will clamp the spindle automatically if this would facilitate machining, or if you can decide the types of machining for which the spindle should be clamped.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

If you are to decide the types of machining for which the spindle is to be clamped, the following applies: You should note that when machining in planes End face/End face C and Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C, clamping is automatically released after insertion. When machining in planes End face Y and Peripheral surface Y, the clamping is modal, i.e. it remains activated until the machining plane is changed or clamping is deselected in the "Straight circle" "Tool" menu.

Page 269: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-269

5.6.1 Representation of the contour

ShopTurn presents a contour as one program block in the process plan. If you open this block, the individual contour elements are listed symbolically and displayed in broken-line graphics.

Symbolic representation The individual contour elements are represented by symbols adjacent

to the graphics window. They appear in the order in which they were entered.

Contour element Icon Meaning

Start point Start point of contour

Straight line up Straight line down

Straight line in 90° matrix Straight line in 90° matrix

Straight line left Straight line right

Straight line in 90° matrix Straight line in 90° matrix

Straight line in any direction

Straight line with any gradient

Arc Right Arc Left

Circle Circle

Finish contour END End of contour definition The different color of the symbols indicates their status:

Foreground Background Meaning - Red Cursor on new element Black Red Cursor on current element Black White Normal element Red White Element not currently evaluated

(element will only be evaluated when it is selected with the cursor)

Page 270: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-270 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Graphic representation The progress of contour programming is shown in broken-line graphics while the contour elements are being entered.

Graphical presentation of the contour during contour milling

When the contour element has been created, it can be displayed in different line styles and colors: • Black: Programmed contour • Orange: Current contour element • Green dashed: Alternative element • Blue dotted: Partially defined element

The scaling of the coordinate system is adjusted automatically to match the complete contour.

The position of the coordinate system is displayed in the graphics window.

Page 271: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-271

5.6.2 Creating a new contour

For each contour that you want to mill, you must create a new contour.

The contours are stored at the end of the program.

The first step in creating a contour is to specify a starting point. ShopTurn automatically defines the end of the contour. You can enter any additional commands (up to 40 characters) in G code format for the start point.

Additional commands You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, with additional G code commands (see also Section "Create exact contour transitions" in Chapter "Create contour elements”). However, make sure that the additional commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour. Therefore do not use any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.

If you want to create a contour that is similar to an existing contour, you can copy the existing one, rename it and just alter selected contour elements. In contrast, if you want to use an identical contour at another place in the program, you must not rename the copy. Changes to the one contour will then automatically be applied to the other contour with the same name.

Contourmilling >

New contour >

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "New contour" softkeys.

Enter a name for the new contour. The contour name must be unique.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The input form for the start point of the contour appears. You can enter Cartesian or polar coordinates.

Cartesian starting point Select the machining plane.

Enter the starting point for the contour.

Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

Page 272: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-272 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Enter the individual contour elements (see Sec. "Creating contour elements").

Polar starting point Select the machining plane.

Pole

Press the "Pole" softkey.

Enter the pole position in Cartesian coordinates.

Enter the starting point for the contour in polar coordinates.

Enter any additional commands in G code format, as required.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

Enter the individual contour elements (see Sec. "Creating contour elements").

Parameters Description Units

Position Select from 4 different positions: • Front/Front C • Peripheral/Peripheral C • End face Y (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y (only when Y axis exists)

X Y

End face/End face C and End face Y - Cartesian: Start point in X direction (abs.) Start point in Y direction (abs.)

mm mm

X Y L1 ϕ1

End face/End face C and End face Y - Polar: Pole position in X direction (abs.) Pole position in Y direction (abs.) Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.) Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.)

mm mm mm Degr.

∅ Y Yα Z

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cartesian: Cylinder surface Start point in Y direction (abs.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) Starting angle (abs.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Start point in Z direction (abs.)

mm mm Degr. mm

∅ Y Z L1 ϕ1

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Polar: Cylinder surface Pole position in Y direction (abs.) Pole position in Z direction (abs.) Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.) Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.)

mm mm mm mm Degr.

Page 273: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-273

Y Z

Peripheral surface Y - Cartesian: Start point in Y direction (abs.) Start point in Z direction (abs.)

mm mm

Y Z L1 ϕ1

Peripheral surface Y - Polar: Pole position in Y direction (abs.) Pole position in Z direction (abs.) Distance between pole and start point for contour (abs.) Polar angle between pole and start point for contour (abs.)

mm mm mm Degr.

Additional command

Additional G code commands; see above

5.6.3 Creating contour elements

When you have created a new contour and specified the start point, you can define the individual elements that the contour comprises.

The following contour elements are available for the definition of a

contour:

• Straight horizontal line

• Straight vertical line

• Diagonal line

• Circle/arc

For each contour element, you must parameterize a separate screen form. The coordinates for a horizontal or vertical line are entered in Cartesian format; however, for the contour elements Diagonal line and Circle/arc you can choose between Cartesian and polar coordinates. If you wish to enter polar coordinates you must first define a pole. If you have already defined a pole for the start point, you can also relate the polar coordinates to this pole. In this case there is therefore no need to define another pole.

Parameter input Parameter entry is supported by various "help displays" that explain the parameters.

If you leave certain fields blank, ShopTurn assumes that the values are unknown and attempts to calculate them from other parameters.

Conflicts may result if you enter more parameters than are absolutely necessary for a contour. In such a case, try entering less parameters and allowing ShopTurn to calculate as many parameters as possible.

Page 274: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-274 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Machining direction In the case of path milling, the contour is always machined in the programmed direction. By programming the contour in the clockwise direction or counterclockwise direction, you can determine whether thecontour is machined with down-cut milling or up-cut milling (see the following table).

Outside contour Required direction of

rotation for machining CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation

Down-cut Programming in clockwise direction CCW cutter radius compensation

Programming in counterclockwise direction, CW cutter radius compensation

Up-cut Programming in counterclockwise direction, CW cutter radius compensation

Programming in clockwise direction CCW cutter radius compensation

Inside contour Required direction of

rotation for machining CW spindle rotation CCW spindle rotation

Down-cut Programming in counterclockwise direction, CCW cutter radius compensation

Programming in clockwise direction CW cutter radius compensation

Up-cut Programming in clockwise direction CW cutter radius compensation

Programming in counterclockwise direction, CCW cutter radius compensation

Contour transition

elements

As a transition between two contour elements, you can choose a radius or a chamfer. The transition is always appended to the end of a contour element. The contour transition is selected in the parameterization screen form of the contour element.

You can use a contour transition element whenever there is an intersection between two successive elements which can be calculated from input values. Otherwise you must use the "Straight/Circle" contour elements.

That means that for a closed counter, you can also program a transition element from the last to the first element of the contour. The contour starting point is outside the contour after you have programmed the transition.

Additional commands

For each contour element, you can enter any additional commands in G code format, for example, you can program a special feedrate for the circle contour element. You can enter the additional commands (max. 40 characters) in the extended parameterization screen form ("All parameters" softkey).

You can program feedrates and M commands, for example, using additional G code commands. However, make sure that the additional commands do not collide with the generated G code of the contour. Therefore do not use any G code commands of group 1 (G0, G1, G2, G3), no coordinates in the plane and no G code commands that have to be programmed in a separate block.

Page 275: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-275

Additional functions

The following additional functions are available for programming a contour: • Tangent to preceding element

You can program the transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

• Dialog selection If two different possible contours result from the parameters entered thus far, one of the options must be selected.

• Close contour From the current position, you can close the contour with a straight line to the starting point.

Creating a contour

element

...

Select a contour element via softkey.

Enter all the data available from the workpiece drawing in the input form (e.g. length of straight line, target position, transition to next element, angle of lead, etc.).

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The contour element is added to the contour.

Repeat the procedure until the contour is complete.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The programmed contour is transferred to the machining plan.

Allparameters

If you want to display further parameters for certain contour elements, e.g. to enter additional commands, press the "All parameters" softkey.

Defining a pole If you wish to enter the contour elements Diagonal line and Circle/arc in polar coordinates, you must first define a pole.

Continue

Pole

Press the "Continue" and "Pole" softkeys.

Enter the coordinates of the pole.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The pole is defined. You can now choose between "Cartesian" and "Polar" in the input screen form for the Diagonal line and Circle/Arc contour elements.

Page 276: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-276 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Tangent to preceding element

When entering data for a contour element you can program the transition to the preceding element as a tangent.

Tangent toprec. elem.

Press the "Tangent to prec. elem." softkey.

The angle to the preceding element α2 is set to 0°. The "tangential" selection appears in the parameter input field.

Selecting a dialog When entering data for a contour element, there may be two different contour options, one of which you have to select.

Selectdialog

Press the "Select dialog" softkey to switch between the two different contour options.

The selected contour appears in the graphics window as a solid black line and the alternative contour appears as a dashed green line.

Acceptdialog

Press the "Accept dialog" softkey to accept the chosen alternative.

Close contour

A contour always has to be closed. If you do not wish to create all contour elements from starting point to starting point, you can close the contour from the current position to the starting point.

Continue

Closecontour

Press the "Continue" and "Close contour" softkeys.

ShopTurn inserts a straight line between your current position and the starting point.

Parameters Description for contour element "straight line" Units

X Y L α1 α2

End face/End face C and End face Y - Cartesian: End point in the X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of straight line Starting angle to X axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

mm mm mm Degr. Degr.

L1 ϕ1 L α1 α2

End face/End face C and End face Y - Polar: abs: distance between pole and end point inc: distance between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: polar angle between pole and end point inc: polar angle between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of straight line Starting angle to X axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

mm mm Degr. Degr. mm Degr. Degr.

Page 277: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-277

Y Yα Z L α1 α2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cartesian: End point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End angle (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of straight line Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

mm Degr. mm mm Degr. Degr.

L1 ϕ1 L α1 α2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y – Polar: abs: distance between pole and end point inc: distance between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: polar angle between pole and end point inc: polar angle between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of straight line Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

mm mm Degr. Degr. mm Degr. Degr.

Y Z L α1 α2

Peripheral surface Y - Cartesian: End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Length of straight line Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0

mm mm mm Degr. Degr.

Transition to next element

FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element R: Radius as transition element to next contour element

mm mm

Additional command

Additional G code commands; see above

Page 278: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-278 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Parameters Description for contour element "circle" Units

Direction of rotation Clockwise rotation

Counterclockwise rotation

R Radius of circle mm

X Y I J α1 α2 β1 β2

End face/End face C and End face Y - Cartesian: End point in the X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in X direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to X axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to X axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm mm mm mm Degr. Degr. Degr. Degr.

L1 ϕ1 L2 ϕ2

α1 α2 β1 β2

End face/End face C and End face Y - Polar: abs: distance between pole and end point inc: distance between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: polar angle between pole and end point inc: polar angle between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: distance between pole and center of circle inc: distance between final point and center of circle Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: polar angle between pole and center of circle inc: polar angle between final point and center of circle Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to X axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to X axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm mm Degr. Degr. mm mm Degr. Degr. Degr. Degr. Degr. Degr.

Y Yα Z J Jα

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C - Cartesian: End point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Yα or vice versa) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End angle (abs. or inc.) – (calculated from Y or vice versa) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated.

mm Degr. mm mm Degr.

Page 279: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-279

K α1 α2 β1 β2

Circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to Y axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm Degr. Degr. Degr. Degr.

L1 ϕ1 L2 ϕ2 α1 α2 β1 β2

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C and Peripheral surface Y – Polar: abs: distance between pole and end point inc: distance between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: polar angle between pole and end point inc: polar angle between final point and end point Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: distance between pole and center of circle inc: distance between final point and center of circle Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. abs: polar angle between pole and center of circle inc: polar angle between final point and center of circle Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to Y axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm mm Degr. Degr. mm mm Degr. Degr. Degr. Degr. Degr. Degr.

Y Z J K α1 α2 β1 β2

Peripheral surface Y - Cartesian: End point in the Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. End point in the Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Y direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Circle center point in Z direction (abs. or inc.) Incremental dimensions: The plus/minus sign is evaluated. Starting angle to Y axis Angle to preceding element Tangential transition: α2=0 End angle to Y axis Angle of aperture of circle

mm mm mm mm Degr. Degr. Degr. Degr.

Transition to next element

FS: Chamfer as transition element to next contour element R: Radius as transition element to next contour element

mm mm

Additional command

Additional G code commands; see above

Page 280: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-280 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.6.4 Changing a contour

You can change a previously created contour later. Individual contour elements can be • appended, • modified, • inserted or • deleted.

If your program contains two contours of the same name, changes to

the one contour are automatically applied to the second contour with the same name.

Append contour element

Select the contour in the machining plan.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The individual contour elements are listed.

Place the cursor on the last element before the end of the contour.

...

Select the required contour element via softkey.

Enter the parameters in the input screen.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The required contour element is appended to the contour.

Modifying contour element

Select the contour in the machining plan.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The individual contour elements are listed.

Position the cursor on the contour element that you want to modify.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The associated input form is opened and an enlarged view of the selected element appears in the programming graphics.

Enter the desired changes.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The current values for the contour element are accepted and the change is immediately visible in the programming graphics.

Page 281: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-281

Changing dialog selection

If when you entered the data for a contour element there were two different contour options and you chose the wrong one, you can alter your choice afterwards. If the contour is unique as a result of other parameters, the system will not prompt you to make a selection.

Open the input screen form for the contour element.

Changeselection

Press the "Change selection" softkey.

The two selection options appear again.

Selectdialog

Press the "Select dialog" softkey to switch between the two different contour options.

Acceptdialog

Press the "Accept dialog" softkey.

The chosen alternative is accepted.

Insert a contour element

Select the contour in the machining plan.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The individual contour elements are listed.

Place the cursor on the contour element after which the new element is to be inserted.

...

Select a new contour element via softkey.

Enter the parameters in the input screen.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The contour element is inserted in the contour. Subsequent contour elements are updated automatically according to the new contour status.

When you insert a new element into a contour, the remaining contour elements are not interpreted until you select the symbol for the first subsequent element alongside the graphics window using the cursor. The end point of the inserted element may not correspond to the start point of the subsequent element. In this case, ShopTurn outputs the error message "Geometrical data contradictory". To rectify the problem, insert an incline without entering parameter values.

Page 282: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-282 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Delete contour element

Select the contour in the machining plan.

Press the "Right cursor" key.

The individual contour elements are listed.

Place the cursor on the contour element that you want to delete.

Deleteelement

Press the "Delete element" softkey.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The selected contour element is deleted.

5.6.5 Path milling

The "Path milling" function is used when you want to machine open or closed contours. Before you can mill the contour, you must enter the contour. Machining can be performed in either direction, i.e. in the direction of the programmed contour or in the opposite direction.

For machining in the opposite direction, contours must not consist of more than 170 contour elements (incl. chamfers/radii). Special aspects (except for feed values) of free G code input are ignored during path milling in the opposite direction to the contour.

You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing, or chamfer)

for path milling. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained on the second call.

It is also possible to choose between machining the contour with a cutter radius offset and traversing the center path.

Cutter radius compensation

The cutter radius offset allows you to machine a programmed contour to the right or left of the contour. You can choose between different approach and retract modes as well as between different approach and retract strategies.

Page 283: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-283

• Approach/Retract mode You can approach or retract from the contour in a quadrant, semicircle or along a straight line. In the case of a quadrant or semicircle, you have to specify the radius of the cutter center path and for a straight line, the distance from the outer edge of the cutter to the start point or end point of the contour. You can also specify different modes for approach and retraction, for example, approach in quadrant mode and retract in semicircle mode.

Approaching on a straight line, in a quadrant and in a semicircle

• Approach/Retract strategy Approaching in the plane is performed first in the Z direction in the depth and then in the XY plane. Retraction is performed in reverse order. In the case of three-dimensional approach/retraction, traversing is performed simultaneously in the depth and in the plane. You can also specify different strategies for approach and retraction, for example, approach in the plane and retract three-dimensionally.

Center path

If you do not want to use cutter radius compensation, the programmed contour is milled on the center path. In this case, approaching and retraction is only possible along a straight line or vertical. Vertical approach/retraction can be used for closed contours, for example.

Page 284: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-284 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Groove side offset

When you want to mill a contour on the peripheral surface ("peripheral surface/peripheral surface C" machining plane), you can work with or without a slot wall offset.

• Slot wall offset Off ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls when the tool diameter is equal to the slot width. If the slot width is larger than the tool diameter, the slot walls will not be parallel.

• Slot wall offset On ShopTurn creates slots with parallel walls also when the slot width is larger than the tool diameter.

If you want to work with a slot wall offset, you must not program the contour of the slot, but instead the imagined center path of a bolt inserted in the slot whereby the bolt touches both walls. The parameter D is used to specify the slot width.

Contourmilling >

Pathmilling >

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Path milling" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is approached vertically for roughing) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Roughing

Finishing Chamfer

Machining direction

Forward: machining is performed in the programmed contour direction Backward: machining is performed in the opposite direction to the programmed contour

Page 285: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-285

Radius compensation

Input defining which side of the contour the milling cutter machines in the programmed direction:

Machining to the right of the contour

Machining to the left of the contour

Machining along the center path

Z0 Z1 DZ UZ UXY FS ZFS

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

Slot wall offset D X0 X1 DX UX UYZ FS ZFS

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Activate slot wall offset Offset to programmed path (only with activated slot wall offset) Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth based on Z0 ∅ (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DZ UZ UXY FS ZFS

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth based on Z0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degr. mm mm mm

mm mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DX UX UYZ FS ZFS

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth based on X0 (abs or inc) – (only for roughing and finishing) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) – (for roughing and finishing only) Finishing allowance in depth (for roughing only) Finishing allowance in the plane (only for roughing and to the left of the contour) Chamfer width (inc) – (for chamfer only) Insertion depth of tool tip (abs or inc) – (for chamfer only)

Degr. mm mm mm mm mm mm mm

Page 286: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-286 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Approach mode

Approach mode: In a quadrant: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour) In a semicircle: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour) In a straight line: Slope in space Perpendicular: Perpendicular to the path (only with path milling on the center path)

Approach strategy axis by axis

spatial (not with perpendicular approach mode)

R1 Approach radius (only for quadrant or semicircle approach mode) mm

L1 Approach distance (only for straight-line approach mode) mm

FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with axis-by-axis approach strategy)

mm/toothmm/min

FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y with axis-by-axis approach strategy)

mm/toothmm/min

Retract mode Retract mode In a quadrant: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour) In a semicircle: Part of a spiral (only with path milling left and right of the contour) In a straight line: Slope in space Perpendicular: Perpendicular to the path (only with path milling on the center path)

Retract strategy Axis by axis

Three-dimensionally (not with perpendicular retraction mode)

R2 Retraction radius (only for quadrant or semicircle retraction mode) mm

L2 Retraction distance (only for straight-line retraction mode) mm

Retraction mode

If more than one depth infeed is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between the separate infeeds (in the transition from the end of the contour to the beginning). • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or X0+safety

clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

• Safety clearance • No retraction

Page 287: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-287

5.6.6 Predrilling a contour pocket

When removing stock from a contour pocket, if you want the cutter to plunge into the material vertically and if a milling cutter with an end tooth is not available, you must predrill the pocket first. To prevent the drill slipping during drilling, you can center it first.

Before you drill the pocket, you must enter the pocket contour. If you

want to center before predrilling, you have to program the two machining steps in separate blocks.

The number and positions of the necessary predrilled holes depend on the specific circumstances (such as shape of contour, tool, plane infeed, finishing allowance) and are calculated by ShopTurn.

If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool changeover, predrill all the pockets first and then remove the stock. In this case, for centering/predrilling, you also have to enter the parameters that appear when you press the "All parameters" softkey. These parameters must correspond to the parameters from the previous removal step. Then program as follows:

1. Contour pocket 1 2. Centering 3. Contour pocket 2 4. Centering 5. Contour pocket 1 6. Predrilling 7. Contour pocket 2 8. Predrilling 9. Contour pocket 1 10. Remove stock 11. Contour pocket 2 12. Remove stock

If you machine a pocket completely, i.e. center, predrill and remove stock in immediate succession, and do not complete the additional parameters on centering/predrilling, ShopTurn loads these parameter values from the stock removal (roughing) machining step.

Page 288: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-288 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Centering

Contourmilling >

Predrilling >

Centering

Press the "Milling", "Contour Milling", "Predrilling" and "Centering" softkeys.

Allparameters

Press the "All Parameters" softkey if you want to enter additional parameters.

Parameters Description of centering Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

TR Reference tool for centering

D Cutting edge of reference tool (1 or 2)

Z0 Z1 DXY UXY

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm % mm

X0 X1 DYZ UYZ

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm % mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY UXY

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane

Degr. mm mm mm % mm

Page 289: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-289

C0 X0 X1 DYZ UYZ

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane

Degr. mm mm mm % mm

Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points: • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

Predrilling

Contourmilling >

Predrilling >

Predrilling

Press the "Milling", "Contour Milling", "Predrilling" and "Predrilling" softkeys in this order.

Allparameters

Press the "All Parameters" softkey if you want to enter additional parameters.

Parameters Description of predrilling Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

TR Reference tool for predrilling

D Cutting edge of reference tool (1 or 2)

Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm

Page 290: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-290 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm

Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points: • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

Page 291: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-291

5.6.7 Milling a contour pocket (roughing)

The "Mill pocket" function is used when you want to mill a pocket on the end face or peripheral surface.

Before you can program stock removal from the pocket, you must

enter the contour of the pocket and, if applicable, the contour of an island. Stock is removed from the pocket parallel to the contour from the inside to the outside. The direction is determined by the machining direction (climb/conventional) (see "Changing program settings"). If an island is located in the pocket, ShopTurn automatically takes this into account during stock removal.

You can select the machining mode (roughing or finishing) for removal. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained on the second call. For further details on finishing, please read the Section "Finishing the contour pocket".

Contourmilling >

Pocket milling

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket milling" softkeys.

Select "Roughing" machining mode.

Parameters Description for roughing Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type Roughing

Z0 Z1 DXY

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane

mm mm mm

Page 292: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-292 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

DZ UXY UZ

Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

% mm mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm mm

Start point

X Y

Y Z

Determine start point automatically or enter it manually Manual entry allows for a start point outside the pocket, whereby straight line machining into the pocket is performed first, e.g. for a pocket with a side opening without any insertion.

Start point X (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start point) Start point Y (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start point)

Start point Y (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face Y with manual start point) Start point Z (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face Y with manual start point)

mm mm

mm mm

Page 293: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-293

Insertion Insertion strategy: Oscillating: Oscillating insertion with the programmed angle (EW). Helical: Helical insertion with the programmed radius (ER) and the programmed gradient (EP). Center: For this insertion strategy, a milling cutter is required that cuts in the center. It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ or FX).

EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degr.

FP Maximum Insertion gradient (only for helical) The gradient of the helix may be smaller in some geometric conditions.

mm/rev

ER Insertion radius (only for helical) The radius must not be larger than the cutter radius, otherwise material will remain. Also make sure the pocket is not violated.

mm

FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min

FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min

Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points: • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

Page 294: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-294 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.6.8 Removing residual material from a contour pocket

When you have removed stock from a pocket (with/without islands) and residual material remains in place, this is automatically detected by ShopTurn. You can use a suitable tool to remove this residual material without having to machine the whole pocket again, i.e. avoiding unnecessary idle motions. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material.

The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter

used for stock removal.

If you mill several pockets and want to avoid unnecessary tool changeover, remove stock from all the pockets first and then remove the residual material. In this case, for removing the residual material, you also have to enter a value for the "Reference tool TR" parameter that appears when you press the "All parameters" softkey. Then program as follows:

1. Contour pocket 1 2. Remove stock 3. Contour pocket 2 4. Remove stock 5. Contour pocket 1 6. Solid machine residual material 7. Contour pocket 2 8. Solid machine residual material

The "Residual material" function is a software option.

Contourmilling >

Pocket resid. mat.

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket resid. mat." softkeys.

Allparameters

Press the "All Parameters" softkey if you want to enter additional parameters.

Page 295: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-295

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Roughing

TR Reference tool for residual material

D Cutting edge of reference tool (1 or 2)

Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm mm

Page 296: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-296 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

C0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm mm

Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points: • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

5.6.9 Finishing the contour pocket

If you programmed stock removal from the pocket with a finishing allowance for the base or edge of the pocket, you still have to finish the pocket.

Separate blocks must be programmed for finishing the base and/or for

finishing the edge. In each case, the pocket will only be machined once. ShopTurn takes into account any islands as was the case for roughing.

You can program "Path milling" as an alternative to "Edge finishing". Optimization possibilities are also offered for the approach/retract strategy and the approach/retract mode. Then program as follows: 1. Contour pocket 2. Contour island 3. Remove stock (roughing) 4. Contour pocket 5. Path milling (finishing) 6. Contour island 7. Path milling (finishing)

Page 297: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-297

Contourmilling >

Pocket milling

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket milling" softkeys.

Select "Finish base" or "Finish edge" machining mode.

Parameters Description of finishing the base Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Finishing the base

Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm

Page 298: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-298 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

C0 X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm

Start point

X Y

Y Z

Determine start point automatically or enter it manually Manual entry allows for a start point outside the pocket, whereby straight line machining into the pocket is performed first, e.g. for a pocket with a side opening without any insertion.

Start point X (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start point) Start point Y (abs.) – (only for end face/end face C and end face Y with manual start point)

Start point Y (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face Y with manual start point) Start point Z (abs.) – (only for peripheral face/peripheral face C and peripheral face Y with manual start point)

mm mm

mm mm

Insertion Insertion strategy: Oscillating: Oscillating insertion with the programmed angle (EW). Helical: Helical insertion with the programmed radius (ER) and the programmed gradient (EP). Center: For this insertion strategy, a milling cutter is required that cuts in the center. It is inserted at the programmed feedrate (FZ or FX).

EW Insertion angle (for oscillation only) Degr.

FP Maximum Insertion gradient (only for helical) The gradient of the helix may be smaller in some geometric conditions.

mm/rev

ER Insertion radius (only for helical) The radius must not be larger than the cutter radius, otherwise material will remain. Also make sure the pocket is not violated.

mm

FZ Depth infeed feedrate (for end face/end face C and end face Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min

FX Depth infeed feedrate (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y with central insertion only)

mm/toothmm/min

Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points: • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

Page 299: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-299

Parameters Description of finishing the edge Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining mode

Finishing on the edge

Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm mm

X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane

Degr. mm mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane

Degr. mm mm mm mm

Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points: • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

Page 300: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-300 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.6.10 Chamfering a contour pocket

Contour milling >

Pocket milling

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Pocket milling" softkeys.

Select "Chamfer" machining mode.

If you want to mill a chamfer and have programmed inside corners without filleting during rounding, you must specify the radius of the finishing tool as the rounding in the contour.

Parameters Description for chamfer: Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type Chamfer

Z0 FS ZFS

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Chamfer width, inc Insertion depth for tool tip; abs or inc

mm mm mm

X0 FS ZFS

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Chamfer width, inc Insertion depth for tool tip; abs or inc

mm mm mm

Page 301: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-301

CP Z0 FS ZFS

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Chamfer width, inc Insertion depth for tool tip; abs or inc

Degr. mm mm mm

C0 X0 FS ZFS

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Chamfer width, inc Insertion depth for tool tip; abs or inc

Degr. mm mm mm

Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points: • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

5.6.11 Milling a contour spigot (roughing)

The "Mill spigot" function is used when you want to mill a spigot on the end face or peripheral surface.

Before you mill the spigot, you must first enter a blank contour and

then one or more spigot contours. The blank contour defines the outer limits of the material. The tool moves at rapid traverse outside this area. Material is then removed between the blank contour and spigot contour.

You can select the machining mode (roughing, finishing, or chamfer) for milling. If you want to rough and then finish, you have to call the machining cycle twice (Block 1 = roughing, Block 2 = finishing). The programmed parameters are retained on the second call. For more on finishing, see Section "Finishing the contour spigot".

If you only program a blank contour without a second contour for a spigot, you can face mill the blank contour.

Page 302: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-302 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Approach/retraction 1. The tool approaches the starting point at rapid traverse at the height of the retraction plane and adjusts to the safety clearance. The start point is calculated by ShopTurn.

2. The tool first infeeds to the machining depth and then approaches the spigot contour from the side in a quadrant at machining feedrate.

3. The spigot is cleared in parallel with the contours from the outside in. The direction is determined by the machining direction (climb/conventional) (see "Changing program settings").

4. When the first plane of the spigot has been cleared, the tool retracts from the contour in a quadrant and then infeeds to the next machining depth.

5. The spigot is again approached in a quadrant and cleared in parallel with the contours from outside in.

6. Steps 4 and 5 are repeated until the programmed spigot depth is reached.

7. The tool moves back to the safety clearance at rapid traverse.

Contourmilling >

Spigot milling

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot milling" softkeys.

Select "Roughing" machining mode.

Parameters Description for roughing Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (only for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y, and for End face C/Peripheral surface C if the tool is inserted in the center for roughing) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type Roughing

Page 303: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-303

Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm mm

Retraction mode

If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between approach points. • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0), Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

Page 304: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-304 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.6.12 Removing residual material from a contour spigot

When you have milled a contour spigot and residual material remains in place, this is automatically detected by ShopTurn. You can use a suitable tool to remove this residual material without having to machine the whole spigot again, i.e. avoiding unnecessary idle motions. Material that remains as part of the finishing allowance is not residual material.

The residual material is calculated on the basis of the milling cutter

used for clearing.

If you mill several spigots and want to avoid unnecessary tool changeover, clear all the spigots first and then remove the residual material. In this case, for removing the residual material, you also have to enter a value for the "Reference tool TR" parameter that appears when you press the "All parameters" softkey. Then program as follows:

1. Contour blank 1 2. Contour spigot 1 3. Clear spigot 1 4. Contour blank 2 5. Contour spigot 2 6. Clear spigot 2 7. Contour blank 1 8. Contour spigot 1 9. Clear residual material spigot 1 10. Contour blank 2 11. Contour spigot 2 12. Clear residual material spigot 2

The "Residual material" function is a software option.

Contourmilling >

Spigot resid. mat.

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot resid. mat." softkeys.

Allparameters

Press the "All parameters" softkey if you want to enter additional parameters.

Page 305: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-305

Parameters Description Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Roughing

TR Reference tool for residual material

D Cutting edge of reference tool (1 or 2)

Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY DZ UXY UZ

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm mm

Page 306: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-306 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

C0 X0 X1 DYZ DX UYZ UX

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm mm

Retraction mode

If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between approach points. • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0), Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

5.6.13 Finishing the contour spigot

If you programmed a finishing allowance for the base or edge of the spigot in spigot milling, you still have to finish the spigot.

Separate blocks must be programmed for finishing the base and/or for

finishing the edge. In each case, the spigot will only be machined once.

You can program "Path milling" as an alternative to "Edge finishing". Optimization possibilities are also offered for the approach/retract strategy and the approach/retract mode. Then program as follows: 1. Contour blank 2. Contour spigot 3. Mill spigot (roughing) 4. Contour blank 5. Path milling (finishing) 6. Contour spigot 7. Path milling (finishing)

Contourmilling >

Spigot milling

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot milling" softkeys.

Select "Finish base" or "Finish edge" machining mode.

Page 307: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-307

Parameters Description of finishing the base Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining type

Finishing the base

Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm

X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

mm mm mm % mm mm

CP Z0 Z1 DXY UXY UZ

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the XY plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm

Page 308: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-308 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

C0 X0 X1 DYZ UYZ UX

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum infeed in the YZ plane Plane infeed in %: Ratio of plane infeed (mm) to milling cutter diameter (mm) Finishing allowance in plane Finishing allowance in depth

Degr. mm mm mm % mm mm

Retraction mode

If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between approach points. • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0), Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

Parameters Description of finishing the edge Units

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Machining mode

Finishing on the edge

Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm mm

X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 ∅ (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane

mm mm mm mm

Page 309: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-309

CP Z0 Z1 DZ UXY

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Depth with reference to Z0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (Z direction) Finishing allowance in plane

Degr. mm mm mm mm

C0 X0 X1 DX UYZ

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Depth with reference to X0 (abs. or inc.) Maximum depth infeed (X direction) Finishing allowance in plane

Degr. mm mm mm mm

Retraction mode

If more than one approach point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between approach points. • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no spigots or other elements in the machining range higher than Z0 (X0), Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

5.6.14 Chamfering a contour spigot

If you have planned edge breaking, mill a chamfer after that.

Contourmilling >

Spigot milling

Press the "Milling", "Contour milling" and "Spigot milling" softkeys.

Select "Chamfer" machining mode.

Parameters Description of finishing the edge

T, D, F, S, V See Section "Creating program blocks".

Position Select from 8 different positions: • End face/End face C – Front • End face/End face C – Rear • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Inner • Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C – Outer • End face Y – Front (only when Y axis exists) • End face Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Inner (only when Y axis exists) • Peripheral surface Y – Rear (only when Y axis exists)

Clamp/release spindle (for End face Y/Peripheral surface Y only) The function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Page 310: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.6 Contour milling

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-310 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Machining mode

Chamfer

Z0 FS ZFS

End face/End face C: Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Chamfer width; abs Insertion depth tool tip; abs or inc

mm mm mm

X0 FS ZFS

Peripheral surface/Peripheral surface C: Cylinder diameter ∅ (abs.) Chamfer width; abs Insertion depth tool tip; abs or inc

mm mm mm

CP Z0 FS ZFS

End face Y: Reference point Reference point in Z direction (abs.) Chamfer width; abs Insertion depth tool tip; abs or inc

Degr. mm mm mm

C0 X0 FS ZFS

Peripheral surface Y: Reference point Reference point in X direction (abs.) Chamfer width; abs

Insertion depth tool tip; abs or inc

Degr. mm mm mm

Retraction mode

If more than one insertion point is necessary, specify the retraction height to which the tool retracts between insertion points: • To retraction plane • Z0+safety clearance (for end face/end face C and end face Y only) or

X0+safety clearance (for peripheral surface/peripheral surface C and peripheral surface Y only)

If there are no islands larger than Z0 (X0) in the pocket area, Z0 + safety clearance (X0 + safety clearance) can be programmed as the retraction mode.

Page 311: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.7 Calling a subroutine

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-311

5.7 Calling a subroutine If you require the same machining steps in the programming of

different workpieces, you can define these machining steps in a separate routine. You can then call this subroutine in any programs. Identical machining steps therefore only have to be programmed once.

ShopTurn does not differentiate between main program and

subroutine. This means that you can call a "standard" sequence or G code program as subroutine in another sequence program. In this subroutine, you can also call another subroutine. The maximum nesting depth is 8 subroutines. You cannot insert subroutines among blocks chained by the control.

If you want to call a sequence program as a subroutine, the program must already have been calculated once (load or simulate program in Machine Auto mode). This is not necessary for G code subroutines.

The subroutine must always be stored in the NCK main memory (in a separate directory "XYZ" or in the "ShopTurn", "Part programs", and “Subroutines" directories).

If you want to call a subroutine located on another drive, you can use G code command "EXTCALL". References: /BEMsl/, HMI Embedded Operator's Guide SINUMERIK 840Dsl

Please note that ShopTurn evaluates the settings from the program header of the subroutine, excluding the blank settings, when the subroutine is called. These settings also remain active even after the subroutine has ended. If you wish to activate the settings from the program header for the main program again, you can make the settings again in the main program after calling the subroutine (see Section "Changing program settings").

Create a ShopTurn or G code program that you would like to call

as a subroutine in another program.

Place the cursor in the machining plan of the main program on the program block after which the subroutine call is to be inserted.

Page 312: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.7 Calling a subroutine

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-312 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Sub- routine >

Press the "Various" and "Subroutine" softkeys.

Enter the path of the subroutine if the desired subroutine is not

stored in the same directory as the main program.

List Path to enter ShopTurn ShopTurn Separate directory XYZ XYZ Part programs MPF Subroutines SPF Enter the name of the subroutine that you want to insert.

You only need to enter the file extension (*.mpf or *.spf) if the subroutine does not have the file extension specified for the directory in which the subroutine is stored.

List Specified file extension ShopTurn *.mpf Separate directory XYZ *.mpf Part programs *.mpf Subroutines *.spf

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The subroutine call is inserted in the main program.

Subroutine call"DRILL"

Subroutine call

Page 313: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.8 Repeating program blocks

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-313

5.8 Repeating program blocks If certain steps in the machining of a workpiece have to be executed

more than once, it is only necessary to program these steps once. ShopTurn allows you to repeat program blocks.

You must mark the program blocks that you want to repeat with a start

and end marker. You can then call these program blocks up to 9999 times again within a program. The markers must be unique, i.e. they must have different names. No names used in the NCK can be used for this.

You can also set markers and repeats after creating the program, but not within chained program blocks.

It is also possible to use the same marker as the end marker of the preceding program blocks and as the start marker for the following program blocks.

Start mark

End mark

Repetition

Repeating program blocks

Setmarker >

Press the "Various" and "Set marker" softkeys. Enter a name.

Press the "Accept" softkey. A start marker is inserted behind the current block.

Enter the program blocks that you want to repeat later.

Setmarker >

Press the "Various" and "Set marker" softkeys. Enter a name.

Press the "Accept" softkey. An end marker is inserted behind the current block.

Continue programming up to the point where you want to repeat the program blocks.

Repeat >

Press the "Various" and "Repeat" softkeys. Enter the names of the start and end markers and the number of

times the blocks are to be repeated.

Page 314: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-314 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The marked program blocks are repeated.

5.9 Machining with the counterspindle If your turning machine has a counterspindle, you can machine

workpieces using turning, drilling and milling functions on the front and rear faces without reclamping the workpiece manually. Before machining commences on the rear face, the counterspindle must grip the workpiece, remove it from the main spindle and move it to the new machining position. You can program these operations with the "Counterspindle" function.

ShopTurn offers the following five programming steps:

• Gripping: Gripping the workpiece with the counterspindle (with limit stop if necessary)

• Pulling: Pulling the workpiece out of the main spindle with the counterspindle

• Rear side: Moving the workpiece with the counterspindle to the new machining position

• Complete: Gripping, pulling (optionally with parting) and rear face steps

• Front face: Work offset for machining the next front face (for bars)

If you start to execute a program containing a counterspindle machining operation, the counterspindle is first retracted to the return position defined in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Work offsets In the case of the "Pulling" and "Rear face" functions, you must specify in which work offset ShopTurn should save the shifted coordinate system; you do not have to specify these work offsets beforehand. In the case of the "Front face" function, however, you must specify the work offset that you want to use.

To simplify the programming process, programming suggestions for three typical applications are provided below: • Machine main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machine

counterspindle • Machine counterspindle (without first transferring workpiece) • Machine bars

Page 315: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-315

Machine main spindle – Transfer workpiece – Machine counterspindle The programming for this operation might look like this:

Alternative 1: 1. Machine main spindle 2. Gripping 3. Pulling 4. Rear side 5. Machine counterspindle

Alternative 2: 1. Machine main spindle 2. Complete (gripping, pulling

and rear face) 3. Machine counterspindle

Gripping ShopTurn first synchronizes the main spindle and counterspindle. The counterspindle then moves towards the workpiece at rapid traverse to programmed position ZR and then continues at reduced feedrate FR to transfer position Z1. Whether it is the front edge or stop edge of the counterspindle that moves up to the position is defined in the "Spindles" screen form (see "Counterspindle settings"). As an alternative, the counterspindle moves to the limit stop as of a particular distance. This distance and the corresponding feedrate are programmed in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Teach park pos.

You can enter the XP and ZP coordinates from the park position of the tool during the gripping, or accept the current tool positions with the “Teach park pos.” softkey. Teaching the park position is possible only if you have selected the machine coordinate system (MCS = machine).

Teach angl. offset

If you specify an angular offset α1 between the main spindle and the counterspindle, this will have no effect on machining on the backside of the workpiece. You can enter the angle difference directly into the parameter mask or accept the current angular offset using the "Teach angl. offset" softkey.

Pulling The counterspindle pulls the workpiece out of the main spindle by amount Z1. ShopTurn shifts the coordinate system accordingly and saves the offset in the selected work offset.

Rear side The counterspindle moves with the workpiece at rapid traverse to the new machining position ZW. The workpiece zero moves too and shifts by ZV (with sign) from the front face to the rear face of the workpiece. The coordinate system is then transposed into a mirror image for machining on the rear face and saved in the selected work offset. Synchronous operation of both spindles is disabled. The counterspindle is now the master spindle.

Page 316: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-316 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Machine counterspindle When the rear face is machined, ShopTurn automatically transposes the coordinate system into a mirror image, i.e. you program the machining operation for the rear face as for the front face. Make sure that the Y axis points to the opposite direction during milling operations. If this is not wanted, then mirroring of the Y axis must be programmed.

Machine counterspindle (without first transferring workpiece) The programming might look like this: 1. Rear face

WO: Work offset is only activated ZV: Parameter is not calculated.

2. Machine counterspindle

Rear side Please note the following special features of the "Rear face" program step when machining on the counterspindle without first transferring the workpiece. The work offset that you choose in the parameterization screen form isonly activated and not calculated. This means that the workpiece zero for counterspindle machining should be stored in the work offset. In addition, parameter ZV is not calculated.

Machine bars If you use bars to produce your workpieces, you can machine several workpieces on the front and rear face by starting the program just once.

Machining of bars can be programmed as follows, for example: 1. Program header specifying the work offset in which the workpiece

zero is stored 2. Machine main spindle 3. Complete (pull blank: yes; Parting cycle: yes) 4. Parting 5. Machine counterspindle 6. End of program with number of workpieces to be machined

Alternatively you can program the machining of bars as follows: 1. Start marker 2. Machine main spindle 3. Complete (pull blank: yes; Parting cycle: yes) 4. Parting 5. Machine counterspindle 6. Front 7. End marker 8. Repeat from start to end marker

Page 317: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-317

Complete If you program the "Complete" program step, you must enter "Pull blank: Yes" and "Parting cycle: Yes" in the "Pulling" step. Then you can program the "Parting" function. The workpiece is then cut off after it has been gripped or pulled out of the main spindle. You do not need to specify the amount by which the workpiece is pulled out of the main spindle in this case as this is calculated from theparting cycle parameters. The two program blocks "Complete" and "Parting" are linked in the machining plan.

Front As soon as machining on the rear face of a workpiece is finished, machining on the front of the next workpiece starts. You can activate a work offset in the meantime for machining the front face using the "Front face" function. You will typically use the work offset that was active before the workpiece was gripped. The main spindle is now the master spindle again.

Teach park position and

angular offset

Manually rotate the counterspindle chuck to the desired position, and move the tool to the desired position.

Counter-spindle >

Press the "Various" and "Counterspindle" softkeys.

Select the “Gripping” or “Complete” programming step.

Select “MKS” tool under park position.

Teach park pos.

Press the “Teach park pos.” softkey.

The current tool park position will be saved.

Teach angl. offset

Press the “Teach angl. offset" softkey.

The current angular difference between the main and counter spindles will be saved.

Page 318: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-318 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Parameters Description Units

Function Select from five different functions: • Gripping • Pulling • Rear side • Front • Complete

Park position XP ZP Rinse chuck S Direction of rotation

Gripping: WCS: The park position is entered into the workpiece coordinate system MCS: The park position is entered into the machine coordinate system; teaching of the park position and the angular offset is possible Park position of the tool in the X direction (abs) Park position of tool in Z direction (abs) Rinse counterspindle chuck or not Spindle speed (main spindle and counterspindle) Direction of rotation (main spindle and counterspindle):

Direction of rotation clockwise (right)

Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)

No spindle rotation

mm mm rpm

α1 Z1 ZR FR Fixed stop

Angular offset of counterspindle on gripping Transfer position (abs.) Position at which traversal at reduced feedrate starts (abs or inc) Reduced feedrate Yes: The counterspindle comes to a halt a specified distance from the transfer position Z1 and then traverses at the specified feedrate as far as the limit stop. No: The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.

Degr. mm mm mm/min

Work offset Z1 F

Pulling: Work offset in which the coordinate system displaced by Z1 must be saved. Amount by which the workpiece is pulled out of the main spindle (inc) Feedrate

mm mm/min

Work offset ZnW ZV

Rear side: Work offset in which the coordinate system, which was shifted according to ZW and by ZV as well as mirrored in Z, must be saved. Machining position for special axis (abs.); machine coordinating system Workpiece zero offset in Z direction (inc, the sign is also evaluated)

mm mm

Work offset

Front face: Work offset for machining the next front face

Page 319: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.9 Machining with the counterspindle

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-319

Park position

XP ZP

Complete: WCS: The park position is entered into the workpiece coordinate system MCS: The park position is entered in the machine coordinate system; the teaching of the park position and the angular offset is possible Park position of tool in X direction (abs) Park position of tool in Z direction (abs)

mm mm

Rinse chuck S Direction of rotation

Gripping: Rinse counterspindle chuck or not Spindle speed (main spindle and counterspindle) Direction of rotation (main spindle and counterspindle):

Direction of rotation clockwise (right)

Direction of rotation counterclockwise (left)

No spindle rotation

rpm

α1 Z1 ZR FR Fixed stop

Angular offset of counterspindle on gripping Transfer position (abs.) Position at which traversal at reduced feedrate starts (abs or inc) Reduced feedrate Yes: The counterspindle comes to a halt a specified distance from the transfer position Z1 and then traverses at the specified feedrate as far as the limit stop. No: The counterspindle traverses to the transfer position Z1.

Degr. mm mm mm/min

Pull blank F Parting cycle

Pulling: Yes: Pull blank one blank length (preparation for next workpiece) No: Do not pull blank Feedrate for pulling Yes: The workpiece is parted after it has been pulled out. No: No automatic parting.

mm/min

Work offset ZnW ZV

Rear side: Work offset in which the coordinate system, which was shifted according to ZW and by ZV as well as mirrored in Z, must be saved. Machining position for special axis (abs.); machine coordinating system Workpiece zero offset in Z direction (inc, the sign is also evaluated)

mm mm

Page 320: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.10 Changing program settings

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-320 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.10 Changing program settings All parameters specified in the program header with the exception of

the blank shape and the unit of measurement can be changed at any point in the program. It is also possible to change the basic setting for the direction of rotation of machining in the case of milling.

The settings in the program header are modal, i.e. they remain active

until they are changed.

Retraction

Any changed return plane takes effect starting with the safety clearance of the last cycle, because the additional retraction from the next cycle is completed.

Machining direction

The machining direction of rotation (down-cut or up-cut) is defined as the direction of movement of the milling tooth with respect to the workpiece, i.e. ShopTurn evaluates this parameter in conjunction with the direction of rotation of the spindle for milling, with the exception of path milling. The basic setting for the direction of rotation of machining is programmed with a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Down-cut Up-cut

Direction of rotation of machining for milling a pocket on the end face

Settings >

Press the "Various" and "Settings" softkeys.

Enter the desired parameters. For a description of the parameters, see Section "Creating a new program".

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The new settings for the program are loaded.

Page 321: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.11 Calling work offsets

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-321

5.11 Calling work offsets You can call work offsets (G54, etc.) from any program.

You can use these offsets, for example, when you want to machine workpieces with various blank dimensions using the same program. The offset will, in this case, adapt the workpiece zero to the new blank.

You define the work offsets in the work offset list (see Section

"Defining work offsets"). You can also view the coordinates of the selected offset here.

Transfor- mation >

Workoffset >

Press the "Various", "Transformation", and "Work offset" softkeys.

Select one of the work offsets or the standard offset.

-or-

Enter the desired offset directly in the input field.

-or-

Work offset

Press the "Work offset" softkey.

The work offset list is displayed.

-and-

Select a work offset.

-and-

To program

Press the "To program" softkey.

The work offset is loaded into the parameterization screen form.

To deselect the work offsets, select the standard offset or enter zero inthe field.

Page 322: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.12 Defining coordinate transformations

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-322 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.12 Defining coordinate transformations To make programming easier, you can transform the coordinate

system. Use this possibility, for example, to rotate the coordinate system.

Coordinate transformations only apply in the current program.

You can define displacement, rotation, scaling or mirroring. You can select between a new or an additive coordinate transformation. In the case of a new coordinate transformation, all previously defined coordinate transformations are deselected. An additive coordinate transformation acts in addition to the currently selected coordinate transformations.

• Offset For each axis, you can program an offset of the zero point.

New offset Additive offset

• Rotation You can turn the X and Y axes through a specific angle. A positive angle corresponds to counterclockwise rotation.

New rotation Additive rotation

On turning machines without a physical Y axis, problems with the coordinate system can occur if the axis is rotated.

Page 323: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.12 Defining coordinate transformations

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-323

• C axis rotation You can turn the C axis through a specific angle to enable subsequent machining operations to be performed at a particular position on the end face or peripheral surface. The direction of rotation is set in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

New C axis rotation

Additive C axis rotation

• Scaling You can specify a scale factor for the active machining plane as well as for the tool axis. The programmed coordinates are then multiplied by this factor.

New scaling

Additive scaling

• Mirroring Furthermore, you can mirror all axes. Enter the axis to be mirrored in each case.

New mirroring Additive mirroring

Page 324: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.13 Programming the approach/return cycle

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-324 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Transfor-mation >

Press the "Various" and "Transformation" softkeys.

Offset > ...

Mirroring >

Select the coordinate transformation using the softkey.

Select whether you want to program a new or an additive coordinate transformation.

Enter the desired coordinates.

5.13 Programming the approach/return cycle If you wish to reduce the approach to or return from a machining cycle

or solve a complex geometric situation on approach/return, you can create a special cycle. In this case, ShopTurn ignores the standard approach/return strategy provided (see Section "Machining cycle approach and return").

You can insert the approach/return cycle between any sequence

program blocks, but not within chained blocks.

The starting point for the approach/return cycle is the safety clearance approached after the last machining operation.

If you want to perform a tool change, you can move the tool through a total of 3 positions (P1 to P3) to the tool change point and through a further 3 positions (P4 to P6) to the next starting point. If the tool does not need to be changed, however, you have a total of 6 positions available for the approach to the next starting position.

If 3 to 6 positions are not sufficient for the approach/return, you can call the cycle several times in succession to program further positions.

Caution

Note that the tool will move from the last position programmed in the approach/return cycle directly to the starting point for the next machining operation.

Page 325: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.13 Programming the approach/return cycle

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-325

Approach/Return

Press the "Strai. Circle" and "Approach/Return" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

F1 Feedrate for approach to first position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

Z1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

F2 Feedrate for approach to second position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X2 2nd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

Z2 2nd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

F3 Feedrate for approach to third position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X3 3rd position (inc or abs) mm

C3 3rd position (inc or abs) mm

Tool change TlChngPt: Approach tool change point from the last position programmed and change tool Direct: Do not change tool at tool change point, but at the last position programmed No: Do not change tool

T Tool name (not with tool change "no")

D Edge number (not with tool change "no")

F4 Feedrate for approach to fourth position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X4 4th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

Z4 4th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

F5 Feedrate for approach to fifth position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X5 5th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

Z5 5th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

F6 Feedrate for approach to sixth position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X6 6th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

Z6 6th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm

Page 326: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-326 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program You can program G code blocks in a sequence program. You can also

insert comments to explain the program.

The G code blocks in sequence programs are never checked when sequence programs are processed.

You will find a detailed description of G code blocks to DIN 66025 in:

References: /PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D /PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

You cannot insert G code blocks before the program header, after the end of the program or within a chained sequence of program blocks.

ShopTurn does not display G code blocks in the program graphics.

If you want to stop machining of the workpiece at specific points, you should program the G code command "M01" at these points in the process plan (see Section "Controlling the program run").

Caution If you use a G code command to move the tool into the retraction zonespecified in the program header, you must also move the tool out again. Otherwise a collision could occur as a result of the traversing movements in a subsequently programmed ShopTurn cycle.

In the machining plan of a sequence program, position the cursor

on the program block after which you want to insert a G code block.

Press the "Input" key.

Enter the G code commands or comments. The comment must always start with a semicolon (;).

The newly created G code block is marked with a "G" in front of the block number in the machining plan.

Page 327: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.14 Inserting G code into the sequence program

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-327

G code block

G code in sequence program

Page 328: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.15 Teaching

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-328 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.15 Teaching The "Teach” function enables you to program and execute machining

steps while simultaneously creating a subroutine for other workpieces.

The procedure for different variants of the teaching is described in the following:

• Teaching cycles • Teaching position samples • Teaching contour objects

5.15.1 Teaching a cycle

Each machining step is taught according to the following example:

Sequence of operations 1. Creating a program You create a new program and set the program header (see "Creating a new program").

2. Creating a machining step You define a machining step (see “Creating program blocks”).

3. Accepting the machining step Save the values with the “Accept” softkey. The parameter mask is closed and the work plan is displayed.

4. Execution Position the cursor on the program step and press the "Execute" softkey. A block search is automatically triggered.

5. NC Start Fit the tool with “Cycle Start”, and then start machining using the "Cycle Start" key.

Program the next machining step the same way if the machining provided the desired results, or repeat steps 2 through 5 for the program block.

You can simulate machining before every execution in order to control the machining results.

Page 329: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 11/2006 ShopTurn Functions5.15 Teaching

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 5-329

5.15.2 Teaching a position sample

You can teach any position sample.

Sequence of operations 1. Creating a program 2. Programming technology cycles and positions/position samples

Program the desired drilling/milling cycles and the position sample (see “Drilling", “Trimming”, and “Positions and Position sample”).

3. Execution Position the cursor on the position sample and press the "Execute" softkey. A block search is automatically triggered and you will receive a query.

4. Select the work step and the position sample. 5. NC Start

Fit the tool with “Cycle Start”, and then start machining using the "Cycle Start" key.

Program the next machining step the same way if the machining provided the desired results, or repeat steps 2 through 5 for the program block.

You can simulate machining before every execution in order to control the machining results.

Page 330: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

5 ShopTurn Functions 11/2006 5.15 Teaching

5

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 5-330 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

5.15.3 Teaching a contour object

You have the option of teaching contour objects for rotation andmilling operations.

Sequence of operations 1. Creating a program 2. Programming contours and technology cycles

Program the desired contours and cycles and define the individual contour elements (see "Creating a new contour", "Contour rotation", and "Contour trimming").

3. Execution Position the cursor on the desired work step and press the "Execute" softkey. A block search is automatically triggered.

4. NC Start Fit the tool with “Cycle Start”, and then start machining using the "Cycle Start" key.

Program the next machining step the same way if the machining provided the desired results, or repeat steps 2 through 4 for the program block.

You can simulate machining before every execution in order to control the machining results.

Page 331: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

6 11/2006 Working with Manual Machine 6

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 6-331

Working with Manual Machine 6.1 Manual machine...................................................................................................... 6-332

6.2 Zero offsets ............................................................................................................. 6-333

6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode........................................................ 6-333 6.3.1 Traversing the axes ................................................................................................ 6-334 6.3.2 Taper turning........................................................................................................... 6-335 6.3.3 Turning a straight line ............................................................................................. 6-336

6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode............................................ 6-337 6.4.1 Drilling with manual machine .................................................................................. 6-338 6.4.2 Turning with manual machine ................................................................................. 6-338 6.4.3 Milling with manual machine ................................................................................... 6-339

6.5 Simulation ............................................................................................................... 6-339

Page 332: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

6 Working with Manual Machine 11/2006 6.1 Manual machine

6

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 6-332 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

6.1 Manual machine "Manual Machine" offers a modified comprehensive spectrum of

functions for manual mode. You can carry out all important machining processes in “Manual” mode without writing a program.

For working in "Manual Machine" mode, you will need the "Manual Machine" software option.

The appearance of the displayed softkeys can vary, according to which coordinate system is set. Machining before the center of rotation is typical.

Please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications for this.

Main screen After running up the controller, the basic "Manual Machine" screen appears.

Basic manual machine screen

Machining options Workpieces can be machined in the following ways using "Manual Machine":

• Manual mode • Single-cycle machining

Page 333: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

6 11/2006 Working with Manual Machine6.2 Zero offsets

6

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 6-333

6.2 Zero offsets As an alternative to the "Set ZPO" function (see Sec. "Setting the

zero-point offset"), you have the option of inputting the values of the zero-point offset directly into the zero-point offsets list.

Activating the zero-point

offset

Select the "Work offset" softkey in the "Tools WO" operating section.

The work offset list appears.

Position the cursor on the desired zero-point offset.

ZPO Selection

Press the "ZPO selection” softkey

6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode In "manual" mode, you can directly carry out simple machining

processes without having to write a program. The following functions are available to you for machining in manual mode:

• Axis movements • Taper turning • Straight (plan or longitudinal turning)

Tool, spindle speed, and direction of spindle rotation are activated by "Cycle Start".

A change in feedrate immediately becomes active.

Page 334: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

6 Working with Manual Machine 11/2006 6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode

6

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 6-334 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

6.3.1 Traversing the axes

For preparatory actions and simple traversing movements, input the parameters directly into the "Manual" basic screen form.

Tool selection Select the desired tool in "T".

Input the feedrate and the spindle speed.

Select the direction of spindle rotation.

-or- Set the direction of rotation via the machine control panel.

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The spindle starts immediately after the tool is selected. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. Processing

X…

Select the axis to be traversed at the machine control panel.

… +

Press the "-" or "+" key on the machine control panel.

-or- Select the direction with the aid of the cross-switching lever.

The axes are moved at the set machining feedrate.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

The active direction is graphically displayed in the basic screen by means of a wind rose.

Page 335: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

6 11/2006 Working with Manual Machine6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode

6

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 6-335

Parameters Description Units

T Tool

F Machining feedrate mm/minmm/rev.

S1 Main spindle rpm m/min

S2 Tool spindle rpm

Direction of rotation

: Spindle is turning counterclockwise : Spindle rotates right

: Spindle stops : No change

6.3.2 Taper turning

The basic effective direction can be selected via the axis direction keys or via the cross-switching lever. In addition, a taper angle (α) can also be input.

The “taper turning” function is not available if two tool turrets are installed on the X axis of your machine,

Jog Taper turning

Press the "Taper turning" softkey in "Manual Machine" mode.

Select the tool, spindle, and spindle direction and specify the machining feedrate.

Input the desired angle α.

Selecting/deselecting the taper turning and changing the angle α is

only possible in the reset state.

Parameters Description Units

T, F, S See Sec. “Traversing the Axes“

α Turning of the coordinate system Degr.

Page 336: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

6 Working with Manual Machine 11/2006 6.3 Simple workpiece machining in manual mode

6

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 6-336 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

6.3.3 Turning a straight line

Use this function for simple, straight machining (e.g. face orlongitudinal turning).

Jog

Select the "Strght" softkey in "Manual Machine" mode.

All axes -or-

Xα -or-

Select the desired straight machining via the "All axes" softkeys, "Xα" or "Zα", and input the desired values for the traversing path or target position and the angle, if necessary.

Parameters Description Einheit

F See Sec. “Traversing the Axes“

X Z

Y C Z2

All Axes: Target position in the X direction (abs or inc) Target position in the Z direction (abs or inc) Target position in the Y direction (abs or inc) Target position of C axis of main spindle (abs or inc) Target position of an added axis, if it exists (abs. or inc.)

mm mm mm mm mm

Z

α

XAlpha Target position in direction X (abs. or inc.) Angle of the straight line to the X-axis

mm Degr.

X α

ZAlpha Target position in direction Z (abs. or inc.) Angle of the straight line to the Z-axis

mm Degrees

Page 337: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

6 11/2006 Working with Manual Machine6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode

6

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 6-337

6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode The following functions are available to you for comprehensive

machining in manual mode:

• Drilling (axial drilling, axial threads, drilling, reaming, deep-drilling, threads)

• Turning (stock removal, groove, undercut, threads, tapping) • Milling (pocket, shank, groove, multi-edged, engraving)

General machining

sequence For more complex machining processes, proceed in the following order:

1. Select the desired function via the corresponding softkey. Input the desired values in the parameter screen form.

2. Press the "OK" softkey in order to accept the values. The input screen form closes. A line with the specified parameters is displayed on the basic screen.

3. Press the "Cycle Start" key. The selected cycle is started.

You can return to the parameter screen form at any time to check and correct the inputs.

Press the "Cursor right" key to jump back to the input screen form.

Approaching and

returning When machining the workpiece, you traverse from the current position to the machining start point. After the machining process, the tool is returned along a direct path to the starting point.

Page 338: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

6 Working with Manual Machine 11/2006 6.4 More complex workpiece machining in manual mode

6

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 6-338 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

6.4.1 Drilling with manual machine

For drilling on the face or peripheral surface of a workpiece, thefollowing cycles are available to you under Automatic:

• Drilling centered • Thread centered • Centering • Boring • Reaming • Deep hole drilling • Tapping • Thread milling

The parameters of the input screen forms correspond to theparameters under Automatic (see Sec. "Drilling").

Drilling can only be performed at individual positions. To define theposition, input the parameters X0 and Y0 (face machining) or Y0 andZ0 (peripheral surface machining).

6.4.2 Turning with manual machine

For turning a workpiece, the following turning cycles are available toyou under Automatic:

• Stock removal • Recess • Undercut • Thread • Parting

The parameters of the input screen forms (with the exception of thread-cutting) correspond to the parameters under Automatic (see Sec. "Turning").

Thread cutting In addition to the functions that are made available by "thread-cutting"

under Automatic, you can insert idle cuts during the machining process under "Manual Machine."

You can interrupt the infeed of the cutting depth during the machining process by inserting idle cuts, in order to smooth the flanks for example.

Idle cut

You can insert idle cuts using the "Idle cut" softkey. This softkey only works during machining.

Page 339: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

6 11/2006 Working with Manual Machine6.5 Simulation

6

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 6-339

Reworking threads You can rework existing threads, when repairing previously cut threads for example or as the result of changes that arise from re-measuring (see Sec. "Reworking Threads").

If you want to rework some threads, input the initial plunge depth E (inc.). This is the depth that was reached during a previous machining.

By inputting the plunge depth, you avoid unnecessary idle cuts when reworking the threads.

6.4.3 Milling with manual machine

For milling simple geometric shapes, the following functions areavailable to you just as under Automatic:

• Rectangular pocket • Circular pocket • Rectangular spigot • Circular spigot • Longitudinal slot • Circumferential slot • Multiple edge • Engraving

The parameters of the input screen forms correspond to the parameters under Automatic (see Sec. "Milling").

Machining can only be performed at individual positions. To define the position, input the parameters X0 and Y0 (face machining) or Y0 and Z0 (peripheral surface machining).

6.5 Simulation For more complex machining processes, you can check the result of

your inputs with the aid of the simulation, without having to traverse the axes (see Sec. "Simulating Machining"). The execution of the work steps is graphically displayed on the screen during this.

In "Manual" mode, you can simulate a work step with an already opened and filled out parameter screen form.

Setting up a blank shape For the graphical display, a pre-defined blank shape is used. You can modify the blank as you like (such as for a G-code program) (see Sec. "Changing the blank shape for a G-code program").

Page 340: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

6 Working with Manual Machine 11/2006 6.5 Simulation

6

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 6-340 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Notes

Page 341: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

7 11/2006 G Code program 7

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 7-341

G Code program 7.1 Creating a G code program .................................................................................... 7-342

7.2 Executing a G code program .................................................................................. 7-345

7.3 G code editor........................................................................................................... 7-347

7.4 Arithmetic variables................................................................................................. 7-350

Page 342: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

7 G Code program 11/2006 7.1 Creating a G code program

7

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 7-342 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

7.1 Creating a G code program If you do not want to program a program with ShopTurn functions, you

can also create a G-code program with G-code commands in the ShopTurn operator interface.

You can program a G code command according to DIN 66025.

In addition, parameter screen forms provide you with support when measuring and programming contour, drilling, turning, and milling cycles. G code is generated from the individual forms, which you can recompile back to the screen forms. The measuring cycle support function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

For a detailed description of G code commands to DIN 66025, and of cycles and measuring cycles, please refer to: References: /PG/, Programming Guide Fundamentals SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D /PGA/, Programming Guide Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D /PGZ/, Programming Guide Cycles SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D /BNM/, User Manual Measuring Cycles SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

You can call up context-sensitive help, if you require more information on particular G code commands or cycle parameters on the PCU 50.3.

For a detailed description of the online help, please refer to: References: /BAD/, Operator's Guide HMI Advanced SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Creating a G code

program

Press the "Program" softkey.

Select the directory in which you want to create a new program.

New

G codeprogram

Press the "New" and "G code program" softkeys.

Enter a program name. Program names may be a maximum of 24 characters in length. You can use any letters (except umlauts), digits or the underscore symbol (_). ShopTurn automatically replaces lowercase letters with uppercase letters.

Page 343: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

7 11/2006 G Code program7.1 Creating a G code program

7

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 7-343

-or-

Press the "OK" softkey or the "Input" key.

The G code editor is opened.

Enter the desired G code commands.

Calling a tool Continue

> Tools

Select the "Continue" and "Tools" softkeys if you want to select a

tool from the tool list.

-and-

Place the cursor on the tool that you want to use for machining.

-and-

Toprogram

Press the "To program" softkey.

The selected tool is loaded into the G code editor. Text such as the following is displayed at the current cursor position in the G code editor: T="ROUGHING80"

In contrast to sequence programming, the settings stored in tool management do not automatically become active when the tool is called up. This means that, in addition to the tool, you must also program the toolchange (M6), the direction of spindle rotation (M3/M4), the spindle speed (S...) and the coolant (M7/M8).

Example: ... T="ROUGHING80" ;Call tool M6 ;Change tool M7 M3 S1=2000 ;Switch on coolant and main spindle ...

Cycle support Contour

... Turning

Using the softkey, select whether you would like support for

programming contours, drilling, milling, or turning cycles.

Create contour ...

Select the cycle you want via the softkey.

Enter the parameters.

OK

Press the "OK" softkey.

The cycle is transferred to the editor as G code.

Position the cursor on a cycle in the G code editor if you want to display the associated parameter screen form again.

Re-compile

Select the "Recompile" softkey.

The parameter screen for the selected cycle appears.

Page 344: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

7 G Code program 11/2006 7.1 Creating a G code program

7

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 7-344 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Edit

Select the "Edit" softkey if you want to return directly to the G code editor from a parameter screen form.

Measuring cycle support

Switch to the extended horizontal softkey bar.

Measure turning -or-

Measure milling

Press the "Measure turning" or "Measure milling".

Calibrate meas. cal. ...

Select the required measuring cycle via the softkey.

Enter the parameters.

OK

Press the "OK" softkey.

The measuring cycle is transferred to the editor as G code.

Position the cursor on a measuring cycle in the G code editor, if you want to display the associated parameter screen form again.

Re-compile

Select the "Recompile" softkey.

The parameter screen for the selected measuring cycle appears.

Edit

Select the "Edit" softkey if you want to return directly to the G code editor from a parameter screen form.

Online help (PCU 50.3) Place the cursor on a G code command in the G code editor or on

an input field in a cycle support parameter screen form.

Press the "Help" key.

The relevant help screen is displayed.

Page 345: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

7 11/2006 G Code program7.2 Executing a G code program

7

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 7-345

7.2 Executing a G code program During execution of a program, the workpiece is machined in

accordance with the programming on the machine. After the program is started in automatic mode, workpiece machining is performed automatically. You can, however, stop the program at any time and then resume execution later.

Execution of the program can be simulated graphically on the screen to enable you to check the programming result without moving the machine axes. For more information about simulation, see Section "Simulation".

The following prerequisites must be met before executing a program:

• The measuring system of the controller is synchronized with the machine.

• A program created in G code is available. • The necessary tool offsets and zero offsets have been entered. • The necessary safety interlocks implemented by the machine

manufacturer are activated.

When executing a G code program, the same functions are available as for executing a sequence program (see Section "Machining a workpiece").

Simulating G code

program

-or-

Press the softkey or the "Program" key.

Position the cursor on the desired G code program.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

The program is opened in the G code editor.

Press the "Simulation" softkey.

Execution of the program will be displayed in full on the screen in graphical form.

Edit

Select the "Edit" softkey if you want to return directly to the G code editor from the simulation screen.

Page 346: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

7 G Code program 11/2006 7.2 Executing a G code program

7

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 7-346 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Executing G code program

-or- Press the softkey or the "Program" key.

-and-

Position the cursor on the desired G code program.

-and-

Execute

Press the "Execute" softkey.

-or-

Press the "Execute" softkey if you are in the "Program" operating area.

ShopTurn automatically switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the G-code program.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

Execution of the G code program starts on the machine.

Page 347: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

7 11/2006 G Code program7.3 G code editor

7

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 7-347

7.3 G code editor You use the G code editor when you want to change the sequence of

program blocks within a G code program, delete program blocks or copy program blocks from one program to another.

When you want to change G code in a program that you are currently

executing, you can only change the G code blocks that have not yet been executed. These blocks are highlighted.

The following functions are available in the G code editor: • Select

You can select any G code. • Copy/paste

You can copy and paste G code within a program or between different programs.

• Cut You can cut and therefore delete any G code. However, the G code remains in the buffer, so you can still paste it in somewhere else.

• Search/replace In a G code program, you can search for a specific character string and replace it with a different one.

• To start/end You can jump easily to the start or end of the G code program.

• Numbering When you insert a new or copied G-code block between two existing G-code blocks, ShopTurn automatically assigns a new block number. This block number may be higher than the one in the following block. Using the "Re-number" function, you can renumber the G-code blocks in ascending order.

The G code editor will be opened automatically if you write or open a

G code program.

Selecting G code

Place the cursor at the position in the program where you want your selection to start.

Mark

Press the "Mark" softkey.

Position the cursor at the point in the program at which the highlighting should end.

The G code is selected.

Page 348: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

7 G Code program 11/2006 7.3 G code editor

7

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 7-348 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Copying G code

Select the G code that you want to copy.

Copy

Press the "Copy" softkey.

The G code is stored in buffer memory and remains there even if you switch to another program.

Pasting G code

Copy the G code that you want to insert.

Insert

Press the "Insert" softkey.

The copied G code is pasted from buffer memory into the text in front of the cursor.

Cutting G code

Select the G code that you want to cut.

Cut

Press the "Cut" softkey.

The selected G code is removed and stored in buffer memory.

Finding G code

Search

Press the "Search" softkey.

A new vertical softkey bar appears.

Enter the character string that you want to locate.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The G code program is searched for the character string in the forward direction. The character string is marked in the editor by the cursor.

Find next

Press the "Find next" softkey to continue the search, as necessary.

The next character string found is displayed.

Page 349: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

7 11/2006 G Code program7.3 G code editor

7

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 7-349

Finding and replacing G code

Search

Press the "Search" softkey.

A new vertical softkey bar appears.

Search/Replace

Press the "Search/Replace" softkey.

Enter the character string that you want to find and the characters that you want to insert in its place.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The G code program is searched for the character string in the forward direction. The character string is marked in the editor by the cursor.

Replace all

Press the "Replace all" softkey if you want to replace the character string throughout the entire G code program.

-or-

Find next

Press the "Find next" softkey if you want to continue the search without replacing the instance of the character string found.

-or-

Replace

Press the "Replace" softkey if you want to replace the character string at this point in the G code program.

Jumping to start/end

Continue >

ToStart

ToEnd

Select the "Continue" and "To start" or "To end" softkeys.

The beginning or end of the G code program is displayed.

Renumbering the G code blocks

Continue >

Renumber >

Select the "Continue" and "Renumber" softkeys.

Enter the number of the first block and the increment between block numbers (e.g. 1, 5, 10).

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The blocks are renumbered. You can cancel the numbering again by entering 0 for the increment or block number.

Page 350: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

7 G Code program 11/2006 7.4 Arithmetic variables

7

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 7-350 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

7.4 Arithmetic variables Arithmetic variables (R variables) are variables that you can use within

a G code program. G code programs can read and write the variables. You can assign a value in the R variable list to variables that can be read.

Input and deletion of variables can be disabled via the keyswitch.

Displaying R variables

-or-

Press the "Tools WOs" softkey or the "Offset" key.

Press the "R vari." softkey.

The R variable list is opened.

Finding R variables

Search

Press the "Search" softkey.

Enter the number of the variable you want to find.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The variable is displayed.

Changing R variables

Place the cursor on the input field of the variable that you want to change.

Enter the new value.

The new value of the variables is applied immediately.

Deleting R parameters

Place the cursor on the input field of the variable whose value you want to delete.

Press the "Backspace" key.

The value of the variable is deleted.

Page 351: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

8 11/2006 Working with a B axis 8

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 8-351

Working with a B axis 8.1 Turning machines with a B axis .............................................................................. 8-352

8.2 Tool alignment in turning......................................................................................... 8-354

8.3 Milling with a B axis................................................................................................. 8-354 8.3.1 Swiveling ................................................................................................................. 8-355 8.3.2 Approach/Return ..................................................................................................... 8-356

8.4 Position pattern ....................................................................................................... 8-358

8.5 Measuring a tool......................................................................................................8-359

8.6 Tool selection for manual mode.............................................................................. 8-360

Page 352: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

8 Working with a B axis 11/2006 8.1 Turning machines with a B axis

8

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 8-352 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

8.1 Turning machines with a B axis You can align milling and turning machines with an additional B axis.

The initial setting in which all tools must be dimensioned is B=0.

In turning operations, you can align the tool for special machining tasks via the B axis and C axis.

In milling operations, you can tilt the WCS via the B axis and C axis to allow milling and drilling on inclined surfaces.

The B axis is also used for aligning tools for end face and lateral surface machining.

Alignment angle β and γ Alignment angles β und γ are required for turning with tool alignment.

β: Rotation around the Y axis (with the B axis) γ: Rotation around the Z axis (with the tool spindle)

Page 353: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

8 11/2006 Working with a B axis8.1 Turning machines with a B axis

8

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 8-353

Turning Alignment angles allow you to perform a wide range of different turning operations (for example, internal and external longitudinal machining, surface machining with a main spindle and counterspindle, residual material) without changing the tool.

Display of the B axis The B axis is displayed in the following windows:

• Axis position display in actual value window, • In the “Positioning” window to position axes in manual operation, • You can operate the “Additional axes” softkey to have the B axis

displayed in the zero offset list and define its offset.

Page 354: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

8 Working with a B axis 11/2006 8.2 Tool alignment in turning

8

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 8-354 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

8.2 Tool alignment in turning The input fields for the β and γ angle for aligning the tool are available

in the tool screenformand in all turning screenforms.

β angle Two arrow settings are available for the main alignment of the tool, which you can toggle with the “Alternat.” softkey.

: β = 0° : β = 90°

You can also toggle to a free input field in which you enter an angle of your choice.

The counterspindle is programmed in exactly the same way as the main spindle.

The direction display of the arrows depends on the settings. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

γ angle In input field “γ”, you can enter two main directions (0° and 180°) via the “Alternat.” softkey.

You can also toggle to a free input field in which you enter an angle of your choice. However, this value may only differ slightly.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

8.3 Milling with a B axis No special entries are required for face machining and peripheral

surface machining.

Face milling is performed with β = 0° (G17). If you are machining on the face end of the counterspindle, γ = 0° (G17) corresponds to the opposite B axis position.

The peripheral surface is milled with β = 90° (G19), even if you aremachining with the counterspindle.

Machining on an inclined surface

You can define inclined surfaces in a swivel mask.

You can enter the rotation of the planes around the geometry axes (X, Y, Z) of the tool coordinate system just as described in the workpiece drawing. The rotation of the workpiece coordinate system in the program is then automatically converted to a rotation for the relevant Band C axis of the machine during machining.

Page 355: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

8 11/2006 Working with a B axis8.3 Milling with a B axis

8

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 8-355

The swivel axes are always rotated to place the tool axis perpendicular to the machining axis for machining. During machining, the rotary axes are then permanently set.

The coordinate system is adapted to the surface to be machined irrespective of the required rotary axis positions.

8.3.1 Swiveling

The main programming procedure is:

• Swivel the coordinate system into the plane to be machined via the swivel mask.

• Machine with the setting “Face B”. • If another machining type follows, swiveling is automatically

deselected.

The swiveled coordinates are maintained in the Reset status and after Power On. So you can still move out of an inclined hole, for example, with retraction in the +Z direction.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Swiveling is executed one axis at a time. In the case of axial swiveling, the coordinate system is rotated about each axis in turn, with each rotation starting from the previous rotation. The axis sequence can be freely selected.

Transfor- mation >

Swivel >

Press the "Various", "Transformation" and "Swivel" softkeys.

Initial setting

Press the "Initial setting" softkey to restore the initial state, i.e. to zero the values again. This is done, for example, to swivel the coordinate system back to its original orientation.

Page 356: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

8 Working with a B axis 11/2006 8.3 Milling with a B axis

8

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 8-356 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Parameters Description Units

T Tool name

RP Retraction plane for face end B mm C0 Positioning angle for machining surface Degr. X0 Reference point for rotation mm Y0 Reference point for rotation mm Z0 Reference point for rotation mm X Axis angle The sequence of the axes Degr. Y Axis angle can be altered as required Degr. Z Axis angle with "Alternat." Degr. X1 New zero point of rotated surface mm Y1 New zero point of rotated surface mm Z1 New zero point of rotated surface mm

Other additive transformations can be added to the offsets before (X0, Y0, Z0) or after (X1, Y1, Z1) swiveling (see Section "Work offsets").

8.3.2 Approach/return

If you want to optimize approach/return for swiveling with the B axis, you can create a special cycle that ignores the automatic approach/retraction strategy.

You can insert the approach/return cycle between any sequence program blocks, but not within chained blocks.

The starting point for the approach/return cycle is the safety clearance

approached after the last machining operation. If you want to perform a tool change, you can move the tool through a total of 3 positions (P1 to P3) to the tool change point and through a further 3 positions (P4 to P6) to the next starting point. The 1st, 3rd, and 6th position moves the linear axes, while the 2nd and 5th position moves the rotary axes. If no tool change is needed you can generate no more than 6 motion blocks.

The numbers (1 – 6) represent the processing sequence.

If 3 to 6 positions are not sufficient for the approach/return, you can call the cycle several times in succession to program further positions.

Page 357: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

8 11/2006 Working with a B axis8.3 Milling with a B axis

8

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 8-357

Caution

Note that the tool will move from the last position programmed in the approach/return cycle directly to the starting point for the next machining operation.

Parameters Description Units

F1 Feedrate for approach to first position Alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm Z1 1st position (inc or ∅ abs) mm Y1 Retraction to safety clearance mm β2 Beta angle for 1st swivel movement Degr. γ 2 Gamma angle for 1st swivel movement Degr. Followup The position of the tool tip is maintained during swiveling.

Please read the relevant information in the machine manufacturer's instruction manual

F3 Feedrate for approach to third position alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X3 3rd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm C3 3rd position (inc or ∅ abs) mm Tool change TlChngPt: Approach tool change point from the last position programmed

and change tool Direct: Do not change tool at tool change point, but at the last position programmed No: Do not change tool

T Tool name (not with tool change "no")

D Edge number (not with tool change "no")

F4 Feedrate for approach to fourth position alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X4 4th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm Z4 4th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm β5 Beta angle for 2nd swivel movement Degr. γ5 Gamma angle for 2nd swivel movement Degr. Followup The position of the workpiece tip is maintained during swiveling.

Please read the relevant information in the machine manufacturer's instruction manual

F6 Feedrate for approach to sixth position alternative to rapid traverse

mm/min

X6 6th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm Z6 6th position (inc or ∅ abs) mm Y6 Retraction to safety clearance mm

Page 358: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

8 Working with a B axis 11/2006 8.4 Position pattern

8

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 8-358 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

8.4 Position pattern In drilling and milling operations with face end B, position patterns "full

circle/pitch circle" provide the following options for machining on inclined surfaces

• with swivel plane • with C axis

Positions >

Press the "Drilling", "Positions" and "Full/Pitch Circle" softkeys.

Parameters Description Units

Z0 X0 Y0 α0 α1 R N Positioning

Face end B: on swivel plane Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to X axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Advance angle; when the first drill hole is complete, all remaining positions are approached with this angle (for pitch circle only) Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction. Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in clockwise direction. Radius of full circle Number of positions on the circle Straight line Next position is approached linearly at rapid traverse. Circular: Next position is approached along a circular path at the feedrate defined in a machine data code.

mm mm mm Degr. Degr. mm

Z0 X0 Y0 α0 α1

N

with C axis Z coordinate of the reference point (abs.) X coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Y coordinate of the reference point (abs.) Starting angle: Angle of 1st hole with reference to C axis. Positive angle: Full circle is rotated counterclockwise. Negative angle: Full circle is rotated in clockwise direction. Advance angle; when the first drill hole is complete, all remaining positions are approached with this angle (for pitch circle only) Positive angle: Further positions are rotated in counterclockwise direction. Negative angle: Further positions are rotated in clockwise direction. Number of positions on circle

mm mm mm Degr. Degr.

Page 359: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

8 11/2006 Working with a B axis8.5 Measuring a tool

8

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 8-359

8.5 Measuring a tool In order to determine the tool dimensions the alignment, i.e. the

β angle, must be entered.

For turning tools, an input field for the γ angle also appears.

β angle In order to measure milling and turning tools, you can make the two main settings β = 0° and β = 90° and set a value input field by toggling.

γ angle In order to measure turning tools, you can set the γ angle 0° and 180° by toggling.

Positioning rotary axes You can position rotary axes with NC Start. Before the length is set the rotary axis positions are checked. If they

deviate too much from the prescribed values, the message “Tool alignment beta inconsistent, press NC Start” (or gamma) is displayed.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Page 360: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

8 Working with a B axis 11/2006 8.6 Tool selection for manual mode

8

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 8-360 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

8.6 Tool selection for manual mode For preparatory tasks in manual mode, tool selection and spindle

control is always performed centrally in the T, S, M window (see also Section "Selecting the Tool and Spindle").

Alignment angle Turning tools:

To align the turning tools, you can toggle between settings β = 0° and β = 90° for the β angle and between settings 0° and 180° for the γ angle. In each case, you can also select an input field to enter any value.

Milling tools:

To align the milling tools you can toggle between settings β = 0° and β = 90°. In each case, you can also select an input field to enter any value.

Page 361: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

9 11/2006 Working with two tool holders 9

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 9-361

Working with two tool holders

9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders.......................................................................... 9-362

9.2 Programming with two tool holders......................................................................... 9-362

9.3 Measuring a tool......................................................................................................9-363

Page 362: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

9 Working with two tool holders 11/2006 9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders

9

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 9-362 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

9.1 Turning tools with two tool holders ShopTurn allows you to work on a turning machine with two tool

holders, both of which are installed on an X axis. The tool holders might be turrets, multifix, or a combination of both. The main machining is performed in the negative X axis direction. As both tool holders are installed on the same axis it is only ever possible to machine with one tool. The workpiece is always located between the two tool holders. The tool lengths of all tools, i.e. of both tool holders, have the same reference point, which is usually on tool holder 1. That is why the tool lengths of the tools of the second tool holder are always longer than those of the tools on the first tool holder.

9.2 Programming with two tool holders

You always program in the basic coordinate system (WCS of the first tool holder). You do not have to specify in which tool holder the tool is inserted.

If a tool on the second tool holder is selected, the X and Y axes are mirrored and the main spindle and counter spindle are offset (rotated) by 180°.

Page 363: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

9 11/2006 Working with two tool holders9.3 Measuring a tool

9

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 9-363

In the simulation the tool is always displayed on the correct side, as it will be used on the machine.

The programmed C offset around 180° only affects C axes, not spindles.

It is not possible to machine a thread with tools that are distributed between both tool holders.

G Code programming The following points must be taken into account in G code programming. • After a tool change, mirroring of the tools on the second tool

holder is automatically activated. • When a TRANSMIT command is programmed, mirroring of the

tools on the second tool holder is automatically activated. Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

9.3 Measuring a tool Toggle settings "Position 1" and "Position 2" are available for

scratching for tool measurement. Here you can set in which tool holder the tool to be measured is located.

Page 364: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

9 Working with two tool holders 11/2006 9.3 Measuring a tool

9

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 9-364 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Notes

Page 365: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 11/2006 Tool management 10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 10-365

Tool management 10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine ............................................................. 10-366

10.2 Entering new tools in the tool list .......................................................................... 10-372 10.2.1 Creating a new tool ............................................................................................... 10-372 10.2.2 Setting up more than one edge per tool ............................................................... 10-374 10.2.3 Creating a replacement tool.................................................................................. 10-375

10.3 Sorting tools .......................................................................................................... 10-376

10.4 Deleting tools from the tool list.............................................................................. 10-376

10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine ............................................... 10-377

10.6 Relocating a tool ................................................................................................... 10-379

10.7 Positioning the magazine...................................................................................... 10-381

10.8 Entering tool wear data ......................................................................................... 10-381

10.9 Activating tool monitoring...................................................................................... 10-382

10.10 Magazine location management........................................................................... 10-384

Page 366: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 Tool management 11/2006 10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 10-366 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine Various tools are used for machining workpieces. The geometry and

technology data of these tools must be known to ShopTurn before you can execute a program (see Sec. "Setting up the Machine"). ShopTurn provides the "Tool list", "Tool wear list" and "Magazine list" screen forms for managing your tools. With these, you can also manage tools that are not located in the revolver (magazine). The various lists can possibly have been changed by the machine manufacturer, in comparison to the following description.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Tool list You must enter all the tools that you want to use on the turning machine in the tools list. The tools that are in the tool turret must be assigned to specific magazine locations. In addition, you have the capability of sorting or deleting tools at this point.

Tool list

Loc. Location number in the magazine

The tool’s location number, which is located in the revolver in the machining position, has a gray background.

If you are working with several magazines, then you will first see the magazine number and then the location number inside the magazine (e.g. 1/10). Tools that are not currently located in the magazine are displayed without a location number. (You will find these tools when sorting for a magazine location at the end of the tool list.)

Page 367: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 11/2006 Tool management10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 10-367

For chain and disk magazines, the locations for a spindle and a dual-gripper can also be displayed.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Spindle location

Locations for grippers 1 and 2

Type Tool type and cutting edge position Using the "Alternative" key, you can change the tool’s cutting edge position.

Tool name The tool is identified by its name. The tool name can be specified as text or numbers.

DP Duplo-number of the sister tool (replacement tool) (DP 1 = original tool, DP 2 = first replacement tool, DP 3 = second replacement tool, etc.)

Tool offset data You can find a detailed description of the tool offset data in Sec.

"Setting-up the Machine" (Section "Tools").

(D No.) edge The tool offset data shown here is valid for the currently selected cutting edge of a tool.

Length X Tool length compensation in the X direction

Length Z Tool length compensation in the Z direction

Radius or ∅ Radius or diameter of the tool For milling and drilling tools, you can also specify the radius or the diameter. For turning tools, you always specify the cutting edge radius. A machine data code is used to switch from radius to diameter specification.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Reference direction for the holder angle

The holder angle of a cutting tool The holder angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when machining rear cuts.

The plate angle of a cutting tool The plate angle of a cutting tool is taken into consideration when machining rear cuts.

Lead Pitch of a screw tap in mm/rev, inch/rev, turns/", or MODUL

Drill ∅ Diameter of the drill hole for a rotary drill

Plat.width Plate width of a pin The plate width needs ShopTurn for calculating the groove cycles.

Plat.length The plate length of a cutting tool or pin

Page 368: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 Tool management 11/2006 10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 10-368 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

The plate length needs ShopTurn for displaying the tools during the program execution simulation.

N Number of teeth for a milling cutter The number of teeth for a milling machine From this, the controller internally calculates the rotational feedrate if the feedrate is set in mm/tooth in the program.

Angle of the tool tip for a drill When drilling, if you want to plunge as far as the shaft and not only as far as the tool tip, the controller takes the angle of the drill tip into consideration.

Tool-specific specifications

Specification of the spindle’s direction of rotation The direction of the spindle’s rotation is relative to the tool spindle for powered tools (drilling and milling machines) and to the main or counter-spindle for turning tools.

If you are using a drilling or milling machine for "axial drilling" or "axial threading", the specified direction of rotation is relative to the cutting direction of the tool. The main spindle then rotates adapting to the tool.

CW spindle rotation

CCW spindle rotation

Spindle not switched on

Coolant supply 1 and 2 (e.g. internal and external cooling) ON/OFF during use of this tool

Coolant ON

Coolant OFF Observe that some machines do not have a coolant supply.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Page 369: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 11/2006 Tool management10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 10-369

Multifix

If you use a multifix tool holder, the tool list looks like the following:

Tool list for a multifix tool holder

If you use multifix tool holders, the tool change takes place manually, i.e. the tools are swapped in and out by hand.

Tool selection for multifix tool holders

Tool selection

In the tool list, select the desired tool and activate it (the values of the tool) with the aid of the “Tool selection” softkey.

Page 370: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 Tool management 11/2006 10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 10-370 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Tool wear list You must enter the wear data for your tools in the tool wear list. ShopTurn takes this data into account on machining the workpiece. You can also activate tool monitoring here as well as disable tools or identify them as oversized.

Tool wear list

Loc., Type, Tool Name, DP

Display of magazine loc. number, tool type, and cutting edge position, text/number designation of the tool and duplo number

(D No.) edge The displayed wear data is relative to the selected cutting edge of the tool.

∆ Length X Wear in the X direction

∆ Length Z Wear in the Z direction

∆ Radius or ∆ ∅ Wear of the radius or diameter

TC Tool monitoring through service life (T), quantity (C) or wear (W)

Prewarning limit Pre-warning limit of service life, quantity, or wear

Service life Quantity Wear

Service life of the tool Quantity of the finished workpieces Maximum allowable tool wear

Tool condition (last two columns)

Tool is disabled for machining (G) or over-sized (U).

Page 371: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 11/2006 Tool management10.1 Tool list, tool wear list and tool magazine

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 10-371

Tool magazine In the magazine list, you can disable or enable individual magazine locations.

Magazine list

Loc., Type, Tool Name, DP

Display of magazine loc. number, tool type, and cutting edge position, text/number designation of the tool and duplo number

Location disable Disabling of the magazine location

Tool condition Display of the specified tool condition in the tool wear list

Page 372: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 Tool management 11/2006 10.2 Entering new tools in the tool list

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 10-372 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

10.2 Entering new tools in the tool list You can input tools and their accompanying offset data directly into

the tool list or you can simply read-in existing tool data from outside of tool management (see Sec. "Securing/reading-in tool/zero-point data").

10.2.1 Creating a new tool

When you want to create a new tool, ShopTurn offers a range of generally available tool types. The tool type determines what geometry data you have to enter and how it is calculated.

Possible tool types

The rotary drill can be used for centric drilling and turning.

Create tool Install the new tool in the tool turret.

Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Position the cursor on the location in the tool list that the tool occupies in the revolver. The location must still be empty in the tool list.

New >tool

Press the "New tool" softkey.

Roughingtool ...

3D_Probe

Select the desired tool type and the cutting edge position using the softkeys. Using the "Additional" softkey, additional tool types or cutting edge positions are made available to you.

Page 373: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 11/2006 Tool management10.2 Entering new tools in the tool list

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 10-373

The new tool is created and automatically assumes the name of the selected tool type.

Enter a unique tool name. You can edit the tool name as required. A tool name may contain a maximum of 17 characters. You can use letters, digits, the underscore symbol (_), periods (".") and slashes ("/").

If you assign a tool name that already exists, the "Create a duplo tool" window appears. You can decide whether you would like to create a sister tool (see Sec. "Creating a sister tool").

Enter the offset data of the tool.

-or-

If you later want to change the cutting edge position of the tool, position the cursor in the "Type" column and select one of the preset options using the "Alternat." softkey or the "Select" key.

Changing tool name You have the option of later changing a tool’s name.

Position the cursor in the "Tool name" column and enter the desired name.

If you enter a tool name that already exists, the "Create a duplo tool" window appears. You are asked whether a duplo tool should be created.

Do not rename

Press the "Do not rename" softkey if you do not want to create a sister tool.

Enter a new tool name.

Abort

Using the "Abort" softkey, you can cancel the process at any time.

Page 374: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 Tool management 11/2006 10.2 Entering new tools in the tool list

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 10-374 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

10.2.2 Setting up more than one edge per tool

In the case of tools with more than one cutting edge, a separate set of offset data is assigned to each cutting edge. You can set up a total of 9 edges for each tool.

There must be no gaps between the edges, i.e. if 3 edges are required for a tool, these must be edges 1 to 3.

Follow the instructions given above to set up tools with more than one

edge in the tool list and enter the offset data for the 1st edge.

Cutting edges >

Newedge

Then select the "Cutting edges" and "New edge" softkeys.

Instead of the input fields for the first cutting edge, the offset data input fields for the second cutting edge are displayed.

Select another cutting edge position if appropriate.

Enter the offset data for the second cutting edge.

Repeat this process if you wish to create more tool edge offset data.

Deleteedge

Select the "Delete edge" softkey if you want to delete the tool edge offset data for an edge. You can only delete the data for the edge with the highest edge number.

D No. +

D No. –

By selecting softkey "D No. +" or "D No. –", you can display the offset data for the edge with the next highest or next lowest edge number respectively.

Page 375: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 11/2006 Tool management10.2 Entering new tools in the tool list

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 10-375

10.2.3 Creating a replacement tool

A replacement is a tool that you can use for the same machining beingperformed by an already input tool. You can use it, for example, to replace a broken tool.

For each tool in the tool list, you can create several replacement tools. The duplo number 1 is always assigned to the original tool and duplo numbers 2, 3, etc. are assigned to the replacement tools. For sister tools, the following data must agree with that of the original tool: • Tool type • Length of cutting edge • Tool radius • Direction of rotation • Coolant

New >

tool Create the sister tool as a new tool.

(see Sec. "Creating a new tool")

Assign the same name as the original tool to the replacement tool.

The “Create duplo tool” window is displayed.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The sister tool automatically receives the next available duplo number.

Input the tool offset data of the tool.

Page 376: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 Tool management 11/2006 10.3 Sorting tools

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 10-376 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

10.3 Sorting tools When you are working with large magazines or several magazines, it

is useful to display the tools sorted according to different criteria. Then you will be able to find a specific tool more easily in the lists.

-or-

Select the "Tool list" or “Tool wear” softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating section.

Sort >

Press the "Sort" softkey.

Tomagazine -or-

To name

-or- To type

-or- To T-number

Activate one of the softkeys to choose the sort criterion.

The tools are listed in the new order.

10.4 Deleting tools from the tool list Tools that are no longer in use can be deleted from the tool list for a

clearer overview.

Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Place the cursor on the tool that you would like to delete.

Delete tool

Delete

Press the "Delete tool" softkey.

Press the "Delete" softkey.

The tool data of the selected tool is deleted and the magazine location is enabled again.

Page 377: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 11/2006 Tool management10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 10-377

10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine You can unload tools in the magazine that you are not using at

present. ShopTurn then automatically saves the tool data in the tool list outside the magazine. Should you want to use the tool again later, simply load the tool with the tool data into the corresponding magazine location again. Then the same tool data does not have to be entered more than once.

Loading and unloading of tools into and out of magazine locations

must be enabled in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

When loading, ShopTurn automatically opens an empty space where you can load a tool. The magazine in which ShopTurn searches for an empty location first is stored in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Also when loading, you can directly specify an empty magazine location or define in which magazine ShopTurn should search for an empty location.

If your machine has only one magazine, you simply need to enter the location number you require when loading the tool, not the magazine number.

If a spindle location is displayed in the tool list, you can also change a tool directly into or out of the spindle. You can lock the loading and unloading via machine data.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Loading a tool into the magazine

Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the magazine (if the tools are sorted according to magazine location number you will find it at the end of the tool list).

Load

Press the "Load" softkey.

The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

Press the "OK" softkey to load the tool into the suggested location.

-or-

Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.

Page 378: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 Tool management 11/2006 10.5 Loading/unloading a tool into/out of the magazine

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 10-378 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

-or-

Spindle

Press the "Spindle" and "OK" softkeys to load a tool into the spindle.

The tool is loaded into the specified magazine location.

Finding an empty location in the magazine and loading the tool

Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Place the cursor on the tool that you want to load into the magazine.

Load

Press the "Load" softkey.

The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if you wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.

-or-

Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you wish to search for an empty location in all magazines.

Press the "OK" softkey.

An empty location is suggested.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The tool is loaded into the suggested magazine location.

Unloading an individual

tool from the magazine

Select the "Tool list" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Position the cursor on the tool that you want to unload.

Unload

Press the "Unload" softkey.

The tool is unloaded from the magazine.

Page 379: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 11/2006 Tool management10.6 Relocating a tool

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 10-379

Unloading all tools from the magazine

Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Unload all

Unload

Press the "Unload all" and "Unload" softkeys.

All tools are unloaded from the magazine.

Abort

You can abort the unloading process at any time by pressing the "Abort" softkey. The current tool is unloaded and then the process is aborted. The unloading process is also aborted if you exit the magazine list.

10.6 Relocating a tool Tools can be relocated within magazines or between different

magazines, which means that you do not have to unload tools from the magazine in order to load them into a different location.

ShopTurn automatically suggests an empty location to which you can

relocate the tool. The magazine in which ShopTurn searches for an empty location first is stored in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

You can also specify an empty magazine location directly or define the magazine ShopTurn should search for an empty location.

If your machine has just one magazine, you only need to enter the location number you require, not the magazine number.

If a spindle location is shown in the tool list, you can also attach or detach a tool directly to or from the spindle.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Page 380: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 Tool management 11/2006 10.6 Relocating a tool

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 10-380 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Specifying an empty location

Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different magazine location.

Relocate

Press the "Relocate" softkey.

The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

Press the "OK" softkey to relocate the tool to the suggested location.

-or-

Enter the location number you require and press the "OK" softkey.

-or-

Spindle

Press the "Spindle" and "OK" softkeys to load a tool into the spindle.

The tool is relocated to the specified magazine location.

Finding an empty location

Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Place the cursor on the tool that you wish to relocate to a different magazine location.

Relocate

Press the "Relocate" softkey.

The "Empty location" window appears. The "Location" field is initialized with the number of the first empty magazine location.

Enter the magazine number and a "0" for the location number if you wish to search for an empty location in a particular magazine.

-or-

Enter a "0" for the magazine number and location number if you wish to search for an empty location in all magazines.

Press the "OK" softkey.

An empty location is suggested.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The tool is relocated to the suggested magazine location.

Page 381: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 11/2006 Tool management10.7 Positioning the magazine

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 10-381

10.7 Positioning the magazine You can position magazine locations directly on the loading point.

Positioning a magazine

location

Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Position the cursor on the magazine location that you would like to position on the loading point.

Position

Press the "Position" softkey.

The magazine location is positioned on the loading point.

10.8 Entering tool wear data Tools that are in use for long periods are subject to wear. You can

measure this wear and enter it in the tool wear list. ShopTurn then takes this information into account when calculating the tool length or radius compensation. This ensures a consistent accuracy in workpiece machining.

When you input the wear values, ShopTurn checks whether or not the

values exceed an incremental or absolute upper limit. The incremental upper limit indicates the maximum difference between the previous and new wear value. The absolute upper limit indicates the maximum total value that you can enter. The upper limits are set in a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Select the "Tool wear" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Place the cursor on the tool whose wear data you want to enter.

Enter the differences for length (∆Length X, ∆Length Z) and radius/diameter (∆Radius/∆∅) in the appropriate columns.

The wear data entered is added to the radius but subtracted from the tool length. A positive differential value for the radius therefore corresponds to an oversize (e.g. for subsequent grinding).

Page 382: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 Tool management 11/2006 10.9 Activating tool monitoring

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 10-382 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

10.9 Activating tool monitoring ShopTurn allows you to monitor the tool life of the tools automatically

to ensure constant machining quality.

You can also disable tools that you no longer want to use or identify them as oversize.

Tool monitoring can be activated via a machine data code.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Tool life (T) With the tool life T (Time), the service life for a tool with machining feedrate is monitored in minutes. When the remaining tool life is = 0, the tool is set to "disabled". The tool is not put into operation on the next tool change. If a replacement tool is available, it is inserted in its place. Tool life is monitored on the basis of the selected tool cutting edge.

Count (C) With the count C, the number of workpieces machined by the tool is counted. The tool is also disabled in this case, when the remainder reaches "0".

Wear (W) With wear W, the greatest value in the wear parameters ∆ Length X, ∆ Length Z, or ∆ Radius or ∆ ∅ in the wear list is monitored. Here, too, the tool is disabled if one of the wear parameters reaches the value forwear W.

The wear monitoring function must be set up by the machine manufacturer.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. Pre-warning limit The pre-warning limit specifies a tool life, workpiece count or wear at

which the first warning is displayed. The value for output of a warning due to the wear stage reached is calculated from the difference between the maximum wear and the warning limit entered.

Disabled (G) Individual tools can also be disabled manually if you no longer want to use them for workpiece machining.

Oversize (U) In the case of oversize tools, neighboring magazine locations (left and right adjacent location) are only reserved alternately, i.e. you can only insert the next tool in the next magazine location but one. (This can also contain an oversize tool.)

Page 383: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 11/2006 Tool management10.9 Activating tool monitoring

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 10-383

Monitoring tool use

Select the "Tool wear" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Position the cursor on the tool that you want to monitor.

In the column "T/C" select the parameter that you wish to monitor (T = Tool life, C = Count, W = Wear).

Enter a pre-warning limit for the tool life, count, or wear.

Enter the scheduled service life for the tool, the scheduled number of workpieces to be machined or the maximum permissible wear.

The tool is disabled when the tool life, count or wear is reached.

If you wish to monitor the count, you must also insert the following G code commands before the end of the program in every program that calls the tools to be monitored: SETPIECE(1) ; increase count by 1 SETPIECE(0) ; delete T no.

Entering tool statuses

Select the "Tool wear" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Place the cursor on a tool.

Select the option "G" in the first field of the last column if you want to disable the tool for machining.

-or-

Select the option "U" in the second field of the last column if you want to mark the tool as oversize.

The tool disable or location disable for neighboring magazine locations is now active.

Page 384: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

10 Tool management 11/2006 10.10 Magazine location management

10

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 10-384 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

10.10 Magazine location management If a magazine location is defective, or when an oversize tool requires

more than half a neighboring location, you can disable the magazine location.

It is no longer possible to assign any tool data to a disabled magazine

location.

In the "Tool condition" columns, you can also read whether a tool is disabled (G) or over-sized (U). You can change the tool conditions in the tool wear list (see Sec. "Activating tool monitoring").

Disable magazine

location

Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Place the cursor on the relevant empty magazine location in the "Location disable" column.

Press the "Alternat." softkey.

The letter "G" appears as a symbol for the disabling of the location.

Enable magazine location

Select the "Magazine" softkey in the "Tools WOs" operating area.

Place the cursor on an empty magazine location in the "Location disable" column.

Press the "Alternat." softkey.

The letter "G" is no longer visible and the magazine location is now free again.

Page 385: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management 11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-385

Program management

11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn...................................................................... 11-386

11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded) ............................. 11-387 11.2.1 Opening the program............................................................................................ 11-389 11.2.2 Program execution................................................................................................ 11-390 11.2.3 Running a G code program from USB/network drive ........................................... 11-391 11.2.4 Create a new directory/program ........................................................................... 11-392 11.2.5 Selecting several programs .................................................................................. 11-393 11.2.6 Copying/renaming a directory or program ............................................................ 11-394 11.2.7 Deleting a directory/program................................................................................. 11-395 11.2.8 Backing up/importing tool or zero point data ........................................................ 11-396

11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)........................................... 11-399 11.3.1 Opening the program............................................................................................ 11-401 11.3.2 Program execution................................................................................................ 11-402 11.3.3 Loading/unloading a program ............................................................................... 11-403 11.3.4 Executing a G code program from the hard disk, floppy disk or network drive .... 11-404 11.3.5 Creating a new directory/program......................................................................... 11-406 11.3.6 Selecting several programs .................................................................................. 11-407 11.3.7 Copying/renaming/moving a directory or program................................................ 11-408 11.3.8 Deleting a directory/program................................................................................. 11-410 11.3.9 Backing up/importing tool or zero point data ........................................................ 11-410

Page 386: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-386 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

11.1 Managing programs with ShopTurn All the programs for workpiece machining that you have created in

ShopTurn are stored in the NCK-working memory. You can access these programs at any time via the Program Manager for execution, editing, copying, or renaming. Programs that you no longer require can be deleted to release their storage space.

For exchanging programs and data with other workstations, ShopTurn provides you with various options:

• Own hard disk (PCU 50.3 only) • CompactFlash card • Disk drive (PCU 50.3 only) • USB network connection

The following sections explain either the program management of ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded) or the PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced). Find out which version of ShopTurn you are running and then read either section "Managing Programs with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded)" or "Managing Programs with PCU 50.3".

Page 387: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-387

11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded)

For the ShopTurn variant on the NCU (HMI Embedded), all the programs and data are always kept in the NCK work memory. In addition, the directory management of a USB/network drive can be displayed.

ShopTurn user interface on NCU (HMI Embedded)

NC main memory

editedit

USB/Network drive

ShopTurn programsShopTurn subroutinesG code programs

ShopTurn programsShopTurn subroutinesG code programs

Data storage with ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded)

You will find an overview of all directories and programs in the Program Manager.

Program manager for ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded)

In the horizontal softkey bar, you can select the storage medium that contains the directories and programs that you want to display. In addition to the "NC" softkey, via which the data of the NCK-work memory can be displayed, another 8 softkeys can allow you to display the directories and programs of USB/network drives and the CF-card

Page 388: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-388 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

drive. The "USB Front" softkey is preset to the default.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions. In the overview, the symbols in the left-hand column have the

following meaning:

List

Program

Zero point/tool data

The directories and programs are always listed complete with the following information: • Name

The name can be up to 24 characters long. For data transfer to external systems, the name is truncated to 8 characters.

• Type Directory: WPD Program: MPF Zero point/tool data: INI

• Size (in bytes) • Date/time (of creation or last change)

You can find additional information for data-handling, selecting and executing a program in: References: /BEM/, HMI Embedded sl Operator's Guide

In the "TEMP" directory, ShopTurn stores the programs that are created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.

Above the horizontal softkey bar, you will find specifications for memory space management in the NCK.

Opening the directory

-or-

Press the "Program" softkey or the "Program Manager" key.

The directory overview is displayed.

...

Select the storage medium using the softkey.

Place the cursor on the directory that you want to open.

Page 389: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-389

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

All the programs in this directory are displayed.

Returning to the next highest directory level

Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor in any line.

-or-

Place the cursor on the Return line.

-and-

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.

The next highest directory level is displayed.

11.2.1 Opening the program

To view a program in more detail or modify it, you must display the machining plan for the program.

Press the "Program" softkey.

The directory overview is displayed.

Place the cursor on the program that you want to open.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The machining plan of the program is displayed.

Page 390: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-390 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

11.2.2 Program execution

You can select any program that is stored in your system at any time to machine workpieces automatically.

If you want to execute a program that was created on another

machine, you must observe the following: If, on the other machine, the positive direction of rotation of the C-axis is set the other way around, you must mirror all of the position data in the program that was programmed using the parameter "C" ("C0", "CP"). This means that you change the preceding symbol of the position data.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the program that you want to execute.

Execute

Press the "Execute" softkey.

ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the program.

Cycle Start

Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a workpiece".)

If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area, press the "Execute" softkey to load the program in "Machine Auto" mode. Then start machining of the workpiece by pressing the "Cycle Start" key.

Page 391: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-391

11.2.3 Running a G code program from USB/network drive

If the capacity of your NCK work memory is already close to being exhausted, you can also have G-code programs executed from the USB/network drives (e.g. USB flash drive). In this way, instead of the entire G-code program being loaded into the NCK memory, only the first part of it is loaded. Subsequent program blocks are then continuously reloaded as the first part is executed.

The G-code program remains stored on the USB/network drive while executing from it.

Sequence programs cannot be executed from the USB or network drive.

Open the Program Manager.

Via the softkey, select the USB/network drive or local USB connection.

Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code program you want to execute.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

The directory opens.

Place the cursor on the G code program you want to execute.

Continue >

Exec. from hard disk

Select the "Continue" and "Exec. from hard disc" softkeys.

ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the G-code program.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a workpiece".) The program contents are continuously reloaded into the NCK work memory as the machining progresses.

Page 392: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-392 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

11.2.4 Create a new directory/program

Directory structures help you to manage your program and data transparently. You can create any number of subdirectories for this purpose in a directory. You can create programs and their program blocks In a sub-directory/directory (see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program").The new program is automatically saved for you in the NCK work memory.

Creating a directory

Open the Program Manager.

New >

Directory

Press the "New" and "Directory" softkeys.

Enter a new directory name.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The new directory is created.

Creating a program

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a new program.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

New

Press the "New" softkey.

ShopTurnprogram

Now press the "ShopTurn program" softkey if you want to create a sequential control program. (see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program")

-or-

G codeprogram

Press the "G code program" softkey if you want to create a G code program. (see Sec. "G-code Program")

Page 393: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-393

11.2.5 Selecting several programs

You can select several programs individually or in a block for subsequent copying, deleting, etc.

Selecting several

programs as a block

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the first program that you want to select.

Mark

Press the "Mark" softkey.

-or-

Expand the program selection area by pressing the cursor up or down key.

The entire block of programs is marked.

Selecting several programs individually

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the first program that you want to select.

Press the "Select" key.

-or-

Move the cursor to the next program that you want to select.

Press the "Select" key again.

The individually selected programs are marked.

Page 394: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-394 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

11.2.6 Copying/renaming a directory or program

To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing program, you can save time by copying the old directory or program and only changing selected programs or program blocks. The capability of copying and pasting directories and programs can also be used to exchange data via the USB-network drive (e.g. USB flash drive) with other ShopTurn systems. You can also rename directories or programs.

It is not possible to rename a program when it is loaded in "Machine

Auto" mode at the same time.

Copying a

directory/program

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to copy.

Copy

Press the "Copy" softkey.

Select the directory level in which you want to insert your copied directory/program.

Insert

Press the "Insert" softkey.

The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in the directory level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert it under a different name.

Press the "OK" softkey if you want to overwrite the directory/program.

-or-

Enter another name if you want to insert the program/directory under another name.

-and-

Press the "OK" softkey.

Page 395: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-395

Renaming a directory/program

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to rename.

Rename

Press the "Rename" softkey.

In the "To" field: Enter the new directory or program name. The name must be unique, i.e. two directories or programs are not permitted to have the same name.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The directory/program is renamed.

11.2.7 Deleting a directory/program

From time to time, delete the programs or directories that you are no longer using in order to keep your data manageable and to free up the NCK work memory again. Save the data beforehand, if necessary, on an external data-carrier (e.g. USB flash drive) or via a USB/network drive.

Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data

and zero point data and subdirectories that this directory contains are deleted.

If you want to free up space in the NCK memory, delete the contents of the "TEMP" directory. This is where ShopTurn stores the programs that are created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to delete.

Delete

Press the "Delete" and "OK" softkeys.

The selected directory or program is deleted.

Page 396: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-396 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

11.2.8 Backing up/importing tool or zero point data

Apart from programs, you can also save tool data and zero point settings. You can use this function, for example, to back up the tool and zero point data for a specific sequence program. If you want to execute this program at a later point in time, you will then have quick access to the relevant settings.

Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting station can be copied easily into the tool management system using this option. For further details, see: References: /FBT/, Commissioning Manual CNC: ShopTurn, SINUMERIK 840D sl/840 DE sl

You can choose which data you want to back up:

• Tool data • Magazine loading • Zero points • Basic zero point

You can also specify the amount of data to be backed up: • Complete tool list or all zero points • All tool data or zero points used in the program

The read-out of the magazine usage is only possible if your system provides for loading/unloading of tool data into/out of the magazine (see Sec. "Tool management", section "Loading/unloading a tool into the magazine").

Backing up data

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point data you wish to back up.

Continue >

Back up data

Select the "Continue" and "Back up data" softkeys.

Select the data you want to back up.

Change the suggested name if you want to. The name of the originally selected program with extension "..._TMZ" will be suggested as a name for your tool or zero point file.

Page 397: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-397

Press the "OK" softkey.

The tool/zero point data will be set up in the same directory in which the selected program is stored. If a tool/zero point file with the specified name already exists, this will now be overwritten with the new data.

If an MPF program and an INI file of the same name are located in a directory, the INI file will be automatically started when the MPF program is selected. In this way, unwanted tool data can be changed.

Importing data

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the tool/zero point data backup that you wish to re-import.

Execute

-or- Select the "Execute" softkey or the "Input" key.

The window "Read in backup data" is opened.

Select the data (tool offset data, magazine loading data, zero point data, basic work offsets) that you wish to read in.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The data are read in. Depending on which data you have selected, ShopTurn behaves as follows:

All tool offset data First, all tool management data are deleted and then the saved data are imported.

All tool offset data used in the program If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool management system, you can choose between the following options.

Replace all

Select the "Replace all" softkey to import all tool data. Any existing tools will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.

-or-

Replace none

Select the "Replace none" softkey if you want to cancel the data import.

-or-

Page 398: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.2 Managing programs with ShopMill on NCU (HMI Embedded)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-398 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Select the "No" softkey if you want to keep the old tool. If the old tool is not at the saved magazine location, it is relocated there.

-or-

Select the "Yes" softkey if you want to overwrite the old tool.

With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old tool is deleted; the old tool is unloaded beforehand in the variant with loading/unloading. If you change the tool name before importing it with "Yes", the tool will be added as an extra tool to the tool list.

Work offsets Existing work offsets are always overwritten when new offsets are imported.

Magazine loading If magazine loading data are not imported at the same time, tools are entered in the tool list without a location number.

Page 399: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-399

11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced) For the ShopTurn variant with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced), there is

also an individual hard-disk in addition to the NCK work memory. This makes it possible to store all the programs that are not currently needed in the NCK on the hard-disk. In addition, the directory management of a disk drive, USB drive, or network drive can be displayed.

ShopTurn user interface PCU 50.3

NC main memory

edit

Data manage-ment on harddisk

ShopTurn programsShopTurn subroutinesG code programsedit

edit

load

unload

saveDiskette drive

edit

Network drive

ShopTurn programsShopTurn subroutinesG code programs

ShopTurn programsShopTurn subroutinesG code programs

Data storage with PCU 50.3

You will find an overview of all directories and programs in the Program Manager.

Program manager PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

In the horizontal softkey bar, you can select the storage medium that contains the directories and programs that you want to display. In addition to the "NC" softkey, via which the data of the NCK-work memory can be displayed, another 8 softkeys can be used. You can

Page 400: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-400 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

display the directories and programs of the following storage media: • USB/Network drives (network card required) • Disk drive • Local USB front interface • The hard disk as archive directory.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

In the overview, the symbols in the left-hand column have the following meaning:

List

Program

Zero point/tool data

The directories and programs are always listed complete with the following information: • Name

The name can be up to 24 characters long. For data transfer to external systems, the name is truncated to 8 characters.

• Type Directory: WPD Program: MPF Zero point/tool data: INI

• Loaded At a cross in the "Loaded" column, you will see whether the program is still in the NCK work memory (X) or whether it is on the hard-disk ( ).

• Size (in bytes) • Date/time (of creation or last change)

You can find additional information for data-handling, selecting and executing a program in: References: /BAD/, Operating Instructions HMI Advanced.

In the "TEMP" directory, ShopTurn stores the programs that are created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.

Above the horizontal softkey bar, you will find specifications for memory space management on the hard-disk and in the NCK.

Page 401: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-401

Opening the directory

-or-

Press the "Program" softkey or the "Program Manager" key.

The directory overview is displayed.

...

Select the storage medium using the softkey.

Place the cursor on the directory that you want to open.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

All the programs in this directory are displayed.

Returning to the next highest directory level

Press the "Cursor left" key with the cursor in any line.

-or-

Place the cursor on the Return line.

-and-

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor left" key.

The next highest directory level is displayed.

11.3.1 Opening the program

To view a program in more detail or modify it, you must display the machining plan for the program.

Press the "Program" softkey.

The directory overview is displayed.

Place the cursor on the program that you want to open.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

The selected program is opened in the "Program" operating area. The machining plan of the program is displayed.

Page 402: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-402 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

11.3.2 Program execution

You can select any program that is stored in your system at any time to machine workpieces automatically.

If you want to execute a program that was created on another

machine, you must observe the following: If, on the other machine, the positive direction of rotation of the C-axis is set the other way around, you must mirror all of the position data in the program that was programmed using the parameter "C" ("C0", "CP"). This means that you change the preceding symbol of the position data.

Please also refer to the machine manufacturer's instructions.

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the program that you want to execute.

Execute

Press the "Execute" softkey.

ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the program.

Cycle Start

Then press the "Cycle Start" key.

The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a workpiece".)

If the program is already open in the "Program" operating area, press the "Execute" softkey to load the program in "Machine Auto" mode. Then start machining of the workpiece by pressing the "Cycle Start" key.

Page 403: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-403

11.3.3 Loading/unloading a program

If you do not want to execute one or more programs in the immediate future, you can unload them from the NCK work memory. The programs are then stored on the hard-disk and the NCK work memory is freed up.

As soon as you execute a program that was stored on the hard-disk, it

is automatically reloaded into the NCK work memory. However, you can load one or more sequential control programs into the NCK work memory without have to immediately execute them.

Programs that are in "Machine Auto" mode cannot be unloaded from the NCK work memory to the hard-disk.

Unloading the program

Open the Program Manager.

Position the cursor on the program that you would like to unload from the NCK work memory.

Continue >

Manualunload

Press the "Continue" and "Manual unload" softkeys.

The selected program is no longer marked with an "X" in the "Loaded" column. In the line that displays the available memory space, you will see that the NCK work memory was freed up.

Loading a program

Open the Program Manager.

Position the cursor on the program that you would like to load into the NCK work memory.

Continue >

Manualload

Press the "Continue" and "Manual load" softkeys.

The selected program is now marked with an "X" in the "Loaded" column.

Page 404: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-404 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

11.3.4 Executing a G code program from the hard disk, floppy disk or network drive

If the capacity of your NCK work memory is already close to being exhausted, you can also have G-code programs executed from the hard-disk or from diskette/USB/network drives (e.g. USB flash drive).The entire G code program is not loaded into NC main memory before it is executed, but only the first part of it. Subsequent program blocks are then continuously reloaded as the first part is executed.

When executing from the hard-disk or diskette/USB/network drives, the G-code program remains saved on them.

Sequential control programs cannot be executed from the hard-disk or diskette/USB/network drives.

Running a G code

program from the hard disk

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code program that you want to execute from hard disk.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

The program overview is displayed.

Place the cursor on the G code program that you want to execute from hard disk (without "X").

Continue >

Exec. from hard disk

Select the "Continue" and "Exec. from hard disk" softkeys.

ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the G-code program.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a workpiece".) The program contents are continuously reloaded into the NCK work memory as the machining progresses.

Page 405: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-405

Executing a G-code program from the diskette/USB/network drive

Open the Program Manager.

...

Via the softkey, select the diskette/USB/network drive or local USB port.

Place the cursor on the directory that contains the G code program you want to execute.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

The directory opens.

Place the cursor on the G code program you want to execute.

Continue >

Exec. from hard disk

Select the "Continue" and "Exec. from hard disk" softkeys.

ShopTurn now switches to "Machine Auto" mode and loads the G-code program.

Cycle Start

Press the "Cycle Start" key.

The machining of the workpiece is started (see Sec. "Machining a workpiece".) The program contents are continuously reloaded into the NCK work memory as the machining progresses.

Page 406: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-406 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

11.3.5 Creating a new directory/program

Directory structures help you to manage your program and data transparently. You can create any number of subdirectories for this purpose in a directory. You can create programs and their program blocks In a sub-directory/directory (see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program").The new program is automatically saved for you in the NCK work memory.

Creating a directory

Open the Program Manager.

New

Directory

Press the "New" and "Directory" softkeys.

Enter a new directory name.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The new directory is created.

Creating a program

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the directory in which you want to create a new program.

-or-

Press the "Input" or "Cursor right" key.

New

Press the "New" softkey.

ShopTurn program

Now press the "ShopTurn program" softkey if you want to create a sequential control program. (see Sec. "Creating a sequential control program")

-or-

G code program

Press the "G code program" softkey if you want to create a G code program. (see Sec. "Programming G-code")

Page 407: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-407

11.3.6 Selecting several programs

You can select several programs individually or in a block for subsequent copying, deleting, etc.

Selecting several

programs as a block

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the first program that you want to select.

Mark

Press the "Mark" softkey.

-or-

Expand the program selection area by pressing the cursor up or down key.

The entire block of programs is marked.

Selecting several programs individually

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the first program that you want to select.

Press the "Select" key.

-or-

Move the cursor to the next program that you want to select.

Press the "Select" key again.

The individually selected programs are marked.

Page 408: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-408 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

11.3.7 Copying/renaming/moving a directory or program

To create a new directory or program that is similar to an existing program, you can save time by copying the old directory or program and only changing selected programs or program blocks. You can also move directories or programs or rename them. The capability of cutting, copying and pasting directories and programs to another location can also be used to exchange data via diskette or USB/network drive (e.g. flash drive) with other ShopTurn systems.

It is not possible to rename a program when it is loaded in "Machine

Auto" mode at the same time.

Copying a

directory/program

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to copy.

Copy

Press the "Copy" softkey.

Select the directory level in which you want to insert your copied directory/program.

Insert

Press the "Insert" softkey.

The copied directory/program is inserted in the selected directory level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in the directory level, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert it under a different name.

Press the "OK" softkey if you want to overwrite the directory/program.

-or-

Enter another name if you want to insert the program/directory under another name.

-and-

Press the "OK" softkey.

Page 409: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-409

Renaming a directory/program

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to rename.

Rename

Press the "Rename" softkey.

In the "To" field: Enter the new directory or program name. The name must be unique, i.e. two directories or programs are not permitted to have the same name.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The directory/program is renamed.

Moving a directory/program

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to move.

Cut

Press the "Cut" softkey and then the "OK" softkey.

The selected directory/program is deleted at this point and stored in buffer memory.

Select the directory level in which you want to insert the directory/program.

Insert

Press the "Insert" softkey.

The directory/program is moved to the selected directory level. If a directory/program of the same name already exists in this directorylevel, a prompt asks whether you want to overwrite or insert it under a different name.

Press the "OK" softkey if you want to overwrite the directory/program.

-or-

Enter another name if you want to insert the program/directory under another name.

-and-

Press the "OK" softkey.

Page 410: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-410 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

11.3.8 Deleting a directory/program

Delete programs or directories from time to time that you are no longerusing to maintain a clearer overview of your data management. Save the data beforehand, if necessary, on an external data-carrier (e.g. USB FlashDrive) or on a USB/network drive.

Please note that when you delete a directory, all programs, tool data

and zero point data and subdirectories that this directory contains are deleted.

If you want to free up space in the NCK memory, delete the contents of the "TEMP" directory. This is where ShopTurn stores the programs that are created internally for calculating the stock removal processes.

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the directory/program that you want to delete.

Cut

Press the "Cut" and "OK" softkeys.

The selected directory or program is deleted.

11.3.9 Backing up/importing tool or zero point data

In addition to the programs, you can also save/read-in tool data and zero-point settings. You can use this function, for example, to back up the tool and zero point data for a specific sequence program. If you want to execute this program at a later point in time, you will then have quick access to the relevant settings.

Even tool data that you have measured on an external tool setting station can be copied easily into the tool management system using this option. For further details, see: References: /FBT/, Commissioning Manual CNC Part 4 (ShopTurn), SINUMERIK 840D sl/840 DE sl

You can choose which data you want to back up:

• Tool data • Magazine loading • Zero points • Basic zero point

Page 411: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 11/2006 Program management11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 11-411

You can also specify the amount of data to be backed up: • Complete tool list or all zero points • All tool data or zero points used in the program

The read-out of the magazine usage is only possible if your system provides for loading/unloading of tool data into or out of the magazine (see Sec. "Tool management", section "Loading/unloading a tool into the magazine").

Backing up data

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the program whose tool and zero point data you wish to back up.

Continue >

Back up data

Select the "Continue" and "Back up data" softkeys.

Select the data you want to back up.

Change the suggested name if you want to. The name of the originally selected program with extension "..._TMZ" will be suggested as a name for your tool or zero point file.

Press the "OK" softkey.

The tool/zero point data will be set up in the same directory in which the selected program is stored. If a tool/zero point file with the specified name already exists, this will now be overwritten with the new data.

If an MPF program and an INI file of the same name are located in a directory, the INI file will be automatically started when the MPF program is selected. In this way, unwanted tool data can be changed.

Importing data

Open the Program Manager.

Place the cursor on the tool/zero point data backup that you wish to re-import.

Execute

-or-

-or-

Press the "Execute" softkey or the "Input" key or "Cursor right".

The window "Read in backup data" is opened.

Select the data (tool offset data, magazine loading data, zero point data, basic work offsets) that you wish to read in.

Page 412: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

11 Program management 11/2006 11.3 Managing programs with PCU 50.3 (HMI Advanced)

11

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 11-412 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Press the "OK" softkey.

The data are read in. Depending on which data you have selected, ShopTurn behaves as follows:

All tool offset data First, all tool management data are deleted and then the saved data are imported.

All tool offset data used in the program If at least one of the tools to be read in already exists in the tool management system, you can choose between the following options.

Replace all

Select the "Replace all" softkey to import all tool data. Any existing tools will now be overwritten without a warning prompt.

-or-

Replacenone

Select the "Replace none" softkey if you want to cancel the data import.

-or-

Select the "No" softkey if you want to keep the old tool. If the old tool is not at the saved magazine location, it is relocated there.

-or-

Select the "Yes" softkey if you want to overwrite the old tool.

With the tool management option without loading/unloading, the old tool is deleted; the old tool is unloaded beforehand in the variant with loading/unloading. If you change the tool name before importing it with "Yes", the tool will be added as an extra tool to the tool list.

Work offsets Existing work offsets are always overwritten when new offsets are imported.

Magazine loading If magazine loading data are not imported at the same time, tools are entered in the tool list without a location number.

Page 413: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

12 11/2006 Messages, alarms, user data 12

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 12-413

Messages, alarms, user data

12.1 Messages.............................................................................................................. 12-414

12.2 Alarms ................................................................................................................... 12-414

12.3 User data............................................................................................................... 12-415

12.4 Version display...................................................................................................... 12-417

Page 414: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

12 Messages, alarms, user data 11/2006 12.1 Messages

12

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 12-414 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

12.1 Messages ShopTurn displays messages in the dialogue line, which give you

operating information or inform you of the progress of the machining process. The appearing messages do not interrupt the machining.

Dialogue line with a message

12.2 Alarms If errors are detected in ShopTurn, the system generates an alarm

and aborts program execution if necessary. You can display the alarms complete with alarm code, date, error text and cancel criterion. The error text gives you more detailed information on the cause of the error.

Warning

If you do not heed an alarm that is issued and do not clear the cause of the alarm, it can present a hazard to the machine, the workpiece, the saved settings and, in certain circumstances, your health.

The various alarm numbers are assigned to the following sections:

61000-62999 Cycles 100000-100999 Basic system 101000-101999 Diagnostics 102000-102999 Services 103000-103999 Machine 104000-104999 Parameters 105000-105999 Programming 106000-106999 Reserved 107000-107999 OEM 110000-111999 Reserved 112000-112999 ShopTurn 120000-120999 Reserved

A description of all the alarms can be found in References: /DA/, Diagnostics Guide SINUMERIK 840D/840Di/810D

Page 415: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

12 11/2006 Messages, alarms, user data12.3 User data

12

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 12-415

Press the "Alarm list” softkey.

The list containing the active messages and alarms appears.

Carefully check the machine according to the description given in the alarm.

Clear the cause of the alarm.

Reset Cycle Start

Press the key that appears as a symbol next to the alarm if you want to delete the alarm.

-or-

Switch the machine or controller off and then on again if the symbol of the main switch (POWER ON) is displayed next to the alarm.

12.3 User data User data are variables that are used internally by both ShopTurn and

G-code programs. These user data can be displayed in a list.

The following types of variables are defined:

• Global User Data (GUD) Global user data is valid in all programs. The display of global user data (GUD) can be disabled via keyswitch or password.

• Local User Data (LUD)

Local User Data is only valid in the program or subroutine in which it was defined. During program execution, ShopTurn displays the LUDs that are present between the current block and the end of the program. If you press the "Cycle Stop" key, the LUD list is updated. The values, however, are continuously updated.

• Global Program User Data (PUD) Global program user data is created from the local variables (LUD) defined in the main program. PUD is valid in all subroutines, where it can also be read and written. The local data is also displayed with the global program user data.

• Channel-specific user data Channel-specific user data is only applicable in one channel.

Page 416: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

12 Messages, alarms, user data 11/2006 12.3 User data

12

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 12-416 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

ShopTurn does not display user data of the AXIS and FRAME type.

To learn which variables ShopTurn displays, please see the machine manufacturer’s specifications.

Displaying user data

-or-

Press the "Tools WOs" softkey or the "Offset" key.

Press the "Expansion" key.

Press the "User data" softkey.

Globaluser data ...

Programuser data

Activate one of the softkeys to choose the user data that you want to display.

GUD + or

GUD -

You can press the "GUD +" and "GUD -" softkeys to display the global and channel-specific user data from GUD 1 to GUD 9.

Searching user data

Search

Press the "Search" softkey.

Enter the text string that you want to locate. You can search for any character string.

Press the "Accept" softkey.

The user data is displayed.

Find next

Press the "Find next" softkey to continue the search, as necessary.

The next user data that contains the search string is displayed.

Page 417: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

12 11/2006 Messages, alarms, user data12.4 Version display

12

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 12-417

12.4 Version display You can find the ShopTurn version in the start-up screen.

The ShopTurn and NCU version can also be seen on the CNC-ISO operator interface.

Displaying versions

Press the "Expansion” key in order to open the expanded basic menu bar.

Diagnosis

Service displays

Press the "Diagnosis" and "Service displays" softkeys.

Version

NCU version

Press the "Version" and "NCU version" softkeys.

The NCU version is displayed at the top of the window that appears: xx.yy.zz.nn.

Page 418: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

12 Messages, alarms, user data 11/2006 12.4 Version display

12

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 12-418 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Notes

Page 419: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 11/2006 Examples 13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 13-419

Examples

13.1 Standard machining operations ............................................................................ 13-420

13.2 Contour milling ...................................................................................................... 13-432

Page 420: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 Examples 11/2006 13.1 Standard machining operations

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 13-420 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

13.1 Standard machining operations Workpiece drawing

4x∅5

∅90

23

∅32

X 5:18

4

15°15°

R1 R1

FS3

FS2R6

X 5

M48

x2

∅60

3x45°

1035

70

80

85

95

R23FS1 FS1

∅ 3

4

23

R8

Workpiece drawing

Blank Dimensions: ∅90 x 120 mm Material: Aluminum

Tools Roughing tool_80 80°, R0.6 Roughing tool_55 55°, R0.4 Finishing tool 35°, R0.4 Recessing tool Plate width 4 Threading tool_2 Drill ∅5 Milling tool ∅8

Page 421: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 11/2006 Examples13.1 Standard machining operations

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 13-421

Program

1. Create a new program In the "Program manager" operating area, in the desired directory,

press the New

and ShopTurnprogram softkeys.

Program name (here: Enter demo part_1)

Press the softkey

2. Program header The parameter screen form “Program Header” is displayed. Define the blank:

Blank Cylinder XA 90 abs ZA 0 abs ZI -120 abs ZB -100 abs Retraction simple XRA 2 inc ZRA 5 inc Tool change point MCS XT 160 abs EK 409 abs SC 1 inc S1 4000 rpm Unit of

measurement mm

Press the softkey

3. Stock removal cycle for facing Press the

Stock removal softkeys

Enter parameters:

T Roughing tool_80 F 0.300 mm/rev V 300 m/min Machining Position

Direction Plan (parallel to the X-axis) X0 60 abs Z0 2 abs X1 -1.6 abs Z1 0 abs D 2 inc UX 0 inc UZ 0.1 inc

Page 422: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 Examples 11/2006 13.1 Standard machining operations

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 13-422 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Press the softkey

4. Input of blank contour with contour computer Press the

Newcontour softkeys

Input contour name (here: Input Cont_1)

Press the softkey

Determine the starting point of the contour:

X 60 abs Z 0 abs

Press the softkey

Input the following contour elements and confirm each with the

softkey:

1. Z -40 abs

2. X 80 abs Z -45 abs

3. Z -65 abs

4. X 90 abs Z -70 abs

5. Z -95 abs

6. X 0 abs

7. Z 0 abs

8. X 60 abs Z 0 abs

Press the softkey

Page 423: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 11/2006 Examples13.1 Standard machining operations

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 13-423

Blank contour

5. Input of finished part contour with contour computer

Press the Newcontour softkeys

Input contour name (here: Input Cont_2)

Press the softkey

Determine the starting point of the contour:

X 0 abs Z 0 abs Input the following contour elements and confirm each with the

softkey:

1. X 48 abs FS 3

2. α2 90°

3. Direction of rotation R 23 abs X 60 abs K -35 abs

I 80 abs Dialogselection

Dialogaccept FS 2

4. Z -80 abs R 6

5. X 90 abs Z -85 abs FS 3

6. Z -95 abs

Page 424: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 Examples 11/2006 13.1 Standard machining operations

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 13-424 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Press the softkey

Finished-part contour

6. Stock removal (roughing) Press the

Stock removal softkeys

Enter parameters:

T Roughing tool_80 F 0.300 mm/rev V 200 m/min Machining Direction of stock

removal Longitudinal (parallel to the Z-axis)

Machining side Exterior Machining direction ← (from front to back) D 1.9 inc Cutting depth UX 0.2 inc UZ 0.1 inc BL Contour Set machining area

limits No

Relief cuts No

Press the softkey

Page 425: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 11/2006 Examples13.1 Standard machining operations

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 13-425

Stock removal

7. Solid machine residual material Press the

Residualmaterial softkeys

Enter parameters:

T Roughing tool_55 F 0.200 mm/rev V 250 m/min Machining Direction of stock

removal Longitudinal (parallel to the Z-axis)

Machining side Exterior Machining direction ← (from front to back) D 2 inc Cutting depth UX 0.200 inc UZ 0.100 inc Set machining area

limits No

Relief cuts Yes FR 0.250 mm/rev

Press the softkey

8. Stock removal (finishing) Press the

Stock removal softkeys

Enter parameters:

T Finishing tool F 0.150 mm/rev V 300 m/min Machining

Page 426: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 Examples 11/2006 13.1 Standard machining operations

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 13-426 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Direction of stock removal

Longitudinal (parallel to the Z-axis)

Machining side Exterior Machining direction ← (from front to back) Stock allowance No Set machining area

limits No

Relief cuts Yes

Press the softkey

9. Groove (roughing)

Press the Groove

softkeys Enter parameters:

T Recessing tool F 0.150 mm/rev V 300 m/min Machining Groove position

Reference point

X0 60 abs Z0 -70 B2 8 inc T1 4 inc α1 15 degrees α2 15 degrees FS1 1 R2 1 R3 1 FS4 1 D 2 inc U 0.100 inc N 1

Press the softkey

Page 427: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 11/2006 Examples13.1 Standard machining operations

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 13-427

Recess

10. Groove (finishing) Press the

Groove

softkeys

Enter parameters:

T Recessing tool F 0.150 mm/rev V 300 m/min Machining Groove position

Reference point

X0 60 abs Z0 -70 B1 5.856 inc. T1 4 inc α1 15 degrees α2 15 degrees FS1 1 R2 1 R3 1 FS4 1 N 1

Press the softkey

11. Longitudinal threads M48x2 (roughing)

Press the Thread

Threadlong. softkeys

Enter parameters:

T Threading tool_2 P 2 mm/rev

Page 428: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 Examples 11/2006 13.1 Standard machining operations

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 13-428 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

G 0 S 400 rpm Cut segmentation Diminishing Machining type Thread External thread X0 48 abs Z0 0 abs Z1 -25 abs W 4 inc R 4 inc K 1.226 inc. α 30 degrees Infeed AS 10 U 0.020 inc V 1 inc Q 0 degrees

Press the softkey

12. Longitudinal threads M48x2 (finishing)

Press the Thread

Threadlong. softkeys

Enter parameters:

T Threading tool_2 P 2 mm/rev G 0 S 400 rpm Machining type Thread External thread X0 48 abs Z0 0 abs Z1 -25 abs W 4 inc R 4 inc K 1.226 inc. α 30 degrees Infeed V 1 inc Q 0 degrees

Press the softkey

13. Bore Press the

DrillingReaming >

Drilling

softkeys

Page 429: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 11/2006 Examples13.1 Standard machining operations

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 13-429

Enter parameters:

T Drill F 200 mm/min S 1000 rpm Position Face Point/Shaft Tip Z1 10 inc TT 0 s

Press the softkey

14. Position Press the

Positions > softkeys

Enter parameters:

Position Face Right-angle/Polar Polar Z0 0 abs C0 0 abs L0 16 abs C1 90 abs L1 16 abs C2 180 abs L2 16 abs C3 270 abs L3 16 abs

Press the softkey

15. Mill a rectangular pocket Press the

Pocket >

Rectang.pocket softkeys

Enter parameters:

T Milling tool F 0.030 mm/tooth S 1800 rpm Position Face Machining type Position Single position X0 0 abs Y0 0 abs Z0 0 abs W 23 L 23 R 8 α0 4 degrees Z1 5 inc

Page 430: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 Examples 11/2006 13.1 Standard machining operations

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 13-430 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

DXY 50 % DZ 3 UXY 0.1 mm UZ 0.1 Insertion Center FZ 50 mm/min

Press the softkey

Result

Programming graphics

Process plan

Page 431: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 11/2006 Examples13.1 Standard machining operations

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 13-431

Simulation, volume model

Page 432: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 Examples 11/2006 13.2 Contour milling

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 13-432 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

13.2 Contour milling Workpiece drawing

Ø120

R46

R50

R10

R14

R6R

10 40

80

T=5

T=3

Workpiece drawing

Blank Dimensions: ∅120 x 80 mm

Material: Aluminum

Tools Milling tool: ∅18 Milling tool: ∅5 Program

1. Create a new program In the "Program manager" operating area, in the desired directory,

press the New and

ShopTurnprogram softkeys.

Program name (here: input contour)

Press the softkey

2. Fill out the program head The parameter screen form “Program Header” is displayed. Define the blank:

Blank Cylinder XA 120 abs ZA 0 abs ZI -80 abs ZB -50 abs

Page 433: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 11/2006 Examples13.2 Contour milling

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 13-433

Retraction simple XRA 125 abs ZRA 2 abs Tool change point WCS XT 200 abs EK 200 abs SC 1 inc S1 1000 rpm Unit of measurement mm

Press the softkey

3. Input the limiting contour Press the

Contour milling

New contour softkeys

Input contour name (here: Contour_1)

Press the softkey

Determine the starting point of the contour:

Position Face X 0 abs Y -61 abs

Press the softkey

Input the following contour elements and confirm each with the

softkey:

1. Direct. of rot. R 61 abs Y -61 abs I 0 abs

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

Page 434: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 Examples 11/2006 13.2 Contour milling

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 13-434 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Limiting contour

Press the softkey

4. Input exterior contour Press the

Contour milling

New contour softkeys

Input contour name (here: Contour_2)

Press the softkey

Determine the starting point of the contour:

Position Face X 0 abs Y 50 abs

Press the softkey

Input the following contour elements and confirm each with the

softkey:

1. Direct. of rot. R 50 abs X 0 abs Y -50 abs

2. Tangent toprec. elem. Direct. of rot.

Page 435: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 11/2006 Examples13.2 Contour milling

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 13-435

R 10 abs X 0 abs

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

3. Tangent toprec. elem. Direct. of rot.

R 10 abs X 0 abs

Dialogselection

DialogÜbernahme

4. Tangent toprec. elem. Direct. of rot.

R 10 abs X 0 abs

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

5. Tangent toprec. elem. Direct. of rot.

R 10 abs X 0 abs

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

6. Tangent toprec. elem. Direct. of rot.

R 10 abs X 0 abs

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

Outside contour

Page 436: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 Examples 11/2006 13.2 Contour milling

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 13-436 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Press the softkey

5. Ream outside contour Press the

Contour milling

Remove

softkeys

Enter parameters:

T Milling tool_18 F 0.200 mm/tooth V 200 m/min Position Face Machining

Z0 0 abs Z1 5 inc DXY 50 % DZ 2 UXY 0 mm UZ 0 Start point Auto Insertion Center FZ 0.100 mm/tooth Retraction mode To retraction plane

Press the softkey

6. Input inside contour Press the

Contour milling

New contour softkeys

Input contour name (here: Contour_3)

Press the softkey

Determine the starting point of the contour:

Machining plane Face X 0 abs Y 46 abs

Press the softkey

Input the following contour elements and confirm each with the

softkey:

1. Direct. of rot. R 46 abs X 0 abs Y -46 abs

Page 437: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 11/2006 Examples13.2 Contour milling

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 13-437

2. Tangent toprec. elem. Direct. of rot.

R 6 abs X 0 abs

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

3. Tangent toprec. elem. Direct. of rot.

R 14 abs X 0 abs

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

4. Tangent toprec. elem. Direct. of rot.

R 6 abs X 0 abs

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

5. Tangent toprec. elem. Direct. of rot.

R 14 abs X 0 abs

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

6. Tangent toprec. elem. Direct. of rot.

R 6 abs X 0 abs

Dialogselection

Dialogaccept

Page 438: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 Examples 11/2006 13.2 Contour milling

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 13-438 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Inside contour

Press the softkey

7. Ream inside contour Press the

Contour milling

Remove softkeys

Enter parameters:

T Milling tool_5 F 0.200 mm/tooth V 250 m/min Position Face Machining

Z0 0 abs Z1 3 inc DXY 100 % DZ 2 UXY 0 mm UZ 0 Start point Auto Insertion Center FZ 0.100 mm/tooth Retraction mode To retraction plane

Press the softkey

Page 439: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 11/2006 Examples13.2 Contour milling

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 13-439

Result

Programming graphics

Process plan

Page 440: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

13 Examples 11/2006 13.2 Contour milling

13

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. 13-440 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Notes

Page 441: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

A 11/2006 Appendix A

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition A-441

Appendix

A Abbreviations ..........................................................................................................A-442

B Index .......................................................................................................................I-445

Page 442: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

A Appendix 11/2006 A Abbreviations

A

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. A-442 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

A Abbreviations ABS Absolute dimension

CNC Computerized Numerical Control

COM Communication Component of NC control that performs and coordinates communication.

D Cutting edge

DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Industry Standard)

DRF Differential Resolver Function The function in conjunction with an electronic handwheel generates an incremental work offset in automatic mode.

DRY DRY run: Dry run feedrate

F Feedrate

GUD Global User Data

INC INCrement

INC Incremental dimensions

INI INItializing data

LED Light Emitting Diode

M01 M function: Programmed stop

MCS Machine Coordinate System

MD Machine data

MDA Manual Data Automatic

MPF Main Program File: Main program

NC Numerical Control The NC control comprises the components NCK, PLC, PCU and COM.

Page 443: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

A 11/2006 AppendixA Abbreviations

A

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition A-443

NCK Numerical Control Kernel: A component of the NC control that processes the programs and essentially coordinates the movement processes for the tool machine.

OP Operator Panel

PC Personal Computer

PCU Personal Computer Unit Component of NC control allowing communication between operator and machine.

PLC Programmable Logic Control: Component of NC control for processing machine tool control logic

PRT Program test

REF Approaching a reference point

REPOS Reposition

ROV Rapid OVerride

S Spindle speed

SBL Single BLock

SI Safety Integrated

SKP SKiP: Skip block

SPF Sub Program File

SW Software

T Tool

TMZ Tool Magazine Zero

V Cutting rate

WCS Workpiece Coordinate System

WO Zero/work offset

WPD Workpiece Directory

Page 444: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

A Appendix 11/2006 A Abbreviations

A

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. A-444 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Notes

Page 445: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

I 11/2006 AppendixIndex

I

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition I-445

B Index

3 3D probe, 2-62 3-window view, 3-118 A Abort program, 3-94 ABS, 4-130 Absolute dimension, 4-130 Accepting parameters, 1-43 Access authorization, 1-30 Additional command, 5-212, 5-214, 5-274 Alarms, 12-414 Alignment angle, 8-352, 8-354 Angular offset, 5-205 Annular slot, 5-252 Append contour element, 5-218, 5-280 Approach, 4-128 Approach cycle, 5-324 Approach mode, 5-283 Approach strategy, 5-283 Arithmetic variables, 7-350 Automatic mode, 2-52 Auxiliary function, 3-108 Axes

Positioning, 2-83 Repositioning, 3-97 Traversing, 2-81

Axis key, 1-28 B B axis, 8-352

Approach/return, 8-356 Measure tool, 8-359 Milling, 8-354 Position pattern, 8-358 Swiveling, 8-355 Tool selection in manual mode, 8-360

Backing up tool data, 11-396, 11-410 Backing up zero point data, 11-410 Backing up zero point data, 11-396 Base offset, 2-73 Blank, 4-138 Blank shape

Modifying, 3-114 Block search, 3-98 Bore, 5-169 Box, 5-184 Broken-line graphics, 1-39

Button, 2-61 C C1, 0-7 C3, 0-7 Calculation variants, 3-98 Calipers

Calibrating, 2-69 Cancel execution, 3-94 Centering, 5-169, 5-287 Chaining, 4-124 Change settings, 5-320 Change the tool's cutting edge position, 2-63 Changing dialog selection, 5-219, 5-281 Changing program settings, 5-320 Channel operational messages, 1-32 Channel status, 1-32 Chipbreaking, 5-166, 5-168, 5-171, 5-173 Circle

Known center point, 5-158 Known radius, 5-159

Circular pocket, 5-238 Circular spigot, 5-246 Circumferential slot, 5-252 Clamp spindle

Contour milling, 5-268 Drilling, 5-165

Close contour, 5-216, 5-276 CNC-ISO operator interface, 1-44 Collet dimensions, 2-54 Complete, 5-314 Complete machining, 4-145 Contour, 0-7

Change, 5-218 Copying, 4-148 Create, 5-271 Creating, 5-212 Exact machining, 5-214 Island, 5-266 Pocket, 5-266 Renaming, 4-149 Representation, 5-209, 5-269 Rounding, 5-222 Start point, 5-212

Contour beginning, 5-212, 5-271 Contour calculator, 5-208, 5-266 Contour element

Page 446: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

I Appendix 11/2006 Index

I

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. I-446 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Creating, 5-213, 5-273 Contour end

Transition element, 5-214 Contour milling, 5-266 Contour pocket

Center, 5-287 Chamfer, 5-300 Finishing, 5-296 Milling, 5-291 Predrill, 5-287 Residual material, 5-294 Roughing, 5-291

Contour spigot, 5-268 Chamfer, 5-309 Finishing, 5-306 Milling, 5-301 Residual material, 5-304 Roughing, 5-301

Contour transition element, 5-213, 5-274 Contour turning, 5-208 Coolant, 2-65 Coordinate system, 1-21 Coordinate transformation, 2-73

Defining, 5-322 Count, 10-382 Counterspindle, 4-144

Machining, 5-314 Creating a directory, 11-392, 11-406 Creating a program, 11-392, 11-406 Cut segmentation, 5-222 Cutting depth, 5-221 Cutting edge, 4-143 Cutting rate, 4-144 Cycle, 0-7 Cycle approach, 4-128 Cycle support, 7-342 D D, 4-143 Deep hole drilling, 5-171 Delete contour element, 5-220, 5-282 Deleting machining lines, 3-119 Dialog line, 1-31 Directory

Copying, 11-394, 11-408 Create new, 11-392 Delete, 11-410 Deleting, 11-395

Moving, 11-409 Renaming, 11-395, 11-409 Selecting, 11-388

Disable magazine location, 10-384 Displaying basic block, 3-96 DP, 2-63 Drawer, 5-206 Drill, 2-60 Drilling

Centered, 5-166 Deep, 5-171 Manual machine, 6-338

DRY run feedrate, 3-112 Duplo number, 10-375 E Emergency stop, 1-27 Enable magazine location, 10-384 End, 7-349 End face, 4-127 End of contour, 5-212, 5-271 End of program, 4-125, 4-138, 4-150 Engraving, 5-259 Entering parameters, 1-42 Equidistant, 2-57 External thread, 5-175 F F, 4-144 Face, 4-127 Face milling, 5-301 Feed interruption, 5-222 Feedrate, 4-144 Feedrate override, 1-29 Feedrate status, 1-32 Finding an empty location, 10-378, 10-380 Finishing, 4-145 Finishing tool, 2-59 Fit, 4-135 Front, 5-314 Front C, 4-127 Front edge, 2-54 Front view, 3-116 Front Y, 4-127 Full circle, 5-186 Function group, 4-142 G G code

Copying, 7-348

Page 447: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

I 11/2006 AppendixIndex

I

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition I-447

Cutting, 7-348 Finding, 7-348 Into sequence program, 5-326 Pasting, 7-348 Selecting, 7-347

G code block, 5-326 Renumber, 7-349

G code editor, 7-347 G code program

Creating, 7-342 Execute, 11-404 Executing, 7-345

G function, 3-108 G-Code program

Execution, 11-391 Gearbox stage, 2-80 Grinding allowance, 5-217, 5-218 Gripping, 5-314 Groove side offset, 5-284 Grooving, 5-226

Residual material, 5-228 H H function, 3-108 Hard disk, 11-404 Hardkeys

Operation, 1-34 Help display, 1-41 I Idle cuts

Manual machine, 6-338 Importing tool data, 11-396 Importing zero point data, 11-396 INC, 4-131 Inch, 2-52 Inclined axis, 4-126 Increment, 2-82 Incremental dimension, 4-131 Incremental dimensions, 4-131 Input box, 1-42 Insert a contour element, 5-219, 5-281 Insert mode, 1-43 Inside contour, 5-274 Internal thread, 5-175 K Keylock switch, 1-30 L Line, 5-180

Loading a program, 11-403 Longitudinal slot, 5-249 Lowercase letters, 5-260 M M function, 2-86, 3-108 M01, 3-103 Machine control panel, 1-27 Machine Coordinate System, 2-53 Machine manual, 2-51 Machine run times, 2-88 Machine zero, 1-21 Machining, 4-145

Simulating, 3-109 Simultaneous recording, 3-109 Starting, 3-92 Stopping, 3-92

Machining direction, 5-320 Machining feedrate, 4-144 Machining lines, 3-110 Machining type, 4-145 Magazine

Positioning, 10-381 Magazine list, 10-371 Magnifying glass, 2-71, 3-119 Main program, 5-311 Main spindle, 4-144 Manual Data Input, 2-87 Manual machine, 6-332

Drilling, 6-338 Milling, 6-339 Simulation, 6-339 Traverse movements, 6-334 Turning, 6-338 Zero offsets, 6-333

Manual mode, 2-79 M function, 2-86 Positioning axes, 2-83 Spindle, 2-80 Stock removal, 2-83 Tool, 2-79 Traversing axes, 2-81 Unit of measurement, 2-87 Work offset, 2-86

Marker, 5-313 Matrix, 5-181 Matrix position pattern

Matrix, 5-181

Page 448: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

I Appendix 11/2006 Index

I

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. I-448 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

MCS, 2-53 MDA, 2-51, 2-87 Measuring

Workpiece zero, 2-72 Measuring cycle support, 7-342 Messages, 12-414 Millimeters, 2-52 Milling

Manual machine, 6-339 Milling tool, 2-60 Mirror writing, 5-260 Mirroring, 5-323 Modifying contour element, 5-218, 5-280 Multifix tool holder

Manual machine, 10-369 Multiple edge, 5-257 N Network drive, 11-391, 11-404 New contour

Milling, 5-271 New program, 4-138 New tool, 10-372 Number of workpieces, 4-150 O Offset, 5-322 Online help, 7-342 OP 010S operator panel, 1-23 OP 012 operator panel, 1-24

Open directory, 11-388, 11-401

Operating plane, 4-126 Operation, 1-34 Operator panel OP 010, 1-22 Operator panel OP 010C, 1-23 Operator panel OP 015, 1-24 Origin, 3-119 Outside contour, 5-274 Overall, 4-127 P Parameter

Calculating, 1-43 Changing, 1-43 Deleting, 1-43 Selecting, 1-42

Parameterization screen form, 1-40 Parting, 5-206 Password, 1-30 Path milling, 5-282

Peripheral surface, 4-127 Peripheral surface C, 4-127 Peripheral Y, 4-127 Pitch circle, 5-188 Plunge-turning, 5-229 Plunge-turning

Residual material, 5-231 Pocket

Circular, 5-238 Rectangular, 5-234

Pole, 4-132, 5-161 Position, 5-256

Freely programmable, 5-178 Repeating, 5-191

Position pattern Box, 5-184 Full circle, 5-186 Line, 5-180 Pitch circle, 5-188

Positioning block, 4-125 POWER ON, 12-415 Predrilling, 5-287 Prewarning limit, 10-382 Process plan, 1-39 Processing time, 3-110 Program, 0-6

Copying, 11-394, 11-408 Correcting, 3-107 Create new, 11-392 Creating, 4-138 Delete, 11-410 Deleting, 11-395 Execute, 11-402 Execution, 11-390 from another machine, 11-390, 11-402 Moving, 11-409 Open, 11-389, 11-401 Overstore, 3-105 Renaming, 11-395, 11-409 Running in, 3-94 Select, 3-92 Select several, 11-393, 11-407 Starting, 3-94 Stopping, 3-94 Testing, 3-106 Unload, 11-403

Program block, 4-124

Page 449: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

I 11/2006 AppendixIndex

I

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition I-449

Chained, 4-124 Change, 4-146 Copying, 4-148 Creating, 4-142 Cutting, 4-148 Displaying, 3-96 Number, 4-149 Pasting, 4-148 Repeating, 5-313 Searching for, 4-149 Selecting, 4-148

Program control, 1-32 Dry run feedrate, 3-120

Program editor, 4-147 Program header, 4-124, 4-138 Program management

PCU 50.3, 11-399 ShopTurn on NCU (HMI Embedded, 11-387

Program manager, 11-387, 11-399 Program structure, 4-124 Programming

with two tool holders, 9-362 Programming graphics, 1-39 Pulling, 5-314 Q Quantity, 4-150 R Radius compensation, 4-143 Rapid traverse, 2-83 Rapid traverse override, 1-29 Reading in tool data, 11-410 Reaming, 5-169 Rear side, 5-314 Recess, 5-195 Recessing tool, 2-60 Recompile, 7-343, 7-344 Rectangular pocket, 5-234 Rectangular spigot, 5-242 Remote diagnostics, 1-44 Removal

Residual material, 5-224 Repeat, 5-313 Replacement tool, 10-375 Repos, 3-97 Repositioning, 3-97 Reset, 1-27 Residual material

Contour pocket, 5-294 Contour spigot, 5-304 Grooving, 5-228 Plunge-turning, 5-231 Removal, 5-224

Retract, 4-128 Retract mode, 5-283 Retract strategy, 5-283 Retraction, 4-139, 5-320 Return cycle, 5-324 Reworking threads

Manual machine, 6-339 Rotary drill, 2-58, 2-61, 10-372 Rotation, 5-322 Rotation C, 5-323 Roughing, 4-145 Roughing tool, 2-59 S S, 4-144 S1, 0-7, 1-31 S2, 0-7, 1-31 S3, 0-7, 1-31 Safety clearance, 4-140 Scale, 2-78 Scaling, 5-323 Screw tap, 2-61 Search

Block, 3-100 Text, 3-102

Secondary mode, 1-32 Security classs, 1-30 Selecting a dialog, 5-214, 5-275 Selecting the unit, 1-43 Selecting the zero offset

Manual machine, 6-333 Sequence program, 4-136 Set machining area limits, 5-222 Settings

Automatic mode, 3-120 Manual mode, 2-86

ShopTurn Open, 1-46 Side view, 3-115 Simulation, 3-111, 7-345

Manual machine, 6-339 Simultaneous recording

Before machining, 3-112 During machining, 3-113

Page 450: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

I Appendix 11/2006 Index

I

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. I-450 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Single Block, 3-95 Single block fine, 3-94 Skip, 3-104 Slot

Circumferential, 5-252 Longitudinal, 5-249

Soft key CNC ISO, 1-44 Overview, 4-136

Softkey Abort, 1-37 Accept, 1-37 Back, 1-37 OK, 1-37 Operation, 1-34

Special characters, 5-260 Speed limit, 4-140 Spigot

Circular, 5-246 Rectangular, 5-242

Spindle override, 1-29 Spindle speed, 4-144 Spindle status, 1-32 Start, 7-349 Stock removal, 5-166, 5-168, 5-171, 5-173, 5-192,

5-220 Manual mode, 2-83

Stop, 2-61 Stop edge, 2-54 Straight line, 5-156

Manual machine, 6-336 Polar, 5-162

Subroutine, 5-311 Supplementary axis, 0-7 Switching off, 2-48 Switching on, 2-48 Synchronization point, 5-205 T T, 4-143 Tailstock, 4-129, 4-140 Tangent, 5-214, 5-275 Taper

Manual machine, 6-335 Teach tool change point, 4-142 Teaching, 5-328

Contour object, 5-330 Cycle, 5-328

Position sample, 5-329 Teaching a contour object, 5-330 Teaching a cycle, 5-328 Teaching a position sample, 5-329 Technology block, 4-125 TEMP, 11-395, 11-410 Thread

Centered, 5-168 Cutting, 5-201 Milling, 5-175 Multiple, 5-204 Remachining, 5-205 Tapping, 5-173

Thread undercut, 5-199 Threading tool, 2-60 Tolerance class, 4-135 Tolerance quality, 4-135 Tool, 4-143

Changing name, 10-373 Create, 10-372 Delete, 10-376 Loading, 10-377 Relocate, 10-379 Several cutting edges, 10-374 Sorting, 10-376 Unloading, 10-378

Tool alignment, 8-354 Tool change point, 4-140 Tool holder

two, 9-362 Tool Length Compensation, 2-56 Tool life, 10-382 Tool list, 2-62, 10-366 Tool magazine, 10-371 Tool monitoring, 10-382 Tool name, 2-59 Tool nose radius compensation, 2-57 Tool offset data, 2-56, 10-367 Tool radius compensation, 2-57 Tool spindle, 4-144 Tool type, 2-63 Tool wear data, 10-381 Tool wear list, 10-370 Tool-specific specifications, 10-368 Total offset, 2-73 Turn out a collet, 2-83 Turning, 4-127

Page 451: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

I 11/2006 AppendixIndex

I

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition I-451

Manual machine, 6-338 Turning machines

with B axis, 8-352 Turning tool

with two tool holders, 9-362 U Undercut

Form E, 5-198 Form F, 5-198 Thread, 5-199

Unit of measurement, 2-52, 4-138 USB drive, 11-391, 11-404 User data, 12-415 User interface, 1-31 V V, 4-144 Variables, 12-415 Version display, 12-417 Volume model, 3-117 W WCS, 2-53 Wear, 10-382

Work offset Basic, 2-73 Coordinate transformation, 2-73 Total, 2-73

Work offset list, 2-77 Work offsets

Calling, 5-321 Workpiece Coordinate System, 2-53 Workpiece counter

G-code programs, 3-121 Workpiece zero, 1-21

Measuring, 2-72 Workpieces, number of, 4-150 Z Z3, 0-7 Zero offsets

Manual machine, 6-333 Zero/work offset, 2-73 Zero-point offsets

Defining, 2-76 Zoom, 3-119

Page 452: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

I Appendix 11/2006 Index

I

© Siemens AG 2006 All rights reserved. I-452 SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition

Notes

Page 453: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

To SIEMENS AG

Suggestions Corrections

A&D MC MS1 Postfach 3180 91050 ERLANGEN, GERMANY Phone: +49 (0) 180 5050 – 222 [Hotline] Fax: +49 (0) 9131 98 – 63315 [Documentation] mailto:[email protected]

For Publication/Manual:

SINUMERIK 840D sl ShopTurn

User Documentation

From Name Address of your Company/Dept.

Street:

Zip code: City:

Telephone: /

Telefax: /

Operation/Programming Order No.: 6FC5398-5AP10-1BA0

11/2006 Edition Should you come across any printing errors when reading this publication, please notify us on this sheet. Suggestions for improvements are also welcome.

Suggestions and/or corrections

Page 454: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes
Page 455: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes

General Documentation

SINUMERIK

Brochure

Overview of SINUMERIK 840D sl / 840Di sl Documentation

SINUMERIK840D sl840Di sl

Catalog NC 61 *)

SINAMICSS120

Catalog D21.1Converter Chassis Units *)

User Documentation

SINUMERIK840D sl

Operating Manual_ HMI sl– HMI Embedded *)– ShopMill– ShopTurn

SINUMERIK840D sl840D840Di sl840Di810D

Operating Manual– HMI Advanced– Programming compact

SINUMERIK840D sl840D840Di sl840Di810D

Programming Manual– Fundamentals *)– Advanced *)– Programming compact– Lists System Variables– ISO Turning/Milling

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK840D sl

ManualNCU *)

SINUMERIK840D sl840Di sl

ManualOperator Components *)

SINUMERIK840D sl

Commissioning Manual CNC *)– NCK, PLC, Drive– HMI sl– HMI Embedded– HMI Advanced– ShopMill– ShopTurn– Base Software

Manufacturer/Service Documentation

SINUMERIK840D sl840D840Di sl840Di810D

Function Manual– Basic Machine *)– Extended Functions– Special Functions

SINUMERIK840D sl840D840Di sl840Di810D

Function Manual– Synchronized Actions– Iso Dialects

SINAMICSS120

Function ManualDrive Functions

SINUMERIK840D sl840D840Di sl840Di810D

Programming Manual– Cycles– Measuring Cycles

SINUMERIK840D sl840Di sl

Diagnostics Manual *)

SINUMERIK840Di sl

Commissioning Manual

SINUMERIK840D sl840Di sl

Parameter Manual *)– Part 1– Part 2

SINUMERIK840D sl

Function ManualSafety Integrated

SINUMERIK840D sl840D840Di sl840Di810D

EMC Guidelines

Electronic Documentation

SINUMERIKSINAMICSMotors

DOCONCD *)DOCONWEB *) These documents are a minimum requirement

Page 456: 1 2 3 SINUMERIK 840D sl - Siemens · SINUMERIK 840D sl Operation/Programming ShopTurn (BAT) - 11/2006 Edition 2.8.2 Traversing the axes